®
O W N ER'S MAN UAL
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPOR-
TANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p.
3, 4), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 5). These sections provide important
information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in
order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, and Appendices
should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on
hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 1998 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Roland Homepage http:/ / www.rolandcorp.com/
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read all the instructions before using the product.
2. Do not use this product near water — for example, near a
bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near
a swimming pool, or the like.
3. This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is
recommended by the manufacturer.
8. The power-supply cord of the product should be unplugged
from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
9. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids
are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
10.The product should be serviced by qualified service
personnel when:
4. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier
and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do
not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level
or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any
hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist.
5. The product should be located so that its location or position
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
6. The product should be located away from heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce
heat.
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
product; or
C. The product has been exposed to rain; or
D. The product does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure
damaged.
11.Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described
in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
7. The product should be connected to a power supply only of
the type described in the operating instructions or as marked
on the product.
For the USA
GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or breakdown, grounding provides a path of least resistance for
electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock.
This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be
plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
DANGER: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a
qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded.
Do not modify the plug provided with the product — if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
The product which is equipped with a THREE WIRE GROUNDING TYPE LINE PLUG must be grounded.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the instruc-
tions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
...........................................................................................................
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using extension
cords—the total power used by all devices you have
connected to the extension cord’s outlet must never
exceed the power rating (watts/ amperes) for the
extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insula-
tion on the cord to heat up and eventually melt
through.
• Do not open or perform any internal modifications
on the unit. (The only exception would be where
this manual provides specific instructions which
should be followed in order to put in place user-
installable options; see Quick Start p. 49.)
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
w ith you r retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as list-
ed on the “Information” page.
...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
• Avoid damaging the power cord. Do not bend it
excessively, step on it, place heavy objects on it, etc.
A damaged cord can easily become a shock or fire
hazard. Never use a power cord after it has been
damaged.
• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord
before attempting installation of the Hard disk drive
unit (HDP88 series: Quick Start p. 49).
...........................................................................................................
• In households with small children, an adult should
provide supervision until the child is capable of fol-
lowing all the rules essential for the safe operation
of the unit.
...........................................................................................................
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
...........................................................................................................
• Try to prevent cord s and cables from becoming
entangled . Also, all cord s and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
...........................................................................................................
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
...........................................................................................................
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
...........................................................................................................
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external
devices.
...........................................................................................................
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 33).
...........................................................................................................
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in
your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of
the outlet.
...........................................................................................................
• When installing the Hard disk drive unit (HDP88
series), remove only the specified screws (Quick
Start p. 49).
...........................................................................................................
• If you use the optical connector, be sure that the
connector cover you removed is placed out of the
reach of children.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPO RTAN T N O TES
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” on pages 2–4, please read and observe the
following:
the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as
when circuitry related to memory itself is out of
ord er), w e regret that it may not be possible to
restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
Po w e r Su p p ly
Ad d itio n a l Pre ca u tio n s
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with
any device that will generate line noise (such as an
electric motor or variable lighting system).
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself
against the risk of loosing important data, we rec-
ommend that you periodically save a backup copy
of important d ata you have stored in the unit’s
memory on a storage device (e.g., hard disk or Zip
disk), or DAT recorder.
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off
the power to all units. This will help prevent mal-
fu nctions and / or d am age to sp eakers or other
devices.
Pla ce m e n t
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the
contents of data that was stored on a storage device
(e.g., hard disk or Zip disk), or DAT recorder once it
has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no lia-
bility concerning such loss of data.
Using the unit near pow er am plifiers (or other
equipment containing large power transformers)
may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change
the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away
from the source of interference.
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the
unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when
using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can
lead to malfunctions.
This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of
such receivers.
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it
near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an
enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to tempera-
ture extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discol-
or the unit.
A small amount of noise may be heard from the dis-
play during normal operation.
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp
the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This
way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the
cable’s internal elements.
Ma in te n a n ce
A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit
For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry
cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with
water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impreg-
n ated w ith a m ild , n on -abrasive d etergen t.
Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly
with a soft, dry cloth.
during normal operation.
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the
unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer
to use headphones, so you do not need to be con-
cerned about those around you (especially when it
is late at night).
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of
any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration
and/ or deformation.
When you need to transport the unit, package it in
the box (including padding) that it came in, if possi-
ble. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent
packaging materials.
Re p a irs a n d Da ta
If an internal IDE hard d isk (H DP88 series) is
installed, then remove the hard disk. Place the hard
disk in its carton and set this in the specified place
inside the VS-880EX shipping carton. The unit is
now ready to be transported. Moving the VS-880EX
with the hard disk installed may result in loss of
song data or damage to the hard disk.
Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
m em ory m ay be lost w hen the u nit is sent for
repairs. Important data should always be backed up
on a storage device (e.g., hard disk or Zip disk) or
DAT recorder, or written down on paper (when
possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTES
Ha n d lin g th e Disk Drive
Co n ce rn in g Co p y rig h t
For details on hard disk handling, refer also to the
instructions that accompanied your hard disk.
The law prohibits the unauthorized recording, public
performance, broadcast, sale, or distribution etc. of a
work (CD recording, video recording, broadcast, etc.)
whose copyright is owned by a third party.
Before performing any of the following actions, be
sure to perform the shutdown procedure. Failure to
do so may result in loss of song data or damage to
the hard disk.
Roland will take no responsibility for any infringe-
ment of copyright that you may commit in using the
VS-880EX.
• Turning off the power of the VS-880EX
• Turning off the power of the Zip drive connected
with SCSI connector
Ab o u t SCMS
The VS-880EX does not implement SCMS. This design
decision was made with the intent that SCMS should
not restrict the creation of original compositions which
do not violate copyright law. Do not use this device in
a way which would infringe on copyrights held by
another.
• Removing a disk from a Zip drive connected with
SCSI connector
Shutdown (Appendices p. 124)
When the VS-880EX MIDI/ DISK ind icator or Zip
drive status indicator is lit, it means that data is being
written to or from the hard disk. If you are using a Zip
d rive, confirm that this ind icator is not lit before
removing disks.
SCMS (Appendices p. 124)
Discla im e r o f Lia b ility
While using the VS-880EX, be careful not to subject
the unit to vibration or shock, and avoid moving the
unit while the power is turned on.
Roland will take no responsibility for any direct dam-
ages, consequential damages, or any other damages
which may result from your use of the VS-880EX.
These damages may include but are not limited to the
following events which can occur when using the VS-
880EX.
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area
free from vibration. If the unit must be installed at
an angle, be sure the installation does not exceed
the permissible range.
Any loss of profit that may occur to you.
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been
moved to a location with a level of humidity that is
greatly different than its former location. Rapid
changes in the environment can cause condensation
to form inside the drive, which will adversely affect
the operation of the drive and/ or damage remov-
able disks. When the unit has been moved, allow it
to become accustomed to the new environment
(allow a few hours) before operating it.
Permanent loss of your music or data.
Inability to continue using the VS-880EX itself or a
connected device.
Ab o u t th e Lice n se Ag re e m e n t
The VS-880EX and its CD-R capability are designed to
allow you to reproduce material to which you have
copyright, or material which the copyright owner has
granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, repro-
duction of music CDs or other copyrighted material
without the permission of the copyright owner, other
than for your own personal use and enjoyment (pri-
vate use) constitutes copyright infringement, which
may incur penalties. Consult a copyright specialist or
special publications for more detailed information on
obtaining such permission from copyright holders.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CO N TEN TS
Preparations .......................................................................... 12
About the Package Contents ...................................................................................... 12
Main Features ............................................................................................................. 12
Front and Rear Panels .......................................................... 14
Mixer Section .............................................................................................................. 14
Recorder Section ........................................................................................................ 16
Display section ............................................................................................................ 18
Rear Panel .................................................................................................................. 19
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology) ........ 21
Saving and Managing Data ......................................................................................... 21
Managing Disk Contents (Partitioning) ......................................................................... 21
The Location Where a Performance is Recorded (Song) ............................................. 22
Sources, Tracks, and Channels ........................................................................................ 22
About Events ...................................................................................................................... 23
Mixer Section .............................................................................................................. 24
Signal Flow (Buses) ........................................................................................................... 24
Input Mixer ......................................................................................................................... 26
Track Mixer ......................................................................................................................... 27
Effect Return Mixer ........................................................................................................... 27
Switching the Fader Functions ........................................................................................ 28
Master Block ....................................................................................................................... 28
Recorder Section ........................................................................................................ 28
Differences with a Tape-Type MTR ................................................................................ 28
Track Minutes and Recording Time ............................................................................... 29
Auxiliary Tracks for Each Track ...................................................................................... 30
Effects Section ............................................................................................................ 31
About the Effect Expansion Board .................................................................................. 31
Connecting Effects ............................................................................................................. 31
Chapter 2 Basic Operation ................................................... 32
Before You Begin ........................................................................................................ 32
Turning On the Power ...................................................................................................... 32
If You Have Trouble Understanding Displays or Operations .................................... 32
Before You Finish Operations ..................................................................................... 32
Saving the Performance to Disk (Song Store) ................................................................ 32
Turning Off the Power ...................................................................................................... 33
Restarting ............................................................................................................................ 33
Basic Operations on the VS-880EX ............................................................................ 34
Display Each of the Condition Menus ............................................................................ 34
Selecting Pages Contained in Functions and Settings .................................................. 34
Select the Setting You Want to Change .......................................................................... 35
Change the Settings Values .............................................................................................. 35
Execute the Operation ....................................................................................................... 35
Switching Track Conditions ......................................................................................... 35
Changing the Current Time ......................................................................................... 36
Moving in Frame Units ..................................................................................................... 36
Moving in Measure/ Beat Units ....................................................................................... 36
Moving to the Beginning or End of the Performance .................................................. 36
Storing a Time Location .............................................................................................. 36
Using the Locator ............................................................................................................... 37
Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 38
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording ......................................... 40
Recording .................................................................................................................... 40
Items Necessary for Multi-Track Recording .................................................................. 40
Creating a New Song (Song New) .................................................................................. 40
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
General Course of the Recording Process ................................................................. 41
Connecting Instruments .............................................................................................. 41
Recording to the Tracks .............................................................................................. 42
Saving a Recorded Performance (Song Store) ........................................................... 43
Recording Over a Portion of a Performance (Punch-In/Punch-Out) ........................... 44
Using the RECORD Button (Manual Punch-In 1) ......................................................... 44
Using the Foot switch (Manual Punch-In 2) .................................................................. 44
Specifying Beforehand the Location for Rerecording (Auto Punch-In) .................... 45
Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Area (Loop Recording) .................................. 47
Recording to Other Tracks (Overdubbing) .................................................................. 49
Recording on V-Track 2 .................................................................................................... 49
Using Effects ............................................................................................................... 50
Applying Effects to the Playback .................................................................................... 50
Applying Effects While Recording (Send/ Return) ...................................................... 51
Applying Effects While Recording (Insert) .................................................................... 52
Recording Digital Signals ............................................................................................ 55
Items Necessary for Digital Recording ........................................................................... 55
Make the Digital Connections ......................................................................................... 55
Match the Sample Rates .................................................................................................... 55
Select the Master Clock ..................................................................................................... 56
Select an Input Source ....................................................................................................... 56
Adjusting the Tone (Equalizer) .................................................................................... 57
Using the 3-Band Equalizer .............................................................................................. 57
Adjusting the Equalizer .................................................................................................... 57
Combining the Contents of Tracks (Track Bouncing) ................................................. 60
Applying Reverb While Track Bouncing ....................................................................... 61
Creating a Master Tape .............................................................................................. 63
To Record to a Cassette Tape ........................................................................................... 63
Recording with DAT and MD Recorders ....................................................................... 63
Protecting Songs (Song Protect) ................................................................................. 64
Protecting Performances ................................................................................................... 65
To Remove Song Protect ................................................................................................... 65
Selecting a Song (Song Select) .................................................................................. 65
Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects ................................... 66
Composition of the Effects .......................................................................................... 66
Connecting the Effects ................................................................................................ 66
Changing the Source Sound Itself (Insert) ..................................................................... 66
Inserting with Input and Track Channels ...................................................................... 67
Inserting an Effect into the Master Block ....................................................................... 67
Adding the Sound with the Effect Applied to the Direct Sound (Send/ Return) ..... 68
Selecting Effects (Patch) ............................................................................................. 70
Creating New Effects Sounds ..................................................................................... 71
When Saving to User Patches .......................................................................................... 72
When Storing to a Scene ................................................................................................... 72
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings ......................................... 73
Recording the Current Condition of the Mixer (Scene) ............................................... 73
Making Mixer Settings Automatically(EZ Routing) ...................................................... 74
Recalling Recording Settings (Recording/ Template) .................................................. 75
Recalling Track Bouncing Settings (Bouncing/ Template) .......................................... 75
Recalling Mixdown Settings (Mixdown/ Template) .................................................... 76
Storing Recording Settings (Recording/ Step Edit) ...................................................... 77
Storing Track Bouncing Settings (Bouncing/ Step Edit) .............................................. 81
Storing Mixdown Settings (Mixdown/ Step Edit) ........................................................ 84
Saving the Current Routing (User Routing) .................................................................. 87
Recalling User Routing ..................................................................................................... 87
Deleting User Routings ..................................................................................................... 87
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing) ... 88
About Editing Operations ............................................................................................ 88
Track Edit .................................................................................................................... 88
About the Bar Display ....................................................................................................... 88
Repeating Performance Data (Track Copy) ................................................................... 89
Moving Performance Data (Track Move) ...................................................................... 91
Exchanging Performance Data Between Tracks (Track Exchange) ............................ 92
Inserting a Blank Space Into Performance Data (Track Insert) ................................... 93
Deleting Performance Data (Track Cut) ......................................................................... 94
Erasing Performance Data (Track Erase) ....................................................................... 95
Modifying the Playback Time of the Performance Data
(Time Compression/ Expansion) ..... 96
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive ............................................ 99
Before You Use a Zip Drive ........................................................................................ 99
Handling the Zip Drive .................................................................................................... 99
Handling Zip Disks ........................................................................................................... 99
Connecting the Zip Drive ............................................................................................. 99
Initializing the Disk (Drive Initialize) ........................................................................... 100
Checking Disk Reliability ............................................................................................... 101
Saving Performance Data to a Zip Drive (Song Copy) ............................................. 102
Saving a Song to a Single Disk (Playable) ................................................................ 103
To Load Data from Disks (Drive Select) .................................................................... 104
When You Cannot Save a Song to a Single Disk (Archives) .................................... 105
Saving to Disks (Store) .................................................................................................... 105
Loading Data From Disks (Extract) .............................................................................. 106
About power-save mode ........................................................................................... 106
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive .................................... 107
Before You Use a CD-RW Drive ............................................................................... 107
Handling the CD-RW Drive ........................................................................................... 107
Handling CD-RW Discs .................................................................................................. 107
Connecting the CD-RW Drive ................................................................................... 107
Creating an Audio CD ............................................................................................... 108
Items Necessary for Creating an Audio CD ................................................................ 108
Creating a Master Data ................................................................................................... 108
Writing Songs to CD-R Discs ......................................................................................... 109
Auditioning (Test Listening) Songs Written to CDs (CD Player Function) ............ 110
Writing Additional Songs to the Disc ........................................................................... 111
Arranging and Writing Multiple Songs to Disc .......................................................... 111
Writing the Song Data (Finalize) ................................................................................... 112
Arranging and Writing Songs and Song Data ............................................................ 113
Saving Songs to CD-RW Discs (CD-R Backup) ....................................................... 113
Items Necessary for CD-R Backup ................................................................................ 114
Saving Songs to CD-RW Discs ....................................................................................... 114
Loading Songs From CD-RW Discs .............................................................................. 115
How to Erase the Data in the CD-RW Disc ................................................................. 115
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices ....................................... 116
Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers ....................................................................... 116
Items Necessary for Synchronization ........................................................................... 116
Master and Slave .............................................................................................................. 116
Using MTC ....................................................................................................................... 116
Synchronization with the VS-880EX as the Reference (Master) ............................... 117
Synchronization with the MIDI Sequencer as the Reference (Slave) ....................... 118
Synchronizing with an External MIDI Device ............................................................ 119
Using the Sync Track (Master) ....................................................................................... 119
Using the Tempo Map (Master) .................................................................................... 121
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
Various Operations Related to Synchronized Operation .......................................... 123
Use with a MIDI Controller ........................................................................................ 126
Switching Track Status ................................................................................................... 126
Switching Scenes .............................................................................................................. 127
Switching Effects .............................................................................................................. 127
Adjusting Effects .............................................................................................................. 127
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup) ........ 128
Before Backing Up with DAT ..................................................................................... 128
Items Necessary for DAT Backup ............................................................................. 128
About the Devices Used in DAT Backup ..................................................................... 128
Saving Song Data to a DAT Recorder (Backup) ....................................................... 129
Loading Performance Data from a DAT Recorder (Recover) ................................... 131
When Canceling the Recover Operation ...................................................................... 132
Checking Names of Saved Performance Data (Name) ............................................ 133
Checking the Recording Condition of Saved Performance Data (Verify) .................. 134
Chapter 11 Compatibility .................................................... 136
Disk Compatibility ...................................................................................................... 136
VS-880 → VS-880EX ........................................................................................................ 136
VS-880EX → VS-880 ........................................................................................................ 136
VS-1680 → VS-880EX ...................................................................................................... 136
VS-880EX → VS-1680 ...................................................................................................... 137
VS-840 ↔ VS-880EX ........................................................................................................ 137
Song Data Compatibility ............................................................................................ 137
Loading VS-880 Performance Data into the VS-880EX (Song Import) .................... 137
Converting VS-880EX Song Data for Use with the VS-880 (Song Export) .............. 138
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions .......................... 140
Previewing Techniques (Preview) ............................................................................. 140
Using [TO] [FROM] ......................................................................................................... 140
Using [SCRUB] ................................................................................................................. 141
Recalling a Specific Location (Jump) ........................................................................ 142
Recording Mixer Settings (Auto Mix) ......................................................................... 142
Preparations for Auto Mix ............................................................................................. 143
Recording the Mixer Settings, Method 1 (Snapshot) .................................................. 143
Recording the Mixer Settings, Method 2 (Gradation) ................................................ 144
Recording Fader Operations (Realtime) ....................................................................... 144
If You Don’t Want to Record Fader Settings (Mask Fader) ....................................... 145
Playing Back the Auto Mix ............................................................................................. 145
Disabling Auto Mix Only on Specified Channels ....................................................... 145
Disabling Auto Mix on All Channels ........................................................................... 146
Undoing Recordings and Edits (Undo) ...................................................................... 146
Recording and Editing Operations Which Can Be Undone (Undo)......................... 147
Canceling the Last-Performed Undo (Redo) ............................................................... 147
Canceling Only the Very Last-Performed Operation ................................................. 147
Listening Only to a Specific Channel (Solo/Mute) ..................................................... 148
Listening Only to a Specific Channel ............................................................................ 148
Muting Only to a Specific Channel ............................................................................... 148
Simultaneously Adjusting a Stereo Source (Channel Link) ....................................... 149
Adjusting the Faders ....................................................................................................... 149
Adjusting the Pan ............................................................................................................ 150
Linking Only the Faders (Fader Link) .......................................................................... 151
Mixing In a Stereo Source (Stereo In) ....................................................................... 152
Changing the Pitch During Playback (Vari-Pitch) ...................................................... 152
Record/ Playback Tracks When Using Vari-Pitch ...................................................... 153
Directly Inputting Numeric Characters ...................................................................... 153
Selecting the Method for Numeric Input ..................................................................... 153
1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
Sounding the Metronome .......................................................................................... 154
Using an External MIDI Sound Source to Play the Metronome ............................... 155
When the Disk Has Little Remaining Space ............................................................. 156
Deleting Only Unneeded Performance Data (Song Optimize) ................................. 156
Deleting One Song of Performance Data (Song Erase) .............................................. 157
Changing the Name of Performance Data (Song Name) .......................................... 157
Adjusting the Levels for Each Track .......................................................................... 157
When Using Balanced Inputs .................................................................................... 158
Determining Output ................................................................................................... 158
MASTER Jacks ................................................................................................................. 158
AUX Jacks ......................................................................................................................... 159
DIGITAL OUT Connectors ............................................................................................ 159
DIRECT OUT ................................................................................................................... 160
Confirming That a Drive is Not Damaged (Drive Check) .......................................... 160
Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions .. 163
Switching the Display Content .................................................................................. 163
Pre Level ........................................................................................................................... 163
Post Level .......................................................................................................................... 163
Play List ............................................................................................................................. 163
Feder/ Pan ......................................................................................................................... 163
Checking the Size of a Recorded Performance ........................................................ 164
System Settings for Each Song ................................................................................ 164
Having the Volume Change as Soon as the Faders are Moved ................................ 164
Holding Level Meter Peaks ............................................................................................ 164
Checking the Remaining Disk Space ............................................................................ 165
When Using the Foot Switch .......................................................................................... 165
Overall Settings for the VS-880EX ............................................................................ 166
Holding the function of [SHIFT] (Shift Lock) .............................................................. 166
Displaying Measures and Beats .................................................................................... 166
Adjusting the Button Sensitivity ................................................................................... 167
Changing the VS-880EX’s SCSI ID Number ................................................................ 167
When There Is No Hard Disk Installed ........................................................................ 167
Changing at the Level at Which the Peak Indicator Lights ....................................... 168
Overall Settings for Playback and Recording ............................................................ 168
Constantly Monitoring the Input Source ..................................................................... 168
Stopping Automatically .................................................................................................. 168
If Noise Between Segments is Obtrusive ..................................................................... 169
Resetting Mixer and System Settings to Their Original State ................................... 169
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples) 170
Synchronizing the Operations of Two VS-880EX Units ............................................ 170
Settings for the Master VS-880EX .................................................................................. 170
Settings for the Slave VS-880EX .................................................................................... 172
Synchronizing with Cakewalk Pro Audio (MMC) ....................................................... 173
Settings for the VS-880EX ............................................................................................... 174
Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio .................................................................................. 175
Making Digital Connections with Cakewalk ............................................................... 177
Using an External MIDI Device to Adjust the Mixer (Compu Mix) ............................. 180
The Correspondence Between MIDI Channels and Controller Numbers .............. 181
Preparations for Compu Mix ......................................................................................... 182
Recording with Compu Mix .......................................................................................... 183
To Have the Fader Movements Ignored ...................................................................... 183
Synchronizing with Video Equipment ........................................................................ 184
Using External Effects Devices ................................................................................. 185
1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre p a ra tio n s
Dig ita l Mix e r Se ctio n
Ab o u t th e Pa ck a g e Co n te n ts
You can store all mixer settings, including fader levels,
pan, and effects. Stored settings can be recalled very
simply, making it convenient in adjusting balances
during mixdown and comparing mixes with effects.
The following items are included with the VS-880EX.
Please check to make sure you have all the items.
• VS-880EX
Changes in settings over time, such as fader levels and
pan, can also be stored (Auto Mix), so you can realize
easy fade-ins and fade-outs in your mixes.
• AC cord
• Quick Start
• Owner’s Manual (this manual)
• Appendices
You can easily make the most appropriate mixer con-
dition settings, including those for recording, track
bouncing, and mixdown (EZ Routing).
Ma in Fe a tu re s
Effe cts Se ctio n
A Effect is built in. This allows you to use up to two
stereo effects when the VS-880 EX is used by itself.
Th e La te st in Co m p a ct Ho m e Stu d io
En viro n m e n ts
The effect provid es not only basic effects such as
reverb and delay, but also effects ideal for vocals and
guitar (such as guitar amp simulator) and even special
effects such as RSS. The way in which each of these
effects are organized by the 34 “algorithms” so that
you can create new sounds easily.
The VS-880EX retains all of the features of Roland’s
VS-880 workstation; a revolution in the world of the
home studio, with the disk recorder, digital mixer, and
multi effects systematically and more organically inte-
grated. From when you start picking mics to when
you actually record to mixdown, adding effects, and
on to creating the master data for playing through a
PA or mastering on a CD, you can get a handle on
every aspect of the recording process with the VS-
880EX in your home studio.
The effect provides 210 read only effects setting (Preset
Patches) which designed for various uses. In addition,
the effect provides 100 read and write effects setting
(User Patches) for changing and saving that contents.
You can instantly switch between a variety of effects
simply by selecting a patch.
Disk Re co rd e r Se ctio n
The digital disk recorder section provides eight play-
back tracks, and allows eight tracks to be recorded
simultaneously. Each track has eight supplementary
tracks (V-tracks), and each song can have two sets of
these 64 tracks (8 tracks x 8 V-tracks). This means that
a song can have a total of 128 tracks (64 V-tracks x 2
banks), giving you flexibility when you need to record
multiple takes, or need a location for temporary stor-
age for editing.
Sim p le O p e ra tio n
The VS-880EX can be operated as easily as convention-
al multi-track recorders. You will be able to enjoy the
advantages of home studio from the day that you pur-
chase it.
The custom LCD screen provides visual confirmation
of many settings at once. In particular, the bar display
provides a graphical indication of the level meter, pan
and fader settings, and the track record status.
You can instantly find the location of sections in a
song you want to hear repeatedly or places that you
wish to record over (Locator) by placing marks at such
points (Marker). These Markers are recalled by simple
procedure, and you will never wait for any rewinding
or fast-forwarding time.
The LCD screen is backlit and inclined, so it is easy to
read when used on stage or wherever high visibility is
required.
The VS-880EX uses “non-destructive editing.” This
allows you to cancel and recover up to 999 previous
recording and editing operations (Undo/ Redo).
1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparations
Co n n e ctivity
Su b sta n tia l O p tio n s
There are six sets of balanced input jacks, handling a
wide input sensitivity range, from line level (+4 dBu)
to mic level (-50 dBu).
Internal Hard Disk (desinated by Roland):
An internal 2.5-inch IDE hard disk. Having this inter-
nal hard disk installed makes the VS-880EX system
compact and easy to transport. Furthermore, there is
no need to make complex settings and no problems
with faulty connections (unlike those which could
occur when an external disk is used). We recommend
that you install an internal hard disk when using the
VS-880EX.
Besides the RCA phono type (stereo) MASTER jacks,
the (mono) AUX A and AUX B jacks are provided.
The VS-880EX provides both coaxial and optical digi-
tal I/ O connectors. With these, you can make digital
connections with popular consumer electronic devices
such as CD players, DAT recorders, MD recorders,
and so on.
* For simultaneous recording or playback of a number of
tracks, for getting more out of the available hard disk
space, and in order to get the fullest performance in gener-
al from the VS-880EX, we recommend using the 2.1
GB or larger Hard Disk.
A SCSI connector (DB-25 type) is also provided, allow-
ing you to connect to external SCSI devices such as the
Zip drive and the CD-R drive.
MIDI IN and MIDI OUT/ THRU connectors are also
provided. You can synchronize the VS-880EX with an
external MIDI sequencer, use the MIDI sequencer to
control the VS-880EX’s mixer, sound an external MIDI
sound generator with the metronome, and more.
CD-R Drive (designated by Roland):
A CD-R drive connected with a SCSI connector. With
this drive, you can write songs created on the VS-
880EX as well as create your own original audio CDs.
Additionally, you can use it for backing up songs to
CD-R discs.
Besides tracks for recording audio signals, the VS-
880EX has sync track for storing MIDI clock message.
You can even synchronize MIDI sequencers that are
not compatible with MTC (MIDI Time Code) or MMC
(MIDI Machine Control).
SI-80S:
This is a video/ MIDI sync interface for connection to
the MIDI connector. VS-880EX operations such as
play/ stop/ forward can be synchronized from a video
device with a LANC connector.
1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fro n t a n d Re a r Pa n e ls
Mix e r Se ctio n
1
2
7
8
3
4
5
9
1 0
6
1 1
1 . PEAK In d ica to rs
4 . SELECT/ CH EDIT (Se le ct/ Ch a n n e l
Ed it) b u tto n s
These indicators allow you to confirm the sound level
input at the input jacks (1–6). They help you to deter-
m ine the correct inp u t level w hen ad ju sting the
INPUT knobs. You will need to specify the level at
which the indicators light beforehand (p. 61). The indi-
cators are set at the factory to -6 dB.
Use these buttons when you wish to make settings for
a mixer channel. The names of the parameter groups
that can be set for each channel are printed below CH
EDIT. To directly specify a particular group, you can
hold d ow n [SH IFT] and press the button for that
group name.
2 . IN PUT Kn o b s
When editing a song, use these buttons to select tracks
for editing.
These knobs adjust the sensitivity of the input jacks
(1–6). Turn a knob fully to the right for mic level (-50
dBu), and fully to the left for line level (+4 dBu).
3 . PAN Kn o b s
These knobs adjust the pan (location in the stereo out-
put) of each channel.
1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparations
5 . STATUS Bu tto n s
1 0 . FADER/ EDIT Bu tto n
These buttons switch the status of each track. The cur-
rent status is shown by the button indicator.
Pressing this button alternately assigns each channel’s
input mixer, track mixer and effect return mixer to the
fader for that channel. The button indicator shows the
current status.
SOURCE (orange):
The input source or track assigned to the channel is
being output.
INPUT (orange): Input Mixer
TRACK (green): Track Mixer
REC (blinking red):
RETURN (red):
Effect Return Mixer
Recording is selected for the track assigned to the
channel. During playback, the track data is normal-
ly output.
In conjunction with [SHIFT], this accesses the Master
Block setting page.
REC (blinking red and orange):
1 1 . Ma ste r Fa d e r
Use this fader to adjust the overall output level.
Recording is selected for the track assigned to the
channel. During playback, you will be able to listen
to the source.
PLAY (green):
The track assigned to the channel will playback.
OFF (off):
The channel is muted (silent).
When pressed in combination with the SELECT/ CH
EDIT button, this selects the source or track to be
assigned to a track for recording.
6 . Ch a n n e l Fa d e rs
Use these faders to adjust the volume level of each
channel or track.
7 . PHO N ES Kn o b
This knob adjusts the volume of the headphones.
8 . AUX SEN D k n o b
This knob adjusts the output level of the AUX SEND
jacks.
9 . EZ RO UTIN G/ SO LO Bu tto n
This button opens the EZ Routing screen.
In conjunction with [SHIFT], this switches the Solo
function on/ off.
1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparations
Re co rd e r Se ctio n
5
6
7
1
2
8
1 0
1 2
9
1 1
1 3
3
4
[LOOP]:
This button turns Loop Recording on
an d off. Pressed w ith th e
[LOC1/ 5]–[LOC4/ 8] buttons, it spec-
ifies the range to be recorded in Loop
Recording.
1 . EDIT CO N DITIO N Bu tto n s
The functions and parameters of the VS-880EX are
organized within these buttons. To use a desired oper-
ation, press the appropriate button.
[AUTO PUNCH]:
Th is bu tton tu rn s Au to
Punch-In Recording on and
off. Pressed w ith th e
[LOC1/ 5]–[LOC4/ 8] bu t-
tons, it specifies the range to
be recorded in Auto Punch-
In Recording.
2 . LO CATO R Bu tto n
Pressing this bu tton allow s you to store or recall
Locators and Markers or to store or recall Scenes (the
mixer settings).
[LOC1/5]–[LOC4/8]: This button selects Locators
and Scenes.
[CLEAR]:
[SCENE]:
Th is bu tton d eletes Locators,
Markers, and Scenes.
3 . N UMERICS Bu tto n
Press this when you want to use the LOCATOR button
for 10-key entry of Western numerals.
Th is is p ressed w h en storin g,
recalling, and deleting Scenes.
[PREVIOUS]: This bu tton recalls the previou s
Marker.
[NEXT]:
[TAP]:
This button recalls the next Marker.
Th is bu tton is p ressed to set
Markers.
1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparations
4 . Tra n sp o rt Co n tro l Bu tto n s
9 . CURSO R Bu tto n s
These buttons are used to operate the recorder.
Normally (i.e. in Play Condition), this dial is used to
move the current time. When making settings (i.e. in
Edit Condition), this dial is used to modify parameter
values.
[ZERO]:
[REW]:
Th is retu rn s th e cu rren t tim e to
“00h00m00s00” (zero return).
The current time is moved back only
while this button is held down. This
corresponds to the rewind button on a
tape recorder.
When a YES/ NO response is required during an oper-
ation, use these button to reply.
[NO (CANCEL)]: This is pressed to cancel the cur-
rent operation or exit the cur-
rent screen.
[FF]:
While the button is held d ow n, the
current time is moved forward. This
corresponds to the fast-forward button
on a tape recorder.
[YES (ENTER)]: This is pressed to execute the
current operation or select the
current screen.
[STOP]:
[PLAY]:
[REC]:
Stop s record ing or p layback of the
song.
1 0 . AUTO MIX (VARI PITCH) Bu tto n
This button switches the Auto Mix function on and off.
The button indicator lights when Auto Mix is on.
Starts recording or playback from the
current time.
Press this button to record a song.
In conjunction with [SHIFT], this switches the Vari-
pitch function on/ off.
5 . TIME/ VALUE Dia l
In normal (playback) status, this dial adjusts the time
of playback.
1 1 . MIDI/ DISK In d ica to r
This indicator lights green when MIDI messages are
being received, and red when data is being written or
read on the disk drive. If both of these are occurring,
the indicator lights orange.
This is used to change the settings values for each
parameter when settings are changed.
6 . PLAY (DISPLAY) Bu tto n
Press this button to return to the screen that appears
when the VS-880EX is turned on (normal playback sta-
tus).
1 2 . UN DO (REDO ) Bu tto n
Press this button to cancel a recording or editing step
that you have made (Undo function). Pressed with
[SHIFT], this button cancels the last performed Undo
function (Redo function).
In conjunction with [SHIFT], this switches the item
shown in the bar display.
7 . PARAMETER Bu tto n s
1 3 . PREVIEW Bu tto n
Use these buttons to switch the parameter display.
Press this button to use the Preview function that
plays back a specific length before and after the cur-
rent location.
8 . SHIFT Bu tto n
This button is pressed in conjunction with other but-
tons to access additional functions of those buttons.
1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparations
Disp la y se ctio n
1
4
6
8
2
5
7
3
9
1 . CO N DITIO N
4 . MEASURE
This indicates the current condition.
This shows the current measure of the song.
PLY: Normal status (Play condition).
5 . BEAT
INn: Change the input mixer settings
This shows the current beat of the song.
(n=1–8, a–d).
TRn: Change the track mixer settings
6 . SYN C MO DE
(n=1–8 to a–d).
This indicates the current sync mode (method of syn-
chronization).
RTN: Change the return mixer settings.
MST: Change the master block settings.
SNG: Song edit
7 . SCEN E
LOC: Locator edit
This shows the currently used scene number (mixer
setting). An asterisk “ ” shown at the beginning of the
scene number indicates that the current mixer settings
have been modified since the scene was recalled.
TRK: Track edit
FX: Effect edit
SYS: System edit
8 . REMAIN IN G TIME
This shows the remaining length of time available for
recording.
* If Song Protect (p.64) is turned on, the Play Condition
display will be “Ply.”
* The input/track mixer display will indicate 1–8 for chan-
nels whose Channel Link is OFF, and a–d for channels
which are turned ON.
9 . Ba r d isp la y
In normal condition, the item selected by [DISPLAY
(PLAY)] are shown graphically. While you are making
a setting, data for the setting being made is displayed
graphically.
2 . MARKER # (m a rk e r n u m b e r)
This shows the marker number for the current time. If
a mark point has not been assigned to the current
time, the closest marker number located before the
current time will be shown.
3 . TIME
The current time of the song is displayed as SMPTE
time code.
SMPTE Time Code (Appendices p. 124)
1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparations
Re a r Pa n e l
1
2
3
4
5
1 . PO W ER Sw itch
5 . DIGITAL Co n n e cto rs
This switch turns power of the VS-880EX on and off.
The VS-880EX features both coaxial and optical digital
I/ O connectors (conforming to S/ P DIF).
2 . AC IN (AC In le t)
Connect the included power cable here.
IN:
This inputs a d igital aud io signal
(stereo). You can select either the
coaxial input connection or the opti-
cal connection.
3 . SCSI Co n n e cto r
This is a DB-25 type SCSI connector for connecting
disk drives such as a Zip disk drive or a CD-R drive.
OUT:
This outputs a digital audio signal
(stereo). Here you can use both the
coaxial connector and the optical
connector simultaneously, and each
can carry a different signal.
4 . MIDI Co n n e cto rs (IN , O UT/ THRU)
Extern al MIDI d evices (MIDI con trollers, MIDI
sequencers, etc.) can be connected here.
S/P DIF (Appendices p. 124)
IN:
This connector receives MIDI mes-
sages. Connect it to the MIDI OUT
con n ector of th e extern al MIDI
device.
* To record a digital audio signal, it is not sufficient to sim-
ply connect a digital audio device to the DIGITAL IN
connector. When inputting a digital audio signal, refer to
“Recording Digital Signals” (p. 55).
OUT/THRU: This connector can be used either as
a MIDI OUT or as a MIDI TH RU
connector. With the factory settings,
it will function as a MIDI OUT con-
n ector, w h ich m ean s it is set to
transmit MIDI messages.
* It is not able to input or output analog audio signals.
1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparations
6 7 8
1 1
9 1 0
6 . FO O T SW ITCH Ja ck
An optional foot switch (such as the DP-2 or the BOSS
FS-5U) can be connected here when you want to con-
trol record er operations, mark point settings, and
punch in/ out operations, and so on with a foot switch.
With the factory settings, a foot switch is set to start
and stop the recorder.
7 . PHO N ES Ja ck
An optional set of headphones can be connected here.
The PH ON ES jack outputs the same sound as the
MONITOR jack.
8 . MASTER Ja ck s (L, R)
9 . AUX SEN D Ja ck A
1 0 . AUX SEN D Ja ck B
These are output jacks for analog audio signals (RCA
phono type).
With the factory settings, all signals are output from
the MASTER OUT jacks, and there is no output from
the AUX (A and B) SEND jacks. The output is deter-
mined by the block settings of the mixer’s master sec-
tion and the settings of each channel.
1 1 . IN PUT Ja ck s (1 –6 )
These are input jacks for analog audio signals. These
are balanced phone jacks, the input sensitivity of each
jack is adjusted by the INPUT knobs on the top panel.
2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Be fo re Yo u Sta rt (VS-8 8 0 EX Te rm in o lo g y )
This chapter explains basic concepts, internal struc-
ture, and basic operation that you will need to know in
order to operate the VS-880EX. Please read this chap-
ter thoroughly to gain a better understanding of the
VS-880EX.
Ex. 3: When the disk drive is 2.1 GB, and the parti-
tion size is 500 MB.
Disk Drive
(2.1GB)
Partition 0
(500MB)
Partition 1
(500MB)
Sa vin g a n d Ma n a g in g Da ta
Partition 2
(500MB)
Partition 3
(500MB)
Ma n a g in g Disk Co n te n ts (Pa rtitio n in g )
unusable
(100MB)
The VS-880EX saves all of the data such as — perfor-
mance data, mixing data, system data, etc. — on the
disk drive. Thus, it cannot operate without either hav-
ing an internal disk or being connected to a Zip drive
with a SCSI connector. Furthermore, the hard disk or
Zip drive used by the VS-880EX cannot be used by
another device.
Ex. 4: When the disk drive is 2.1 GB, and the parti-
tion size is 1000 MB.
Disk Drive
(2.1GB)
The VS-880EX is able to manage which 500 MB or 1000
MB of disk space at once. If you use a disk drive with a
capacity that is larger than this, you w ill need to
divide it into two or more.
Partition 0
(1000MB)
Partition 1
(1000MB)
Partition 2
(100MB)
Each of these area is refered as the “partition.” Up to 4
partitions can be created in one disk drive. For creat-
ing songs in a enough space, we recommend you to
set the partitions to 1000 MB.
Each partition on the VS-880EX’s disk drive is treated
as an independent drive, with each partition automati-
cally given a partition number (0–3). When a single
hard disk has multiple partitions, you can specify
which partition of which drive will be used. This disk
drive partition currently used is referred to as the cur-
rent drive.
Ex. 1: When the disk drive is 810 MB, and the parti-
tion size is 1000 MB.
Disk Drive
(810MB)
Partition
(810MB)
Ex. 2: When the disk drive is 1.4 GB, and the parti-
tion size is 1000 MB.
Disk Drive
(1.4GB)
Partition 0
(1000MB)
Partition 1
(400MB)
2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
Sp e cify th e Disk W h ich w ill b e Use d
fo r Re co rd in g / Pla y b a ck (Drive Se le ct)
Th e Lo ca tio n W h e re a Pe rfo rm a n ce is
Re co rd e d (So n g )
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Drive
The location where a performance data is recorded is
refered to as the song. For example on a cassette MTR,
this w ould correspond to cassette tape. Up to 200
songs can be created in each partition. Normally, you
should set the partition size at 1000 MB. When dealing
with large numbers of songs at the same time, setting
the partition size to 500 MB is recommended. The song
currently being recorded, played back, or edited is
referred to as the current song. Following data are
included in a song.
Select” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the desired
d isk d rive. The internal hard d isk is show n as
“IDE:*” and external d isk d rives are show n as
“SC0:*–SC7:*” (the number is the SCSI ID number).
The number following each disk drive name is the
partition number. For example if you wish to select
internal hard disk partition 1, you would select
“IDE:1.”
• All data recorded on V-tracks
• MIDI clocks of the sync track
4 . Press [YES].
A confirmation message appears on the screen.
• Points sp ecified w ithin songs (locator, m arker,
punch-in/ out points, loop-in/ out points) (p. 36)
5 . Press [YES].
• Scenes (mixer settings)
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
• Vari Pitch settings (p. 152)
• System settings (system, MIDI, disk, sync, Scene)
(p. 164)
6 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if
not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a demo
song, then press [NO].
• Effect settings
7 . After you have switched the current drive, return
• Auto Mix Data
to Play condition.
* If you wish to use hard disks or song data on both the VS-
880EX and the VS-880/840/1680, because of factors such
as differing partition sizes and numbers of tracks, there
will be limitations as to what you can do. For more
detailed information, please see “Compatibility” (p. 136).
So u rce s, Tra ck s, a n d Ch a n n e ls
On the VS-880EX, the recorder section and mixer sec-
tion use term sources, tracks, and channels. These
terms may appear similar to each other, and will be
confusing unless their differences are clarified.
* The VS-880EX accepts installation of Internal hard disks
(desinated by Roland). For simultaneous recording or
playback of a number of tracks, for getting more out of the
available hard disk space, and in order to get the fullest
performance in general from the VS-880EX, we recom-
mend using the 2.1 GB or larger Internal Hard
Disk.
Source:
Track:
A signal which is input to the mixer sec-
tion or recorded in the recorder section.
On the VS-880EX, this term refers in par-
ticular to the signals of the analog input
jacks (1–6) and the digital in connector.
A signal that is being input to or output
from the recorder section. It also refers to
th e location of a sign al th at is bein g
recorded onto or played back from the
hard disk.
Channel: A signal that is being input to or output
from the mixer section. This term refers in
particular to the faders and buttons of the
mixer section on the top panel.
2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
Ab o u t Eve n ts
The smallest unit of memory used by the VS-880EX to
store recorded results on disk is called an event. A
newly created song is provided approximately 12,800
events.
For each track, one recording pass uses two events.
Operations such as punch-in/ out or track copy also
use up events. The number of events that are used up
will fluctuate in a complex way. For example, auto
mix (p. 142) uses up 5 events for each Marker.
Even when your disk has ample free space, one song
can use up all the available events, in which case no
more data could be recorded to the song.
Remaining number of Events can be saved with the
following procedures. Please try the most appropriate
one with your situation.
Ex e cu te So n g Sto re (p . 3 2 )
Please Execu te Song Store if in UN DO cond ition
([UNDO] indicator is lit.). Events served for REDO
will be released. But please note that you cannot can-
cel (REDO) the last UNDO if you once execute STORE.
Ex e cu te So n g O p tim ize (p . 1 5 6 )
Please execute Song Optimize if you have done a lot of
Punch In recording. Events served for unnecessary
audio data will be released. But please note that you
can only do single level UNDO.
Era se Au to Mix d a ta (p . 1 4 6 )
If you have recorded AutoMix data, erase unnecessary
data. Events served for unnecessary AutoMix data will
be released.
2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
Mix e r Se ctio n
The digital mixer specifies input or output status of the recorder section. The VS-
880EX contains an Input Mixer located before the recorder section, a Track
Mixer located after the recorder section, an Effect Return Mixer which controls
the effect return and Stereo In (p. 152), and a Master Block which determines
the output jacks from which the signal of each mixer will be output.
* For more detailed information about the mixer section, please refer to the “Mixer
Section Block Diagram” (Appendices p. 120).
Sig n a l Flo w (Bu se s)
On the VS-880EX, signals flow through buses. buses are shared lines through
which multiple signals can be routed efficiently to multiple tracks or chan-
nels. It may be easier to understand this if we use the analogy of water pipes.
For example, the water that is supplied by the water company to your house is
branched to a variety of locations within the house (kitchen, bathroom, toilet,
etc.). The water that is used at each of these locations is then collected into the
sewer, and carried away.
Your House
Bathtub
Toilet
Kitchen Sink
INPUT
INPUTS
OUTPUT
INPUTS
OUTPUT
to street
INPUT to house
from water line
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUTS
Water Heater
Bath Sink
Cold Water (Bus)
Hot Water (Bus)
Drain (Bus)
If we think of the VS-880EX as the house, the water being supplied from the
water company corresponds to inputs such as mic or guitar. Some of these
inputs are sent to recording tracks and are recorded. Other portions are sent to
the effects, and reverb or chorus are applied before they are output.
The basic principle of the VS-880EX is that by specifying in this way from where
and to where the common lines run, you can determine which input signals will
be recorded on which track or sent to which effects, and where they will be out-
put.
2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
The VS-880EX has the following buses.
RECORDING Bus:
Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus are routed to the recorder section to be
recorded. There are eight channels which can be assigned to the output of the
input mixer, track mixer, and effects (Return). Signals assigned to the RECORD-
ING bus cannot be routed to the MIX bus.
MIX Bus:
Signals assigned to the MIX bus are sent to the MASTER jacks for monitoring. It
has two channels (L and R), and can take output signals from the input mixer,
track mixer, and effects (Return). Signals assigned to the MIX bus cannot be rout-
ed to the RECORDING bus.
EFFECT Bus:
Signals assigned to the EFFECT bus are sent to the effect to apply effects added
to them. It has two channels (FX1, FX2), and can process signals from the input
mixer and the track mixer. Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus as well as
the MIX bus can also be routed to the EFFECT bus.
AUX Bus:
Signals assigned to the AUX bus are routed to the AUX SEND jacks to allow
addition mixes for monitoring. This bus features two channels (AUX A, AUX B),
and can take signals from the input mixer and the track mixer. Signals assigned
to the RECORDING bus as well as the MIX bus can also be routed to the AUX
bus. This is convenient if, for example, you want to connect an external effects
device, or when you want an addition output separate from that of the MASTER
Out jacks (individual out).
2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
In p u t Mix e r
Input mixer is placed before the recorder section, and correspond to the external
input sources (INPUT 1–6, DIGITAL IN L/ R).
Input Mixer (Channel 1–6, DIGITAL L/R)
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
EQ1
EQ2
EQ3
EQ4
EQ5
EQ6
EQ7
EQ8
Fader1
Fader2
Fader3
Fader4
Fader5
Fader6
Fader7
Fader8
Pan1
Pan2
Pan3
Pan4
Pan5
Pan6
Pan7
Pan8
MIX L/R (MASTER)
INPUT 3
REC 1 (Recorder)
REC 2 (Recorder)
REC 3 (Recorder)
REC 4 (Recorder)
REC 5 (Recorder)
REC 6 (Recorder)
REC 7 (Recorder)
REC 8 (Recorder)
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
DIGITAL IN L (7)
DIGITAL IN R (8)
The output of each channel is assigned to tracks to be recorded. Channels not
assigned to tracks are output directly from the MASTER jacks. Additionally, the
status of tracks with signals assigned to them when not in record standby (STA-
TUS indicator blinking red), also are output from the MASTER jacks. At this
time, the following signals are assigned to the channel faders.
Channels 1–6: INPUT jacks 1–6
Channels 7–8: DIGITAL IN connector L/ R
2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
Tra ck Mix e r
Track mixer is placed after the recorder section, and correspond to the tracks
(1–8).
Recorder
Track Mixer (Track 1–8)
REC 1
REC 2
REC 3
REC 4
REC 5
REC 6
REC 7
REC 8
Track1
Track2
Track3
Track4
Track5
Track6
Track7
Track8
EQ1
EQ2
EQ3
EQ4
EQ5
EQ6
EQ7
EQ8
Fader1
Pan1
Pan2
Pan3
Pan4
Pan5
Pan6
Pan7
Pan8
MIX L/R (MASTER)
Fader2
Fader3
Fader4
Fader5
Fader6
Fader7
Fader8
REC 1 (Recorder)
REC 2 (Recorder)
REC 3 (Recorder)
REC 4 (Recorder)
REC 5 (Recorder)
REC 6 (Recorder)
REC 7 (Recorder)
REC 8 (Recorder)
All of the tracks are output from the MASTER jacks. Additionally, tracks can
also be routed back to the RECORDING bus for overdubbing, or re-rerecording.
In this status, the channel faders 1–8 correspond respectively to Tracks 1–8.
Effe ct Re tu rn Mix e r
Th is m ixer ad ju sts th e retu rn level/ balan ce from effects con n ected in
send/ return fashion, and the level/ balance of the stereo input.
FX Return Mixer (Channel 6–8)
Stereo In
Fader6
Fade7
Fader8
Balance6
Balance7
Balance8
MIX L/R (MASTER)
REC 1 (Recorder)
REC 2 (Recorder)
REC 3 (Recorder)
REC 4 (Recorder)
REC 5 (Recorder)
REC 6 (Recorder)
REC 7 (Recorder)
REC 8 (Recorder)
FX1 Return
FX2 Retuen
Each channel is output from the MASTER jacks. It is also possible to assign them
to the recording bus for recording. In this case, the channel faders correspond to
the following signals.
Channel 6:
Channel 7:
Channel 8:
The INPUT jack assigned to Stereo In
FX1 return
FX2 return
2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
Sw itch in g th e Fa d e r Fu n ctio n s
On the VS-880EX, it is able to adjust Input mixer or Track mixer by switching the
function of the channel faders on the top panel. Pressing [FADER] on the top
panel toggles between the input mixer and the track mixer. The FADER indica-
tor indicates which mixer is currently selected.
lighting orange: Input Mixer
lighting green: Track Mixer
lighting red: Effect Return Mixer
Ma ste r Blo ck
This selects the jacks or connectors connected to external equipment to which the
output of each mixer is sent.
Masterblock
MIX L/R
AUX A, B
FX1 L/R
MASTER L/R
PHONES L/R
AUX A, B
FX2 L/R
REC bus
DIGITAL OUT 1
DIGITAL OUT 2
Re co rd e r Se ctio n
Diffe re n ce s w ith a Ta p e -Ty p e MTR
Unlike DAT recorders, which use tape, digital disk recorders record perfor-
mances (sounds) on a disk, as do MD recorders. Music that is recorded on
disk can be recalled and played back immediately, no matter where it is located
on the disk. This is also obvious from the difference in speed at which you can
move to the beginning of a song on a DAT recorder and on an MD recorder.
The ability to freely move to data regardless of the time or sequence at which it
was recorded is known as random access. In contrast, having to move to data
in the order of the time or sequence at which it was recorded is known as
sequential access.
random access
sequential access
2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
Tra ck Min u te s a n d Re co rd in g Tim e
With cassette tape recorders, the amount of time you can record on a tape is pre-
determined by the length of that tape. Moreover, any unused portion of the tape
is wasted.
available recording time
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
00h00m00s00
00h30m00s00
Time
In Case of Tape Recording (using 30-minute tape)
In contrast, with disk recording, although available recording time is determined
by the amount of disk space, only the disk space used in recording is taken, and
beyond that, has no affect on the disk’s remaining free space. Thus, depending
on how you use tracks and phrases, the amount of available recording time will
vary. Thus, this calls for a standard unit corresponding to the time of one contin-
uous monaural signal recorded to one track. This unit is referred to as a track
minute.
available recording time
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
00h00m00s00
00h30m00s00 00h40m00s00
Time
In Case of Disk Recording
2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
For example, 10 track minutes be used for 10 minutes of monaural recording, 5
minutes of stereo recording, 2 minutes and 30 seconds of recording on four
tracks, and so on.
Track 1
00h00m00s00
00h10m00s00
Time
Track 1
Track 2
00h00m00s00
00h05m00s00
Time
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
00h00m00s00 00h02m30s00
Time
Au x ilia ry Tra ck s fo r Ea ch Tra ck
The VS-880EX provides 8 playback tracks, and allows 8 tracks to be recorded
simultaneously. Each track is composed from the features 8 supplementary
tracks, each on of which can be used for recording or playback. These auxiliary
tracks are called V-tracks.
One song can contain two sets (banks) of 64 V-tracks (these 8 tracks x 8 V-tracks).
In other words, a maximum of 8 tracks x 8 V-tracks x 2 banks = 128 performance
tracks can be recorded. For actual recording/ playback, you will specify the bank
that you wish to use, and then select one of the V-tracks.
Song
V-Track Bank A, B
V-Track1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
* This Owner’s Manual provides a blank virtual track sheet to help you keep track of
your virtual track recordings (p. 129). Feel free to copy the sheet to use when you
record.
3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-880EX Terminology)
Effe cts Se ctio n
Ab o u t th e Effe ct Ex p a n sio n Bo a rd
The VS-880EX contains effect. This allows you to use up to two stereo effects
(FX1 and FX2) simultaneously.
Co n n e ctin g Effe cts
On the VS-880EX, there are two ways to connect the effects devices. Please read
and understand these differences described below.
Insert:
The effect is directly added either between each channel’s equalizer and fader or
before the master fader. Connect the effect in this manner if you want to use
effects applied to change the output of the sound itself, such as when using dis-
tortion or overdrive effects.
When inserting an effect into one of the channels or into the Master Block, that
effect cannot be used in another channel. For example, you insert FX1 into
Channel 1, then no other channel can access FX1.
EQ
Fader
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
FX 1
Send/Return:
Besides the RECORDING bus and the MIX bus, the output of each channel can
also be sent to the EFFECT bus. Use this routing with effects such as reverb and
delay, when you want to mix the sound without effects and the sound after
effects have been applied.
EQ
Fader
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
FX bus
FX Pan
FX 1
3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Ba sic O p e ra tio n
This chapter explains the basic operation of the VS-
If Yo u Ha ve Tro u b le Un d e rsta n d in g
880EX. This covers all of the fundamental processes,
including recording and editing, so please read and
understand this chapter.
Disp la y s o r O p e ra tio n s
If you are unfamiliar w ith w hat is displayed on a
screen or find you are having difficulty understanding
a certain procedure, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. This
allows you to return immediately to the screen that
appears when the power is turned on. Try whatever
procedure you were working on from the beginning
once more.
Be fo re Yo u Be g in
Tu rn in g O n th e Po w e r
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or
other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off
the power on all devices before making any connections.
* Once the connections have been completed (Quick Start p.
3), turn on power to your various devices in the order
specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you
risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and
other devices.
• If an operation has been performed incorrectly or
cannot be executed correctly, an error message
appears in the display. When this occurs, please
refer to “Error Messages” (Appendices p. 9), and
perform the specified measure.
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down
before switching on power. Even with the volume all the
way down, you may still hear some sound when the power
is switched on, but this is normal, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
• If even after you perform an operation using the pre-
scribed procedure the result differs from that stated
in Quick Start or in the Owner’s Manual, please refer
to “Troubleshooting” (Appendices p. 6).
1 . Turn on the power with the POWER switch on
the rear panel of the VS-880EX.
When the VS-880EX starts up properly, the following
display will appear.
• If the above steps do not resolve your problem, con-
tact t a nearby Roland Service Center, or authorised
Roland distributor.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Be fo re Yo u Fin ish O p e ra tio n s
dB
0
4
Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce to Disk
(So n g Sto re )
12
24
48
Song data that you recorded or edited will be lost if
you simply turn the power off. Thus, you must exe-
cu te the Shu td ow n p roced u re before tu rning the
power off.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
* When you turn on the power of the VS-880EX, the disk
drive must be recognized and certain required data must
be loaded. Thus, it takes a short while for the unit to start
up.
When you switch songs or change disks, a message
will ask you to confirm whether the song should be
saved (STORE Current?) (p. 33).
Additionally, the contents of a recorded performance
can be lost because of unforeseen accidents, or even if
there is an accidental power failure or power outage.
Once lost, the contents of a recorded performance
cannot be restored to the previous conditions. To
avoid this from happening, use the following proce-
dure to save your songs to the disk drive.
2 . Turn on the power of connected audio equipment.
3 . Raise the volume of the audio devices to appro-
priate levels.
4 . If the d isplay screen is d ifficult to read , hold
d ow n [PLAY(DISPLAY)] an d rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial.
Current Song (Appendices p. 123)
* When handling important song data, or when using the
VS-880EX for extended periods, we strongly recommend-
ed you to execute the Song Store procedure frequently.
3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
If “ STO RE Cu rre n t? ” is Disp la y e d
When you begin to execute the various operations
such as shutdown, the message “STORE Current?”
(Save the current song?) is displayed. This message
asks you w hether you w ish to save the cu rrently
selected song to the disk drive. If you wish to save the
song before continuing w ith the shutd ow n, press
[YES]. If you w ant to proceed w ith the shutd ow n
without saving the song, press [NO].
2 . “STORE OK?” appears in the display. Press [YES].
If the song is saved properly, the initial display
reappears. If you wish to cancel the saving, press
[NO].
Tu rn in g O ff th e Po w e r
The contents of any recorded performance will be lost
if you simply turn the power off. This may also result
in damage to the hard disk. To safely turn off the
power and be sure that your recorded performances
are saved, always be sure to follow the shutdown pro-
cedure when you finish working with the VS-880EX.
If you p ress [YES] in resp on se to th e “STORE
Current?” message when Song Protect is on, or when
if you have selected a demo song, the message “Song
Protected” is displayed, and you will be unable to save
the song. Before editing a song, set Song Protect to
“Off” (p. 65). Otherwise, press [NO].
Shutdown (Appendices p. 124)
Re sta rtin g
1 . While hold ing d ow n [SH IFT], p ress [SH UT/
You can restart the VS-880EX without turning off the
rear panel POWER switch. This is convenient when
switching disks in drives (such as the Zip drive) con-
nected to the VS-880EX’s SCSI connector. Use the fol-
lowing procedure.
EJECT (STOP)].
2 . “SHUT/ EJECT?” appears in the display. Press
[YES].
3 . “STORE Current?” then appears in the display. If
you wish to save the current song, press [YES]. If
you do not wish to save it (if you want to undo
the contents of recording editing), press [NO]. If
you have selected a demo song, press [NO].
1 . Perform the shutdown procedure as described in
“Turning Off the Power” (p. 33).
2 . Confirm that “PowerOFF/ RESTART” appears in
4 . When shut down has been completed properly,
the display.
“PowerOFF/ RESTART” appears in the display.
3 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] an d p ress [RESTART
(PLAY)].
5 . Turn down the volume of your audio equipment.
6 . Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
This restarts the VS-880EX.
7 . Turn off the pow er of the VS-880EX w ith the
POWER switch on the rear panel.
* After the power is turned off, the momentum of the hard
disk causes it to continue spinning for a short while. Any
physical shock to the unit during this time may damage
the hard disk. Avoid moving the VS-880EX with a hard
disk installed for at least 30 seconds after turning off the
power.
3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Ba sic O p e ra tio n s o n th e VS-
8 8 0 EX
Disp la y Ea ch o f th e Co n d itio n Me n u s
To select the desired condition, press either the EDIT
CON DITION bu tton , CH EDIT bu tton , or
[SHIFT]+{[EDIT(FADER)].
The VS-880EX features a w id e variety of abilities
(functions) and settings (parameters). These are orga-
nized by type, function, operation, and so on. The
major organizational grouping w ithin the song is
referred to as a condition. A list of the different condi-
tions described below.
Edit Condition
Play Condition:
Here you can perform normal playback/ recording.
The VS-880EX is put in Play condition whenever the
power is turned on.
Channel Condition
Channel Condition:
This is the cond ition in w hich inp u t m ixer, track
mixer, or effect return mixer-related settings are made.
Master Block Condition:
Master Block Condition
This is where you make settings for the mixer’s Master
Block.
Song Condition:
Executes the operations related to each of the songs.
Se le ctin g Pa g e s Co n ta in e d in Fu n ctio n s
a n d Se ttin g s
Locator Condition:
This is where you make settings for the locator or
marker.
The menu for the corresponding page is displayed.
Use PARAMETER [
] [
] to select the desired
Track Condition:
page, and press [YES]. It is also possible to switch the
menu display by repeatedly pressing the EDIT CON-
DITION button.
Executes the operations related to each of the tracks.
Effect Condition:
In this status, you can make effects settings.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
System Condition:
dB
0
Here you can make settings that affect the entire envi-
ronment of the VS-880EX.
4
12
24
48
Here is the general process used when executing the
functions and changing the settings included in each
condition. Please take a look.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 . Display the menu for each condition.
W h e n Sy ste m Co n d itio n is Se le cte d
In some cases when System condition is selected,
the p aram eters them selves w ill be d isp layed
d irectly (rather than the System m enu ). This
allows you to immediately select the parameter
which was last modified. If you wish to view the
System menu, press [SYSTEM] once again.
2 . Select the page containing the desired function or
setting.
3 . Select the setting to be changed.
4 . Change the settings values.
5 . Execute the operation.
3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Sw itch in g Tra ck Co n d itio n s
Se le ct th e Se ttin g Yo u Wa n t to Ch a n g e
Use PARAMETER [
] [
] to access the setting
The condition for each track switches each time the
STATUS button is pressed. You can check the condi-
tion by looking at the button indicators.
(parameter) that you wish to modify. If two or more
settings are displayed simultaneously, use CURSOR
[
] [
] to move the cursor.
SOURCE (orange):
Cursor location (display blinking)
Allow s you to m onitor the inp u t sou rce or track
assigned to each channel.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
REC (blinking red):
0
4
Specifies what is recorded to each track. In playback,
tracks are monitored. You can directly specify what is
to be recorded by pressing the STATUS button while
holding down [REC].
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
REC (blinking red and orange):
Specifies what is recorded to each track. In playback,
sources are monitored. During playback, once again
press the STATUS button whose STATUS indicator is
blinking red.
Ch a n g e th e Se ttin g s Va lu e s
Use th e TIME/ VALUE d ial for th is op eration .
Rotating the dial counterclockwise decreases the val-
ues, rotating clockwise increases them. Although usu-
ally, increases and decreases in values are in single
unit steps, by holding down [SHIFT] while rotating
the TIME/ VALUE dial, depending on the parameter,
you can make values increase or decrease ten times (or
one tenth) the normal rate.
PLAY (green):
Plays back each track. You can directly specify what is
to be played back by pressing the STATUS button
while holding down [STOP].
OFF (darkness):
The track is muted (silent).
* The VS-880EX can record up to eight tracks simultane-
ously.
decrease
increase
Ex e cu te th e O p e ra tio n
After changing the value, to create the new song,
select the different song, or otherwise set or execute
the specified task or operation, press [YES]. A confir-
mation message will appear in the display. When the
message appears, press [YES]. If you want to cancel
the operation, then press [NO].
3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Ch a n g in g th e Cu rre n t Tim e
Mo vin g to th e Be g in n in g o r En d o f th e
Pe rfo rm a n ce
You can move directly from within any of the V-tracks
in the currently selected track to the first or last loca-
tion in the song that contains recorded sound. Use the
following procedure.
The current playback time in the display is shown in
SMPTE time code. The current measure, beat, and
Marker number are also displayed. Use the following
procedure to change the current playback time.
SMPTE Time Code (Appendices p. 124)
To go to the first location in the song containing
recorded sound:
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG TOP (REW)].
Mo vin g in Fra m e Un its
To go to the last location in the song containing
recorded sound:
• To m ove in on e-fram e u n its, rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial.
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG END (FF)].
• To move in ten-frame units, hold down [SHIFT] and
rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• To move in units of approximately 1/ 10 frame, first
press CURSOR [
] until “¨” appears. The frame
numerical display will switch to sub-frame units
(ap p roxim ately 1/ 100 fram e). Th en rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial. To return to the frame units,
press CURSOR [
].
• To move in units of approximately 1/ 100 frame,
hold down [SHIFT] and rotate the TIME/ VALUE
dial.
Song Top
Song End
Sto rin g a Tim e Lo ca tio n
Mo vin g in Me a su re / Be a t Un its
With the VS-880EX, there are two ways you can mark
and easily recall sections of a song that you want to
record over or listen to repeatedly. One is called the
Locator function, and the other one is referred to as
the Marker function. Use each method according to its
intended function.
The MEASURE field in the display will indicate the
measure number of the current location, and the BEAT
field will indicate the beat number of the current loca-
tion. For details on setting the measure and beat, and
how they correspond to the song, refer to “Sounding
the Metronome” (p. 154).
Locator:
•
To move in measure units, use CURSOR [
] [
]
Store “locator,” or time locations to the LOCATOR
([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) bu ttons on the top panel of the VS-
880EX. In conjunction with [SHIFT], you can register
up to eight time locations, and move immediately to a
registered location simply by pressing a button. There
are four banks for each button, providing you with up
to 32 (8 x 4) locators.
to move the cursor to the MEASURE field, and rotate
the TIME/ VALUE dial.
•
To move in beat units, use CURSOR [
] [
] to
move the cursor to the BEAT field, and rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
* A “+” shown following the beat display indicates that this
time location is not at the beginning of the measure/beat.
When the time location is at the beginning of the mea-
sure/beat, the “+” indication will disappear.
Marker:
Up to 1000 locate points (000–999) can be set in rapid
succession in each song. You can also store Auto Mix
data (p. 143), and there is a sync track provided as well
(p. 123).
3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2 . Continue hold ing [LOCATOR], and press the
LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) for the bank number
that you wish to change.
[LOCATOR] is used both to recall the Locator condi-
tion and to switch the Locator Bank. If you take your
finger off [LOCATOR] without changing the Locator
Bank, the display screen may change.
Usin g th e Lo ca to r
Tim e locations are stored w ith the LOC bu ttons
([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) on the top panel of the VS-880EX. In con-
junction with [SHIFT], you can register up to eight
time locations, and move immediately to a registered
location simply by pressing a button. There are four
banks for each button, providing you with up to 32 (8
x 4) locators. The locators are also a useful and conve-
nient way to define sections of a song to be repeated in
Loop Recording or for marking points in Punch-In
Recording.
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
Bank 4
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
3 . Release your finger from [LOCATOR].
4 . As described in the procedure for “Storing a Time
Location,” register the locator point.
00h00m00s00
Time
Ma k in g Fin e Ad ju s tm e n ts to Sto r e d
Lo ca to rs
Sto rin g Lo ca to rs
1 . Move to the locator w hose tim e you w ish to
1 . Move to the location in a song where you want to
change. Use the LOC buttons ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]).
set a locator.
2 . Press [LOCATOR] several times until “LOC Loc*”
(* is the locator number that you wish to change)
is displayed.
2 . Press a LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]). For example, if
you wish to set Locator 1, press [1/ 5]. If you wish
to store the location in Locator 5, hold d ow n
[SHIFT] and press [1/ 5].
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to input the desired
time.
These can be used in recording/ playback or while the
song is stopped. When a locate point is set, the corre-
sponding indicator lights.
4 . When you finish m aking ad ju stm ents, p ress
[PLAY(DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Mo vin g to a Sto re d Tim e Lo ca tio n
1 . Press the LOCATOR button for the locate point to
which you want to move. For example, if you
wish to move to the Locator 1, then press [1/ 5]. If
you wish to move to the location registered in
Locator 5, hold down [SHIFT] and press [1/ 5].
Ch a n g in g th e Lo ca to r Ba n k
1 . Press [LOCATOR].
The current locator bank number will be displayed as
“Locate Bank = 1” etc. Simultaneously, the LOC indi-
cator corresponding to the current bank number will
blink.
3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
De le tin g a Sto re d Tim e Lo ca tio n
Ab o u t Ma rk e r N u m b e rs
Each marker is assigned a number 000-999, in the
order of its time location. This means that if you
add a new marker at a location earlier than an
existing marker, the numbers of the subsequent
markers will be incremented.
1 . While holding down [CLEAR], press the LOC
button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) for locate point that you wish
to delete. For example, if you wish to delete the
LOCATOR 1’s located point, then press [CLEAR]
and [1/ 5] simultaneously. If you wish to delete
the time that was registered in Locator 5, hold
down [SHIFT] and press [CLEAR] and [1/ 5].
TAP
0
1
2
3
Time
Before setting a Marker
0
1
2
3
4
Time
After setting a Marker
Usin g Ma rk e rs
Along with the playback locate points, you can set up
to 1000 Markers in sequence. The Markers are also a
useful and convenient way to define sections of a song
to be repeated in Loop Record ing or for m arking
points in Punch-In Recording.
Mo vin g th e Lo ca tio n o f Ma rk e rs
To move to the Marker immediately preceding the
current playback time, press [PREVIOUS]. You move
ahead one m arker at a tim e in the ord er they are
placed each time the button is pressed. To move to the
Marker immediately following the current playback
time, press [NEXT].
* An interval of at least 0.1 seconds must left between
markers. It will not be possible to add a new markers if a
markers already exists at a location less than 0.1 seconds
away.
PREVIOUS
NEXT
Ma rk in g a Tim e Lo ca tio n
0
1
2
Press [TAP], and a marker will be added to the current
location. This can be done during recording or play-
back of the song as well as when the song is stopped.
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
Time
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disp la y in g Ma rk e rs
The Marker number at any playback location is
indicated in the display. If there is no Marker
number in the current location, then the closest
preceding Marker number is displayed. If there
are no markers in the song, “—” is indicated. If
“***” is shown in the display, it indicates that
although there are markers placed in the song, the
current location is before the first marker.
00h00m00s00
Time
3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
CLEAR
TAP
Mo vin g th e Lo ca tio n o f Ma rk e rs
+
2
1 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
0
1
3
4
2 . In the display, the “MARKER” field will indicate
the marker number of the current location. Use
CURSOR [
] [
] to move the cursor to the
MARKER field , and rotate the TIME/ VALUE
dial.
Time
Before deleting a Marker
0
1
2
3
Ma k in g Fin e Ad ju stm e n ts to Ma rk e d
Lo ca tio n s
1 . Move to the marker where you want to change.
Press [PREVIOUS] or [NEXT] to move the marker.
Time
2 . Press [LOCATOR] several times until “LOC ***”
appears in the display (*** is the marker number
that you wish to modify).
After deleting a Marker
3 . Set the marker where you wish to change. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial. The time of a marker can be
modified only within the range between the pre-
ceding and following markers.
To De le te All Ma rk e rs Sim u lta n e o u sly
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and [CLEAR] and [TAP] at
the same time.
2 . “Clear ALLMarker ?” appears in the display. If
you want to delete the markers, press [YES]. If
you want to cancel the procedure, the press [NO].
0
1
1
1
2
SHIFT
CLEAR
TAP
+
+
Time
0
1
2
3
4
Possible range of change
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Time
Before deleting a Marker
De le tin g a Ma rk e d Lo ca tio n
Setting markers makes it much easier to search for
places within a song, but having too many of them
actually cam make it more difficult to find the location
you’re looking for. It is a good idea to delete unneeded
markers whenever you can.
Time
After deleting a Marker
1 . Move to the marker you wish to delete. Press
[PREVIOUS] or [NEXT] to move the marker.
2 . While holding down [CLEAR], press [TAP].
Delete the marker. Marker numbers for any markers
after the deleted mark point shift one number ahead.
3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 Mu lti-Tra ck Re co rd in g
This chapter explains the operations necessary for
recording with the VS-880EX. Try out each operation
as you read these instructions.
MAS (Mastering):
With this setting, you can get the high-quality sounds
compatible to that’s quality of CD player or DAT
record er. H ow ever a song for w hich this mod e is
selected will function as a 6-track recorder (1–6). This
mode is appropriate when recording edited two-chan-
nel stereo songs.
Re co rd in g
Ite m s N e ce ssa ry fo r Mu lti-Tra ck
Re co rd in g
MT1 (Multi-Track 1):
While maintaining high-quality sound, recording time
is approximately twice that available in “Mastering”
mode. This mode is good when doing a lot of track
bouncing.
• VS-880EX (1)
• Internal IDE hard disk
MT2 (Multi-Track 2):
• Au d io equ ip m ent for the Master Ou t signal, or
stereo headphones
While maintaining high-quality sound, recording time
is longer than that available in “Multi-Track 1” mode.
This mode is good for normal operations.
• Recording source (electric guitar, synthesizer, CD
player, etc.) or microphone
LIV (Live):
Recording time is longer than with “Multi-Track 2”
mode. This mode is appropriate when your hard disk
lacks much free space or when recording live perfor-
mances.
Cre a tin g a N e w So n g (So n g N e w )
Recording cannot take place while a demo song is
selected. This is because the contents of the demo
songs are protected from being changed or over-
written (p. 64). Use the following procedure to prepare
a new song. This process is analogous to exchanging
cassettes on a multi-track tape recorder.
6 . Press [YES].
“Create New - Sure?” appears in the display.
7 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” appears in the display.
1 . Press [SONG] several times until “SNG Song New
?” appears in the display.
8 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, press [NO]. If you have selected a demo
song, then press [NO].
2 . Press [YES].
3 . “SNG SampleRate=” appears in the display. Use
9 . When a new song has been created, you will return
to Play condition. The newly created song will be
selected as the song for recording/ playback.
the TIME/ VALUE dial to select a sample rate.
Sa m p le Ra te
Select a sample rate (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48.0 kHz).
When you want to use a digital connection to a digital
audio device, much the sample rate to that of the con-
nected device. Furthermore, when making an origi-
nal audio CD, select 44.1 kHz. You cannot change
the sample rate after the song is recorded. In addition,
you cannot mix different sample rates in the same
song.
Ab o u t Re co rd in g Tim e
The recording time (track minutes) of both sam-
p ling rate and record ing m od e are as show n
below (for one track, with 2 GB free space).
Track Minutes (Appendices p. 125)
Recording
Sample Rate
44.1 kHz
4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
Mode
MAS
MT1
MT2
LIV
48.0 kHz
32.0 kHz
185+185 mins. 202+202 mins. 278+278 mins.
371+371 mins. 404+404 mins. 557+557 mins.
495+495 mins. 539+539 mins. 742+742 mins.
594+594 mins. 646+646 mins. 891+891 mins.
5 . “Record Mode=” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select a recording mode.
Re co rd Mo d e (Re co rd in g Mo d e )
Select the sou nd ’s qu ality and tim e based on the
recorded contents. Once a song is recorded, these set-
tings cannot be changed.
(All times approximate)
* The above chart is a general yardstick for estimating
recording times. Actual times may be somewhat
shorter depending on your hard disk’s specifications
or the number of songs created.
4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Ge n e ra l Co u rse o f th e
If “ Drive Bu sy !” is Disp la y e d
Re co rd in g Pro ce ss
If this message appears during recording or play-
back, it means that the disk drive cannot catch up
with the data read/ write speed. In such instances,
create a new song which lower the sample rate or
recording mode from their current settings, and
record over.
The procedure for recording with the VS-880EX is
roughly as same as record process by multi-track
recorders as mentioned before. This general process of
record ing a song is outlined below . Please take a
moment to read through the steps.
1 . Connect instruments and microphones to the VS-
880EX.
So n g N u m b e rs
On the VS-880EX, management of song data is
accom plished by assigning a song nu m ber to
every song that is saved. Newly created songs are
given the lowest currently available number. For
example, if all numbers up to song number 5 are
already assigned, then the number 6 is taken by
the new song. Furthermore, even if song numbers
up to 5 are occupied, if Song 3 is deleted, then the
new song is given that now lowest vacant num-
ber.
2 . Record the basic part of the song; drums and bass,
etc.
3 . Record other parts (electric guitars, synthesizers,
vocals, etc.) while playing back the basic part.
4 . If there are any m istakes d u ring the p rocess,
record over th e p laces w h ere th ey occu rred
(punch-in/ punch-out).
5 . Adjust the volume level, pan, equalization, and
other settings for each part.
If song numbers up to 5 are occupied
6 . If you run out of empty tracks, you can marge the
contents of two or more tracks onto a different
track (track bouncing).
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
InitSong 001
InitSong 001
7 . Mix down the tracks to your recorder and make a
master tape.
Well, it’s time to try multi-track recording. This will be
explained using concrete examples.
InitSong 002
InitSong 003
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
InitSong 002
InitSong 003
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
InitSong 006
Song New
If Song 3 is deleted
Song New
Co n n e ctin g In stru m e n ts
1 . Turn down the master fader as low as possible.
2 . Connect instru m ents and m icrophones to the
INPUT jacks.
* Howling could be produced depending on the location of
microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
InitSong 001
InitSong 001
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance
from speakers.
InitSong 002
InitSong 002
InitSong 003
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
3. Lowering volume levels.
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
6 . Press [REC].
The REC indicator blinks red.
Re co rd in g to th e Tra ck s
1 . Select a record ing track. While hold ing d ow n
[REC], press the STATUS button for the track to
which you want to record.
7 . Press [PLAY].
The PLAY indicator lights green, and recording starts.
Now begin playing.
The STATUS indicator blinks red.
8 . When the performance is finished, press [STOP].
The song then stops.
2 . Switch to the input mixer. Press [FADER (EDIT)]
several times to let the FADER indicator light
orange.
9 . Listen to the recorded performance. Press [ZERO]
to return to the beginning of the song.
3 . Select source to be recorded to the track. While
holding down the STATUS button for the track to
which you want to record, press the SELECT but-
ton for the input channel whose source you want
assigned to the track.
1 0 . Switch to the track mixer. Press [FADER] several
times to let the FADER indicator light green.
1 1 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
1 2 . Use the channel faders and the master fader to
The SELECT indicator blinks.
adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
1 3 . Does th e record in g sou n d as you th ou gh it
would? If you are satisfied with the results of
your recording, then save the song to the disk,
u sin g th e p roced u re d escribed in “Savin g a
Recorded Performance” (p. 43).
To ca n ce l tra ck a ssig n m e n ts
You can cancel all assignm ents (rou tings) of
sources or tracks to tracks (i.e., to a state where
nothing is connected).
So u rce s Assig n e d to Tra ck s
In a newly created song, sources are assigned to
tracks as shown below.
1 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2 . Hold down the STATUS button and press
[CLEAR].
Vie w in g th e Assig n scre e n
In Play Condition, hold down the STATUS button
to view the source/ track/ effect which is assigned
to that track.
Assigned source 1–8 (upper line)
Assigned track 1–8 (lower line)
4 . Determ ine the sou rce volu m e. Since w hat is
recorded is the sound after it passes through the
fader, the faders should normally be set to around
0 dB.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
5 . Adjust the input sensitivity, with the INPUT knob
of the channel input assigned as the source. Get a
strong input signal by having instrument volumes
as high as possible. At this time, raise the volume
level as much as possible without making the
PEAK indicator light up. Normally, this range is
adjusted that the level meter moves within -12
to 0 dB when the channel fader is set to 0 dB.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Recording Tracks (1–8)
Stereo In (first line)
Effect 1 (second line)
Effect 2 (third line)
4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Sa vin g a Re co rd e d
Pe rfo rm a n ce (So n g Sto re )
W h e n Yo u Are Re co rd in g in Ste re o
When recording in stereo, or when recording to
tracks with Channel Link (p. 149) on, you can set
the pan for each input channel. After Step 5, per-
form the procedure described below.
The contents of any recorded performance will be lost
if you simply turn the power off, or even if there is an
accidental power failure or power outage. Once lost,
the contents of a recorded performance cannot be
restored to the previous conditions. To avoid this
from happening, use the following procedure to save
your songs to the disk.
5 -1 . Press the SELECT button for the input chan-
nel you want assigned as the source.
The SELECT indicator lights.
5 -2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] several
* When handling important song data, or when using the
VS-880EX for extended periods, we recommended that
you to perform this procedure frequently.
times until “MIX Sw” appears in the dis-
play.
5 -3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
MIX Sw (Mix Sw itch )
This selects the bus to which the source or track
output will be assigned. For this example select
“On.”
2 . “STORE OK?” appears in the display. If you are
satisfied with the results of your recording, press
[YES]. If you wish to cancel the save, press [NO].
On: The source or track will be sent to the mix
bus. Set this to “On” when, for example,
you simply want to mix the inputs without
recording the source. However, the sources
that are assigned to the RECORDING bus
are disabled.
* The contents of the demo songs are protected from being
changed or overwritten (Song Protect (p. 64)). You can-
not save operation with the demo songs. This means if you
press [YES] at Step 2 when a demo song is selected, the
message “Song Protected” will appear, and the procedure
cannot be continued.
Off: The source or track will not be assigned to
the mix bus. If it is not assigned to a record-
ing bus either, then that source/ track will
not be output anywhere.
5 -4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
5 -5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIX Pa n
This adjusts the pan setting (L63–0–R63) of the
signal sent to the MIX bus and the RECORDING
bus.
5 -6 . Repeat Steps 5-1 through 5-3 for all input
channels to which you want to make pan
settings.
5 -7 . After making the pan setting, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
7 . Move to previous located point where you want
Re co rd in g O ve r a Po rtio n o f
a Pe rfo rm a n ce
(Pu n ch -In / Pu n ch -O u t)
to re-record.
8 . Press [PLAY] again to playback the song.
9 . When you reach the point in the performance you
want to re-record, press [REC].
The VS-880EX goes in to record mode; start rerecord-
ing the song or performance.
Sometimes, when listening to a recorded performance,
even if you don’t find it necessary to discard the entire
song, there may be sections containing mistakes or
lyrics that are hard to hear. In such instances, you will
find the following procedure convenient for rerecord-
ing only selected parts of a recording. The switching
from playback to recording status is called punch-in,
and the switch back from recording to playback is
referred to as punch-out.
1 0 . When you have finished recording, press [REC]
once more (or press [PLAY] to playback the song).
1 1 . Each time the [REC] button is pressed, the unit
alternately punches in and out. Repeat Steps 9
and 10 for any other tracks you wish to re-record.
1 2 . Press [STOP] to stop the song.
Usin g th e RECO RD Bu tto n
(Ma n u a l Pu n ch -In 1 )
1 3 . Listen to the results of the rerecording. Return to
the beginning of the song and press [PLAY].
Use Transport Control Buttons to punch in and out.
Usin g th e Fo o t sw itch
(Ma n u a l Pu n ch -In 2 )
Start
Punch-in
Playback
Punch-out
Playback
Stop
Recording
Use a foot switch to punch in and out. Using Punch-
In/ Punch-Out when both performing on an instru-
ment and recording at the same time is difficult. In
such instances, it is convenient to use a foot switch
(such as the DP-2 or the BOSS FS-5U) to d o your
switches.
Time
Start
Punch-in
Playback
Punch-out
Playback
Stop
Recording
1 . Hold down [REC] and press the STATUS button
which you wish to re-record.
2 . Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
Time
song.
3 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
At this point, the performance that has already been
recorded on the track or tracks that you want to re-
record is monitored.
4 . Press the STATUS buttons again.
The STATUS ind icator alternately blinks red and
orange. Now, confirm that you can hear source you
want recorded to the track coming from the moni-
tors.
5 . During playback of the song, each time the button
is pressed, the monitor switches between source
and track. Using the input sensitivity knob, adjust
the volume of the source so that it matches that of
the prerecorded performance.
6 . Once you have ad justed the input sensitivity,
press [STOP].
4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
1 . Connect an optional foot switch (such as the DP-2
or the BOSS FS-5U) to the VS-880EX’s FOOT
SWITCH jack.
4 . Select “Record” with the TIME/ VALUE dial.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Now, you can switch the setting of the FOOT SWITCH
jack between Punch-In and Punch-Out by the foot
switch. Carry out Manual Punch-In as described in
“Using the RECORD Button (Manual Punch-In 1” (p.
44). However, use the foot switch instead of the [REC]
button to perform the operation.
Sp e cify in g Be fo re h a n d th e Lo ca tio n
fo r Re re co rd in g (Au to Pu n ch -In )
You can automatically punch in and punch out at pre-
viously specified locations. This function is called
Auto Punch-In. This is convenient when you need to
punch in or out at a precise time. Before you begin
record ing, set the tim es for pu nch-in/ pu nch-ou t.
There are three ways to set these times as described
below. Use the method appropriate for your situation.
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM?” appears in the display.
Usin g Lo ca to rs
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS FootSw=” appears in the display.
1 . Preset locate points where you want to punch
in/ punch out.
Fo o tSw (Fo o t sw itch ico n )
2 . While holding down [AUTO PUNCH], press the
LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) specifying the locate
point for the time at which you want to punch in.
Set the function of the foot switch connected to the
FOOT SWITCH jack.
Play/Stop: Rep eats p layback and record ing each
3 . Then, without releasing [AUTO PUNCH], press
the LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) specifying the locate
point for the punch-out time.
time the foot switch is pressed.
Record:
Perform s the sam e fu nction as [REC].
Th is is u sed for sw itch in g betw een
recording and playback during manual
Punch-In Recording.
TapMarker: Perform s the sam e fu nction as [TAP].
Pressing the foot switch sets a Marker at
the mark point.
Next:
Performs the same function as [NEXT].
Moves to the beginning or end of the fol-
lowing phrase each time the foot switch is
pressed.
Previous: Performs the same function as [PREVI-
OUS]. Moves to the beginning or end of
the previous phrase each time the foot
switch is pressed.
GPI:
Controls playback and recording of the
song depending on the GPI trigger signal
received from the FOOT SWITCH jack.
GPI(Appendices p. 123)
4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Usin g Ma rk e rs
The space between two adjacent mark points can be
used to define the segment for Punch-In Recording.
M a k in g Fin e A d ju s t m e n t s t o t h e
Pu n ch -In Se g m e n t
1 . Press [LOCATOR] several tim es u ntil “LOC
APin” appears in the display.
1 . Preset Markers where you want to punch in and
then punch out.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
2 . Move to the mark point located at the desired
dB
0
punch-in time.
4
3 . While hold ing d ow n [AUTO PUN CH ], p ress
12
24
48
[NEXT].
4 . Without releasing [AUTO PUNCH], press [PRE-
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
VIOUS].
2 . The punch-in time will be displayed. (If no punch-
in time has been specified, the display will indi-
cate “–h–m–s–f–.”) Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to
adjust the time.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“LOC APOt” appears in the display.
4 . The p u nch-ou t tim e w ill be d isp layed . (If no
punch-out time has been specified, the display
w ill in d icate “–h –m –s–f–.”) Use th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the time.
Sp e cify in g th e Po in ts W h ile th e So n g
Pla y s Ba ck
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
2 . When you reach the desired punch-in location,
Re co rd in g Pro ce d u re :
hold down [AUTO PUNCH] and press [TAP].
1 . Hold down [REC] and press the STATUS button
3 . Continue holding down [AUTO PUNCH], wait
for the desired punch-out location, and then press
[TAP] once again.
for the track you wish to re-record.
2 . Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
song.
4 . Press [STOP].
3 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
At this point, the performance that has already been
recorded on the track or tracks that you want to re-
record is monitored.
4 . Press the STATUS buttons again.
The STATUS ind icator alternately blinks red and
orange. Now, confirm that you can hear source you
want recorded to the track coming from the moni-
tors.
5 . During playback of the song, each time the button
is pressed, the monitor switches between source
and track. Using the input sensitivity knob, adjust
the volume of the source so that it matches that of
the prerecorded performance.
6 . Once you have ad justed the input sensitivity,
press [STOP].
4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
7 . Press [AUTO PUNCH].
The AUTO PUNCH indicator lights, and Auto Punch-
In Recording is enabled.
Usin g Lo ca to rs
1 . First store locate points where you want to begin
and end the loop.
8 . Move to a previous locate point where you want
2 . While holding down [LOOP], press the LOCA-
TOR button for the locate point where you want
the loop to begin.
to re-record.
9 . Press [REC].
1 0 . Press [PLAY] again.
3 . Without releasing [LOOP], press the LOCATOR
Playback of the song begins.
button which specified the end of the loop.
1 1 . The VS-880EX autom atically goes into record
mode at the point where the punch-in is set. Start
the song or performance now.
1 2 . When you reach the point where the punch-out is
set, the VS-880EX automatically returns to play-
back mode. Press [STOP] to stop the song.
1 3 . Listen to the results of the rerecording. Return to
the beginning of the song and press [PLAY].
Re p e a te d ly Re co rd in g O ve r th e Sa m e
Are a (Lo o p Re co rd in g )
To Use Ma rk e rs
Adjacent mark points can be used to set the beginning
and end of the loop.
You can repeatedly play back a specified area (the
loop) and use Auto Punch-In Recording in that area.
This is called Loop Recording. This is convenient for
when you want to check the results immediately after
recording, or if you want to record a number of takes
of a guitar solo and compare the different takes.
1 . First, set mark points where you want to punch in
and punch out.
2 . Move to the mark point at the beginning of the
loop.
Loop start
Punch-in
Punch-out
Loop end
3 . While holding down [LOOP], press [NEXT].
Playback
Recording
Playback
4 . Without releasing [LOOP], press [PREVIOUS].
Time
Before you begin recording, specify the begin and end
times for the loop. There are three ways to specify the
loop times. Use the method appropriate for your situa-
tion.
* To specify the area re-recording (the punch-in point and
punch-out point), refer to the previous section “Auto
Punch-In.”
* Make settings so that the loop completely includes the
area to be rerecorded (i.e., from the punch-in point to the
punch-out point). If the area to be rerecorded is not com-
pletely within the loop, recording may not start at the
specified location, or may be interrupted in the middle of
the area for recording.
4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Sp e cify in g Th e Po in ts W h ile th e So n g
Pla y s Ba ck
Re co rd in g Pro ce d u re
1 . Hold down [REC] and press the STATUS button
for the track you wish to re-record.
1 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
2 . Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
2 . When you reach the d esired location for the
beginning of the loop, hold down [LOOP] and
press [TAP].
song.
3 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
At this point, the performance that has already been
recorded on the track or tracks that you want to re-
record is monitored.
3 . Continue holding down [LOOP], and when you
reach the desired location for the end of the loop,
press [TAP] once again.
4 . Press the STATUS buttons again.
The STATUS ind icator alternately blinks red and
orange. Now, confirm that you can hear source you
want recorded to the track coming from the moni-
tors.
4 . Press [STOP].
5 . During playback of the song, each time the button
is pressed, the monitor switches between source
and track. Using the input sensitivity knob, adjust
the volume of the source so that it matches that of
the prerecorded performance.
6 . Once you have ad justed the input sensitivity,
press [STOP].
7 . Press [LOOP].
Th e LOOP in d icator ligh ts, an d Au to Pu n ch -In
Recording is enabled.
Ma k in g Fin e Ad ju stm e n ts to th e Lo o p
8 . Press [AUTO PUNCH].
1 . Press [LOCATOR] several times until “LOC LpSt”
The AUTO PUNCH indicator lights. You are now set
to do Loop Recording.
appears in the display.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
9 . Press [PLAY].
Playback of the song begins. The song is played back
until the end of the loop is reached, playback will
return to the loop start point, and repeat.
dB
0
4
12
24
48
1 0 . Press [REC] where you want to re-record. The VS-
880EX w ill then au tom atically go into record
mode at the point where the punch-in is set. Start
the song or performance then.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
2 . The loop start time will be displayed. (If no loop
start time has been specified, the display will indi-
cate “–h–m–s–f–.”) Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to
adjust the time.
1 1 . When you reach the point where the punch-in is
set, the VS-880EX automatically returns to play-
back mode. Playback continues until the end of
the loop, and the loop repeats from the start point
once again.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
].
1 2 . With the next playback of the loop, listen to what
you recorded to check the result. If the recording
hasn’t turned out as you intended, repeat Steps 10
and 11.
“LOC LpEd” appears in the display.
4 . The loop end time will be displayed. (If no loop
end time has been specified, the display will indi-
cate “–h–m–s–f–.”) Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to
adjust the time.
1 3 . Press [STOP] to stop the song.
1 4 . Listen to the results of the recording once more.
Press [LOOP].
The LOOP indicator goes off.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 5 . Press [AUTO PUNCH].
The AUTO PUNCH indicator goes off.
1 6 . Return to the beginning of the song and press
[PLAY].
4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Sw itch in g V-Tra ck s
Re co r d in g to O th e r Tr a ck s
(O ve rd u b b in g )
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the track whose V-
track you wish to switch.
In multi-track record ing, the normal process is to
record new tracks while listening to the performance
on previously recorded tracks played back. This is
referred to as overdubbing.
2 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] and p ress the channel 2
[V.Track (CH EDIT)].
3 . “V.Track=” appears in the d isplay. Using the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the V-track.
1 . Select the tracks you want to play back. While
holding down [STOP], press the STATUS buttons
for the tracks you want to play back (i.e., that you
want to hear while overdubbing).
V-Track Bank
Tracks on which sound is recorded
V-Track
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
The STATUS indicators light green.
dB
0
2 . Select the tracks to which you want to record.
While holding down [REC], press the STATUS
bu ttons for the tracks to w hich you w ant to
record.
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
The STATUS indicators blink red.
3 . Select the sources to record to the tracks. While
holding down the STATUS buttons for the tracks
you want to record to, press the SELECT buttons
for the input channels whose sources you want
assigned to the tracks.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
5 . As described in “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 42),
record and check the contents.
The SELECT indicators blink.
Sw itch in g V-Tra ck Ba n k
4 . Now you are ready for overdubbing. Follow the
Steps of “Record ing to the Tracks” (p. 42), to
record and then check the content.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES] .
Re co rd in g o n V-Tra ck 2
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
The VS-880EX features 8 tracks, each of which contains
8 auxiliary tracks. These subsidiary tracks are referred
to as V-tracks.
“V-Track Bank =” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. Select “A” or “B.”
Each song can have two sets (A and B) of these 64 V-
tracks (8 tracks x 8 V-tracks), and each such set is
referred to as a V-track bank.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
6 . As described in “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 42),
By using all of these tracks to their full potential, you
can create recordings of up to 128 (64 (V-track) x 2 (V-
track bank)) tracks.
record and check the contents.
4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Usin g Effe cts
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Ap p ly in g Effe cts to th e Pla y b a ck
dB
0
4
When you playback a song, you will frequently want
to apply effects such as reverb or delay. Here we will
explain how to apply reverb as you playback previ-
ously recorded tracks.
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Se le ct a n Effe ct
EFFECT1 (Effe ct 1 Se n d Se le ct Sw itch )
1 . Press [EFFECT] several times until “EFFECT-1
This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 bus.
Here, select “PstFade” (post-fader) to apply reverb to
the sound after the output of the channel fader.
PRM?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
The number and name of the currently selected effect
w ill be d isplayed , and you can select the d esired
effect.
Off:
The signal is not sent.
PreFade: The signal before passing through the
channel fader is sent.
Effect Number
Effect Name
PstFade: The signal after p assing throu gh the
channel fader is sent.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
If the effect has been inserted into another channel, the
effect cannot be used. But, the signal from the channel
will be sent to EFFECT bus.
dB
0
4
12
24
48
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“EFFECT1 Send=” appears in the display.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect you
wish to use. Here, select “A00 RV:LargeHall.”
EFFECT1 Se n d (Effe ct 1 Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the level (0–127) of the signal sent to the
EFFECT 1 bus. Set the initial value to “100.”
4 . After selecting the effect, press [YES].
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
“EFFECT1 Pan=” appears in the display.
].
Sp e cify th e Tra ck s fo r Pla y b a ck
5 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
FADER indicator light green.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
6 . Hold down [STOP] and press the STATUS button
for the track you want played back.
The STATUS indicator lights green.
EFFECT1 Pa n (Effe ct 1 Se n d Pa n )
Th is ad ju sts th e stereo p lacem en t of th e sign al
(L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT 1 bus.
7 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the track to which
you want to apply reverb.
The CH EDIT indicator lights.
8 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] and p ress the channel 7
[EFFECT-1 (CH EDIT)].
“EFFECT1=” appears in the display.
5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
1 4 . Now reverb will be applied. The signal flow will be as follows.
MIX bus
+
+
EQ
Level
(Fader)
Pan
MASTER OUT (L, R)
(2band, 3band)
FX1 bus
FX1
Sw
Send
Level
Return
Sw
Level
(Fader)
Balance
Pan
FX1
Track
1 5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition. Playback the song and verify that the effect is being
applied.
Ap p ly in g Effe cts W h ile Re co rd in g (Se n d / Re tu rn )
Now we will see how to add affects to the source at the INPUT 1 jack, and then
record the direct sound and the sound with effects to Track 1. This is convenient
when you want to record vocals with reverb.
Se le ct a n Effe ct
1 . Press [EFFECT] several times until “EFFECT-1 PRM?” appears in the dis-
play.
2 . Press [YES].
The number and name of the currently selected effect will be displayed, and you
can select the desired effect.
Effect Number
Effect Name
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect you wish to use. Here, select
“A00 RV:LargeHall.”
4 . After selecting the effect, press [YES].
5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
1 5 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
Sp e cify th e In p u t to W h ich th e Effe ct is
to b e Ap p lie d
FADER indicator light red.
1 6 . While holding down the Track 1 STATUS button,
press the Channel 7 [SELECT (CH EDIT)] .
The SELECT indicator blinks.
5 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
FADER indicator light orange.
6 . Press the channel 1 [CH EDIT (SELECT)].
1 7 . At this point, the mixer is set up so that both the
direct sound and the sound with effects can be
recorded to Track 1. Record and check the content
as described in “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 42).
7 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] and p ress the channel 7
[EFFECT-1 (CH EDIT)].
“EFFECT1=” appears in the display.
8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ap p ly in g Effe cts W h ile Re co rd in g
(In se rt)
Many recordings of electric guitar, vocals, or the like
contain the insertion of effects such as “Guitar Multi”
and “Vocal Multi.”
EFFECT1 (Effe ct 1 Se n d Se le ct Sw itch )
This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 bus.
Here, select “PstFade” (post-fader) to apply reverb to
the sound after the output of the channel fader.
Off:
The signal is not sent.
Here we will explain how you can connect an electric
guitar to the INPUT 1 jack, add a stereo effect using
the Guitar Multi effect, and record it to Tracks 1and 2.
PreFade: The signal before passing through the
channel fader is sent.
PstFade: The signalafter passing through the chan-
nel fader is sent.
Se le ct a n Effe ct
If the effect has been inserted into another channel, the
effect cannot be used. But, the signal from the channel
will be sent to EFFECT bus.
1 . Connect your electric guitar to the INPUT 1 jack.
2 . Press [EFFECT] several times until “EFFECT-1
9 . Press PARAMETER [
].
PRM?” appears in the display.
“EFFECT1 Send=” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
The number and name of the currently selected effect
w ill be d isplayed , and you can select the d esired
effect.
1 0 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
EFFECT1 Se n d (Effe ct 1 Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the level (0–127) of the signal sent to the
EFFECT 1 bus. Set the initial value to “100.”
Effect Number
Effect Name
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
1 1 . Press PARAMETER [
].
dB
“EFFECT1 Pan=” appears in the display.
0
4
1 2 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
12
24
48
EFFECT1 Pa n (Effe ct 1 Se n d Pa n )
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Th is ad ju sts th e stereo p lacem en t of th e sign al
(L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT 1 bus.
4 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect you
1 3 . Hold down [REC] and press the Track 1 STATUS
button.
The STATUS indicator blinks red.
wish to use. Here, select “A41 GT:Rock Lead.”
5 . After selecting the effect, press [YES].
1 4 . While holding down the Track 1 STATUS button,
press the Input Channel 1 [SELECT (CH EDIT)] .
The SELECT indicator blinks.
5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Sp e cify th e In p u t Ch a n n e l to W h ich th e Effe ct is to b e Ap p lie d
6 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the FADER ind icator light
orange.
7 . Press the channel 1 [CH EDIT (SELECT)].
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] until “FX1 Ins =” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
FX1 In s (Effe ct 1 In se rt Sw itch )
This sets how the Insert functions. In this case, select “InsertL.”
Off:
There is no Insert.
Insert:
InsertL:
InsertR:
InsertS:
Inserts in both channels of the stereo effect.
Inserts in the left channel of the stereo effect.
Inserts in the right channel of the stereo effect.
Inserts in the left and right channels of the stereo effect in series.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“FX1 InsSend=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
FX1 In sSe n d (Effe ct 1 In se rt Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) sent to the Insert effect.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“FX1 InsRtn=” appears in the display.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
FX1 In sRtn (Effe ct 1 In se rt Re tu rn Le ve l)
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) returned from the Insert effect.
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until “MIX Pan” appears in the
display.
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIX Pa n
This adjusts the pan setting (L63–0–R63) of the signal sent to the MIX bus and
the RECORDING bus. For now select “L63.”
1 6 . Press the channel 2 [CH EDIT (SELECT)].
1 7 . Repeat the Steps 7–15 to make the settings for Channel 2 as same as those
for Channel 1. However, select “InsertR” and “R63” for Steps 9 and 15,
respectively.
5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
1 8 . Now the setup is completed. In this case, the signal flow will be as the fol-
lows.
Level
(Fader)
EQ
Snd
Level
Rtn
Level
Pan
(2band, 3band)
Channel 1
Channel 2
(InsL)
FX1
(InsR)
Snd
Level
EQ
Rtn
Level
Level
(Fader)
Pan
(2band, 3band)
REC bus
MIX bus
STATUS
EQ
(2band, 3band)
Level
(Fader)
Pan
MASTER (L, R)
TRACK
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
Track 1/2
1 9 . Hold down [REC] and press the Track 1 and 2 STATUS buttons.
The STATUS indicator blinks red.
2 0 . Hold down the Track 1 STATUS button and channel 1 SELECT buttons.
2 1 . Hold down the Track 2 STATUS button and channel 2 SELECT buttons.
2 2 . Record and check the content as described in “Recording to the Tracks” (p.
42).
5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
In O rd e r to Ma k e a Dig ita l Co n n e ctio n
w ith Yo u r CD Pla y e r
At the time of purchase, the VS-880EX is not able to
record the output of CD players via its DIGITAL IN
connectors. Perform the following procedure when
you wish to make a digital connection with your CD
player.
Re co rd in g Dig ita l Sig n a ls
With the VS-880EX, you can record the digital signals
ou tp u t by CD p layers, DAT an d MD record ers,
Roland VS-1680, and other digital audio devices as is.
* The VS-880EX’s digital interface conforms to S/P DIF.
When recording digital signals, be sure to digital audio
devices conforming to the same standards.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “System PRM
?” appears in the display.
S/P DIF (Appendices p. 124)
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Ite m s N e ce ssa ry fo r Dig ita l Re co rd in g
“CD DigiREC → On ?” appears in the display.
• VS-880EX (1)
4 . Press [YES].
“Obey Copyrights?” appears in the display.
• CD player, DAT and MD recorder, or other digital
audio device or devices
5 . Carefully read the conditions for permission that
are listed on the back cover of this manual, and if
you agree to the conditions, press [YES].
• Digital connector cable (coaxial or optical)
After the display indicates “— Complete —,” you will
return to Play condition. Now you will be able to
make digital connections with your CD player. If you
do not agree to the conditions, press [NO], and you
will immediately return to Play condition.
Ma k e th e Dig ita l Co n n e ctio n s
Connect the digital output connector of your audio
device with the VS-880EX’s DIGITAL IN connector.
DIGITAL IN1 is a coaxial connector, DIGITAL IN2 an
optical connector. Use the appropriate connector for
your audio device.
To Pre ve n t Dig ita l Co n n e ctio n s w ith CD
Pla y e rs
Use the following procedure when you want to pre-
vent digital connections with CD players.
DIGITAL IN1 (coaxial) and DIGITAL IN2 (optical)
cannot be used simultaneously. Select one of the con-
nectors for use.
Ma tch th e Sa m p le Ra te s
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “System PRM
It can record the digital signals when the sample rate
of the song is set to match the sample rate of the input
source.
?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
The song created when a disk drive is initialized will
have a sample rate of 44.1 kHz. If the sample rate of
the input source is other than 44.1 kHz, create a new
song with that sample rate (p. 40). Then, if you wish to
create original audio CDs, select that sample rate for
44.1 kHz (p. 40).
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“CD DigiREC → Off ?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
After the display indicates “— Complete —,” you will
retu rn to Play cond ition. Su bsequ ently it w ill no
longer be possible to make digital connections with
your CD player.
5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Se le ct th e Ma ste r Clo ck
Se le ct a n In p u t So u rce
Synchronize the VS-880EX’s reference clock (the mas-
ter clock) with the digital signal from the digital audio
device.
Here we will explain how to select an input source,
using the example of recording a digital signal on
tracks 1 and 2. Here we will explain how to select
input sources, using the example of recording a digital
signal (stereo) to tracks 1 and 2. The left channel will
be recorded on track 1, and the right channel on track
2.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “System PRM
?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MasterClk=” appears in the display.
Usin g [STATUS]
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
FADER indicator light orange. (Input Mixer)
Ma ste rClk (Ma ste r Clo ck )
This sets the VS-880EX’s reference clock. In this case,
select “DIGIN1” or “DIGIN2.”
2 . While pressing [REC], press the STATUS buttons
for Tracks 1 and 2.
The STATUS indicators light red.
DIGIN1:
Based on the digital signal received from
the DIGITAL IN connector (coaxial).
3 . While pressing the STATUS button for Track 1,
INT:
Based on the VS-880EX’s reference clock.
press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] on Channel 8.
DIGIN2:
Based on the digital signal received from
the DIGITAL IN connector (optical).
4 . While pressing the STATUS button for Track 2,
press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] on Channel 7.
* When you change the master clock value, clicking noise
may happen. Please turn down the master fader of the VS-
880EX, or the volume of the amplifier beforehand.
5 . As described in “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 42),
record and check the contents.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Usin g [YES]/ [N O ]
1 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
FADER indicator light green. (Track Mixer)
If “ Dig ita l In Lo ck ” is Disp la y e d
2 . Press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] on Channel 1.
This indicates that the reference clock for the sam-
ple rate is set by the digital signal from the DIGI-
TAL IN connector. You can record using the digi-
tal connection.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] to let “TR1
Assign” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to let “TR1 Assign
IN7” appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
If “ Dig ita l In Un lo ck ” is Disp la y e d
This ind icates that no d igital signal is being
received from th e DIGITAL IN con n ector.
Alternatively, it may indicate that the sample rate
selected for the song does not match the sample
rate of the digital device connected to the DIGI-
TAL IN connector. In this state, you cannot record
using the digital connection.
5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Assig n ***
Ad ju stin g th e To n e (Eq u a lize r)
Specify the source/ track/ effect return w hich w ill
assigned to each track for recording. If you press [YES]
the display will indicate “On,” showing that it has
been assigned for recording. If you press [NO], the
display will indicate “Off,” and the signal will not be
assigned (it will not be recorded).
A two-band (low, high) or three-band (low, mid, high)
parametric equalizer is provided for each channel.
First make equalizer adjustments separately for each
channel. If you have recorded any stereo pairs, be sure
that the same settings are made for both tracks. Then,
while paying attention to the overall balance, make
final adjustments for equalizer, pan, and volume level
for each channel.
The symbols displayed in “***” indicate the following
signals.
IN1–IN8:
INPUT Jack 1–INPUT Jack 8 (DIGITAL
IN)
* If you adjust the equalizer while listening to the sound,
you may notice a clicking noise. This is not a malfunction.
If the noise is objectionable, make adjustments while the
sound is not playing.
TR1–TR8: Track 1–Track 8 (Track Bouncing)
FX1:
FX2:
StIn:
Effect 1 Return
Effect 2 Return
Stereo In
Usin g th e 3 -Ba n d Eq u a lize r
For example, a display of “TR1 Assign IN7= On” indi-
cates that “the source from INPUT jack 7 has been
assigned to track 1 for recording.”
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)].
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] to let “EQ
Sel=” appears in the display.
6 . Press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] on Channel 2.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. Select “3BandEQ.”
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to let “TR2 Assign
EQ Se l (Eq u a lize r Se le ct)
IN8” appears in the display.
Select the type of equalizer that you wish to use.
8 . Press [YES].
2BandEQ: 2-band equalizer.
9 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
3BandEQ: 3-band equalizer.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 0 . As described in “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 42),
record and check the contents.
Ad ju stin g th e Eq u a lize r
1 . If you wish to adjust the equalizer for the input
source, press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to
make the FADER indicator light orange (Input
Mixer). If you wish to adjust the equalizer for an
already-recorded track, press [FADER (EDIT)]
several times to make the FADER indicator light
green (Track Mixer).
2 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channel or
track whose equalizer setting you wish to adjust.
The CH EDIT indicator lights.
3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press the channel 3 [EQ
Low (CH EDIT)].
5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] several times
If th e Disp la y In d ica te s “ N o t 3 b a n d EQ ”
If “Not 3band EQ” is displayed, the EQ Mode
(equalizer mode) is set to “2 band EQ.” In this
case, it will not be possible to adjust the mid-range
equalizer.
until “EQ Switch=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
EQ Sw itch (Eq u a lize r Sw itch )
If you wish to use the equalizer, set this “On.” If not,
set this “Off.” When equalizer settings are being made,
the equalization curve will be shown graphically in
the bar display. If this is “Off” the equalizer-related
parameters will not be available. For this example,
select “On” so that the equalizer will be applied.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
EQ M (Eq u a lize r Mid )
This adjusts the gain (-12–12 dB) of the mid-range
(peaking) equalizer.
6 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press the channel 3 [EQ
Gain
Low (CH EDIT)].
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
7 . Use CURSOR [
] [
] and the TIME/ VALUE
dial to make the setting.
dB
0
4
EQ L (Eq u a lize r Lo w )
12
24
48
This adjusts the gain (-12–12 dB) and the center fre-
quency (40 Hz–1.5 kHz) of the low-range (shelving)
equalizer.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Gain
Frequency
+
0
-
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
EQM gain (-12–12 dB)
dB
0
4
12
24
48
Gain
Frequency
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
+
EQL gain (-12–12 dB)
EQM frequency (200 Hz–8 kHz)
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
1 1 . Use CURSOR [ ] [
dial to make the setting.
].
Gain
] and the TIME/ VALUE
0
Frequency
-
EQL frequency (40 Hz–1.5 kHz)
8 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press the channel 4 [EQ
Mid (SELECT)].
5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
EQ M (Eq u a lize r Mid )
EQ H (Eq u a lize r Hig h )
This adjusts the center frequency (200 Hz–8 kHz) and
Q (d efinition: 0.5–16) of the m id -range (p eaking)
equalizer.
This adjusts the gain (-12–12 dB) and the center fre-
quency (500 Hz–18 kHz) of the high-range (shelving)
equalizer.
Gain
Frequency
Frequency
Q (definition)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
dB
0
4
0
4
12
24
48
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
EQH gain
(-12–12 dB)
+
+
EQM Q
(0.5–16)
Gain
0
Gain
0
Frequency
Frequency
-
-
EQH frequency (500 Hz–18 kHz)
1 2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press the channel 5 [EQ
1 4 . Repeat Steps 1–12 if you wish to make adjust-
Hi (SELECT)].
ments to other equalizers.
1 3 . Use CURSOR [
] [
] and the TIME/ VALUE
1 5 . When you are finished making the adjustments,
press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
dial to make the setting.
Return to Play condition. If necessary, save the song
(p. 43).
* The 3-band (low, mid, high) equalizer can be used on
channel faders in only one mixer mode — either the Track
mixer or Input mixer — at a time. You cannot use the
equalizer in both mixers simultaneously on the same
channel. For example, if you are using the 3-band equaliz-
er on Track 1, then you cannot use it on Input 1.
5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
9 . Usually, the source entering the INPUT 5–6 jacks
is also assigned for record ing on Tracks 5–6.
When you want to record only the material on
Tracks 1–4, use the following procedure.
Co m b in in g th e Co n te n ts o f
Tra ck s (Tra ck Bo u n cin g )
You can mix the performances recorded on two or
more tracks and rerecord them onto a different empty
track. This operation is known as track bouncing. It is
a convenient technique to use when you have run out
of free tracks.
1 0 . Press [FADER (EDIT)].
The FADER indicators light orange. (Input Mixer)
1 1 . While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 (or
6), press the SELECT buttons on Channels 5 and
6.
The SELECT ind icator w hich had been blinking
orange will go dark.
In this section, we will mix the performances recorded
on tracks 1–4, and rerecord the result in stereo on
tracks 5 and 6.
Track 1 Performance data 1
Track 2 Performance data 2
Track 3 Performance data 3
Track 4 Performance data 4
Track 5
Performance data 1
Performance data 2
Performance data 3
Performance data 4
Performance data 1+3
Performance data 2+4
1 2 . Now Tracks 1–4 can be monitored on Channels
5–6.
Ad ju st th e Pa n fo r Ea ch Tra ck
1 3 . Press the Channel 1 [CH EDIT (SELECT)].
The CH EDIT indicator lights.
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Track 6
“MIX Sw” appears in the display.
Before Track Bounceing
After Track Bounceing
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
* Volume, pan, equalizer, effects, and other settings cannot
be adjusted on tracks mixed with track bouncing. Do not
use track bouncing with tracks to which you want to
apply the equalizer and effects separately.
MIX Sw (Mix Sw itch )
This selects the bus to which the source or track out-
put will be assigned. For this example select “On.”
On: The source or track will be sent to the mix bus.
Set this to “On” when, for example, you simply
want to mix the inputs without recording the
source. However, the sources that are assigned
to the RECORDING bus are disabled.
Sp e cify th e Tra ck s fo r Pla y b a ck a n d
Re co rd in g
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for Track 5.
Off: The source or track will not be assigned to the
mix bus. If it is not assigned to a recording bus
either, then that source/ track will not be output
anywhere.
2 . Press PARAMETER
[
]
[
]
u n til
“Channel Link=” appears in the display.
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select “On.”
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
5 . While pressing [STOP], press the STATUS buttons
for Tracks 1–4.
1 7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIX Pa n
The STATUS indicators light green.
This adjusts the pan setting (L63–0–R63) of the signal
sent to the MIX bus and the RECORDING bus.
6 . Press the STATUS buttons for Track 5 (or 6) sever-
al times to let the STATUS indicators light orange.
1 8 . Repeat Steps 13–17 if you wish to make adjust-
7 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
ments to other pans.
FADER indicators light green. (Track Mixer)
1 9 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
8 . While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 (or
6), press the SELECT buttons on Channels 1–4.
The SELECT indicators blink green.
2 0 . Press [FADER (EDIT)].
The FADER indicators light green. (Track Mixer)
6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
2 1 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
Ap p ly in g Re ve rb W h ile Tra ck Bo u n cin g
2 2 . Adjust the volume balance with the faders for
Channels 1–4. The presently monitored sound
(volume levels, pan) will be recorded to Tracks 5
and 6 just as you hear it. You can raise the volume
as much as possible without causing distortion.
Sometimes you may want to record previously-record-
ed tracks to another track while apply the effects to
them. Here is how to add reverb to Tracks 1–4 while
bouncing these tracks to Tracks 5 and 6. This can be
convenient when you want to add spatial effects such
as reverb and delay to each track while mixing down.
2 3 . Press [STOP] to stop playback of the song.
Re co rd a n d Ch e ck th e Co n te n t
Se le ct a n Effe ct
2 4 . Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
1 . Press [EFFECT] several times until “EFFECT-1
song.
PRM?” appears in the display.
2 5 . While pressing [REC], press the STATUS button
for Track 5 (or 6).
The STATUS indicator blinks red.
2 . Press [YES].
The number and name of the currently selected effect
w ill be d isplayed , and you can select the d esired
effect.
2 6 . Press [REC].
Effect Number
Effect Name
The REC indicator blinks red.
CONDITION MARKER#
2 7 . Press [PLAY].
TIME
The PLAY indicator lights green, and starts recording.
dB
0
4
2 8 . When recording is finished, press [STOP].
This stops the song.
12
24
48
2 9 . Check the content of the recording. Press [ZERO]
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
to return to the beginning of the song.
3 0 . Mute (sound is prevented from playing) Tracks
1–4. Press the STATUS buttons for Tracks 1–4.
The STATUS indicators go off.
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect you
wish to use. Here, select “A00 RV:LargeHall.”
4 . After selecting the effect, press [YES].
3 1 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
Use the channel faders 5 and the master fader to adjust
the volume to a comfortable level.
Sp e cify th e Tra ck to W h ich th e Effe ct is
to b e Ap p lie d
5 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] to light the TR (Track) indi-
cator.
6 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] and p ress the channel 7
[EFFECT-1 (CH EDIT)].
“EFFECT1=” appears in the display.
7 . Press the channel 1 [CH EDIT (SELECT)].
8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
EFFECT1 (Effe ct 1 Se n d Se le ct Sw itch )
2 1 . While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 (or
6), press the SELECT buttons on Track Channels
1–4.
This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 bus.
Here, select “PstFade” (post-fader) to apply reverb to
the sound after the output of the channel fader.
The SELECT indicators blink.
Off:
The signal is not sent.
2 2 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to light red
PreFade: The signal before passing through the
the FADER indicator.
channel fader is sent.
2 3 . While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 (or
6), press the Channel 7 [FX RTN (SELECT)].
The SELECT indicators blink.
PstFade: The signalafter passing through the chan-
nel fader is sent.
* If the effect has been inserted into another channel, the
effect cannot be used. But, the signal from the channel
will be sent to EFFECT bus.
2 4 . Usually, the source entering the INPUT 5–6 jacks
is also assigned for recording on Tracks 5. When
you want to record only the material on Tracks
1–4, use the following procedure.
9 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“EFFECT1 Send=” appears in the display.
2 5 . Press [FADER (EDIT)].
The FADER indicators light orange. (Input Mixer)
1 0 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 6 . While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5,
press the SELECT buttons on Channels 5 and 6.
The SELECT ind icator w hich had been blinking
orange will go dark.
EFFECT1 Se n d (Effe ct 1 Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the level (0–127) of the signal sent to the
EFFECT 1 bus. Set the initial value to “100.”
1 1 . Press PARAMETER [
“EFFECT1 Pan=” appears in the display.
].
2 7 . Now you have set it up so that you can monitor
Tracks 1–4 and Effect 1 Return on Channels 5–6.
1 2 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Re co rd a n d Ch e ck th e Co n te n t
1 3 . In the same way as in steps 7–12, make settings so
that reverb is applied to tracks 2–4 as well.
2 8 . Carry out track bouncing by following the proce-
dure described in “Combining the Contents of
Tracks” (p. 60).
1 4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
EFFECT1 Pa n (Effe ct 1 Se n d Pa n )
Th is ad ju sts th e stereo p lacem en t of th e sign al
(L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT 1 bus.
Sp e cify th e Tra ck s fo r Pla y b a ck a n d
Re co rd in g
1 5 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for Track 5.
1 6 . Press PARAMETER
[
]
[
]
u n til
“Channel link =” appears in the display.
1 7 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select “On.”
1 8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
1 9 . While pressing [STOP], press the STATUS buttons
for Tracks 1–4.
The STATUS indicators light green.
2 0 . Press the STATUS buttons for Track 5 (or 6) to let
the STATUS indicators light orange.
6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Cre a tin g a Ma ste r Ta p e
Re co rd in g w ith DAT a n d MD Re co rd e rs
The VS-880EX features two types of digital out con-
nectors, coaxial and optical, either of which is ready to
use. At the factory settings, these connectors are set to
output the same sound as the MASTER jacks.
When you finish recording a song, adjust the balance
of each track (equalizer, pan, and volume level), and
u sing you r stereo record er, record a tw o-channel
stereo master mix to a stereo cassette, DAT, MD, or
other media. This process is called mixdown.
1 . Connect the digital input connector of your digital
recorder with the VS-880EX’s DIGITAL OUT con-
nector.
Pre p a re fo r Mix d o w n
2 . Set your digital recorder to enable it to record dig-
ital signals. Match the recorder’s sample rate to
that of song recorded on the VS-880EX (normally
at 44.1 kHz). Many digital recorders can deter-
mine the sample rate automatically. Match the
rates manually only when special settings are nec-
essary.
1 . Hold down [STOP] and press the STATUS but-
tons for all tracks you want to have mixed down.
The STATUS light green.
2 . Press [FADER] several times to light green the
FADER indicator.
3 . Use the channel faders and pan knobs on the top
panel to adjust the effect volume and pan of each
track. First determine the volume of the song’s
main tracks (usually the vocals or perhaps a gui-
tar melody). Then, set levels for the other tracks. It
is a good idea to create a balance in which the vol-
ume of the other tracks is lower than the main
tracks. Afterwards, make final adjustments to the
pan and equalizer settings for each track as you
listen to the overall mix.
* There are some DAT recorders that cannot record digital
signals at 44.1 kHz. If such instances, change to an ana-
log connection and set the recorder to enable it to record
analog signals.
3 . Press [ZERO] on the VS-880EX.
4 . Put the digital recorder in record mode.
5 . Press [PLAY] on the VS-880EX.
Playback of the song begins. If you want to fade in or
out, use the VS-880EX’s master fader for this.
6 . When you have finished recording, stop the cas-
To Re co rd to a Ca sse tte Ta p e
sette recorder.
1 . Connect the VS-880EX’s MASTER jacks to the
7 . Press [STOP] on the VS-880EX.
input jacks of your cassette recorder.
8 . Listen to the recorded result. Rewind the tape and
2 . Ad ju st th e record in g levels for th e cassette
recorder. Adjust the output volume with the VS-
880EX’s master fader, making it as high as possi-
ble without causing any input overload on the
recorder. Set the recording levels on the cassette
recorder as high as possible before causing distor-
tion, with the level meter moving a lot.
play back the recording.
To Pro h ib it Dig ita l Co p y in g
When mixing d ow n from the VS-880EX to a DAT
recorder or similar recorder via a digital connection,
you can prevent digital copying of the tape to which
the mixdown has been recorded.
3 . Press [ZERO] on the VS-880EX.
4 . Put the cassette recorder in record mode.
For example, you are allowed to make only one copy
of a regular audio CD onto a DAT tape. Once the digi-
tal copy has been made to the DAT tape, you cannot
make further copies onto other digital devices using
digital connections. This function makes DAT tapes
copied digitally from the VS-880EX behave as those
copied digitally from CDs.
5 . Press [PLAY] on the VS-880EX to begin playback
of the song.
If you want to fade in or out, use the VS-880EX’s mas-
ter fader for this.
6 . When you have finished recording, stop the cas-
sette recorder.
7 . Press [STOP] on the VS-880EX.
8 . Listen to the recorded result. Rewind the tape and
play back the recording.
6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
Protecting Songs (Song Protect)
PRM?” appears in the display.
The possibility that a performance saved to the disk
may still be mistakenly overwritten (recorded over), or
that the song itself may be accidentally deleted has
been considered. You can protect songs from being
rewritten in situations such as these. The function is
called Song Protect.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“D.CpyProtect” appears in the display.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Dig ita l Co p y Pro te ct (Dig ita l Co p y Pro te ct
Sw itch )
This setting determines whether or not the digitally
mixed down tape can be later copied digitally. If you
wish to prohibit digital copying, set this “On.”
Turning on Song Protect disables the following opera-
tions.
• Recording
Off: Digital copying is not prohibited.
• Undo (and Redo)
• Song Name, Song Optimize
• Track Edit
On: Digital copying is prohibited.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Returns to Play condition.
• Recording to Sync Tracks
• Creating Tempo Maps
• Song Store
With this procedure, you have made it so that your
digitally mixed master tapes cannot be later copied
digitally onto DAT tapes or similar digital media.
* Some DAT recorders do not conform to SCMS standards
or cannot be connected digitally to CD players. If you are
using such a DAT recorder, then if you set the Digital
Protect Switch to “On,” the digital output from the VS-
880EX cannot be copied to the DAT recorder. In such
instances, set the Digital Protect Switch to “Off.”
Ab o u t Effe ctive Use
Song Protect performs the same function as the
protect tab or switch on floppy disks and magnet-
optical disks. Thus, even if Song Protect is turned
on, you can still store locate points and mark
points, and carry out operations such as changing
Scenes. However, when you try to save the work
you have done, “Song Protected” appears in the
display, and you are prevented from continuing
any further with the save. However, when you
remove Song Protect, any settings made when
Song Protect was on are lost.
SCMS (Appendices p. 124)
After you have finished all work for the day, turn
on Song Protect immediately before shutting off
the power to the VS-880EX. Furthermore, right
after turning on the power to the VS-880EX at the
beginning the day’s operations, you should imme-
diately turn off Song Protect.
6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Selecting a Song (Song Select)
Pro te ctin g Pe rfo rm a n ce s
If the VS-1680 contains multiple songs, use the follow-
ing procedure to select a song.
1 . Make the current song the one to which you want
to apply Song Protect.
2 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G Song
Name/ Prtct?” appears in the display.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until "Song Select ?"
appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
Song name appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to appear the song
name that you wish to select. An asterisk "*" will
be displayed at the beginning of the current song.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
“SNG ChangePrtct → On?” appears in the display.
].
5 . Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel, press [NO].
Different types of songs (for the VS-880 and
VS-880EX) are distinguished.
6 . “STORE Current?” appears in the display. If you
wish to save the current song and then protect it,
press [YES]. If you wish to protect the state in
which Song Store was last executed without sav-
ing the current song, press [NO].
7 . The song will be protected.
“SNG Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
To Re m o ve So n g Pro te ct
1 . Select the song from which you currently want to
remove the protect function.
2 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G Song
Name/ Prtct?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
Song name appears in the display.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
“SNG ChangePrtct → Off?” appears in the display.
].
4 . Press [YES]. "Select Song, Sure?" (Are you sure
that you want to select this song?) will be dis-
played.
5 . Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel, press [NO].
5 . Press [YES] again.
6 . Song protect will be disabled.
“SNG Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
6 . "STORE Current?" (Store the current song?) will
be displayed. If you wish to save the current song,
press [YES]. If not, press [NO].
7 . The song will be selected, and you will return to
the Play Condition.
6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Usin g th e In te rn a l Effe cts
The VS-880EX contains effects, allowing up to two stereo effects to be applied
without using any equipment other than the VS-880EX itself.
This chapter explains how to use these internal effects.
Co m p o sitio n o f th e Effe cts
The VS-880EX has two effect units which allow two types of effect to be applied
simultaneously (FX1 and FX2). For each channel of the mixer you can specify the
effect which will be used.
EFFECTS
FX1
FX2
Co n n e ctin g th e Effe cts
Ch a n g in g th e So u rce So u n d Itse lf (In se rt)
The effect is directly added either between each channel’s equalizer and fader or
before the master fader. Connect the effect in this way if you want to use effects
applied to change the output of the sound itself, such as when using distortion
or overdrive effects.
When inserting an effect into one of the channels or into the Master Block, that
effect cannot be used in send/ return.
EQ
Level
(Fader)
Pan
Pan
Pan
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
(2band, 3band)
FX1
Sw
Send
Level
FX1
FX1
FX2
FX2
Sw
Send
Level
MIX bus or REC bus
AUX bus
AUX
Sw
Send
Level
* Depending on the effects used, when mixing with different effects inserted into each
channel, or mixing channels having effects inserted with other channels having no
effects, timing shifts may occur, or you may not be able to achieve the effect you desire.
6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects
* When Insert or Insert S is selected, that effect cannot be
used on any other channel. Furthermore, when Insert L or
Insert R is selected, that effect can be inserted on only one
other channel.
In se rtin g w ith In p u t a n d Tra ck Ch a n n e ls
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channel to
which you want to apply the effect.
The CH EDIT indicator lights.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“FX1 Ins Send=” appears in the display.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] until “FX1
Ins=” appears in the display.
Now you can make settings for effect 1.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
In s Se n d (In se rt Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) sent to the
Insert effect. Set the initial value to “100.”
3 . Select how the effect will be connected. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
6 . Press PARAMETER [
“FX1 Ins Rtn=” appears in the display.
].
dB
0
4
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
12
24
48
In s Rtn (In se rt Re tu rn Le ve l)
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) returned
from the Insert effect. Set the initial value to “100.”
FX1 In s (Effe ct 1 In se rt Sw itch )
This sets how the effects are connected.
8 . At this point, you are ready to insert FX1 into the
selected channel. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Insert: Inserts in the betw een the equ alizer and
fader.
9 . You can insert FX2 in the same way. In this case,
InsertL: Inserts in the left channel of the stereo effect.
perform step 2 so that “FX2 Ins=” is displayed.
InsertR: Inserts in the right channel of the stereo
* Steps 4–7 can be adjusted only when the effect is being
used as an insertion effect.
effect.
InsertS: Inserts in the combined left and right chan-
nels of the stereo effect in series.
In se rtin g a n Effe ct in to th e Ma ste r Blo ck
Insert
L
L
This inserts the effect into the MASTER Out. After the
mix for each channel is completed, the entire song is
put through the compressor, which is convenient at
such times as when you listen to the total volume
while mixing down.
EQ
FX
(2band, 3band)
R
R
Insert L
Insert R
Insert S
L
L
EQ
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)].
(2band, 3band)
FX
FX
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] until “MST
FX1 INS Sw=” appears in the display.
If FX1 has been inserted into another channel, the dis-
play will indicate “MST FX1 INS Sw=—” (the setting
cannot be made).
EQ
(2band, 3band)
R
R
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
L
L
EQ
(2band, 3band)
FX
R
R
6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects
MST FX1 IN S Sw (Ma ste r Effe ct 1 In se rt Sw itch )
This sets how the effects are connected.
Off: There is no Insert.
On: Inserts in both channels of the stereo effect.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“MST FX1 Ins Send=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MST FX1 In s Se n d (Ma ste r Effe ct 1 In se rt Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) sent to the Insert effect. Set the initial
value to “100.”
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“MST FX1 Ins Rtn=” appears in the display.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MST FX1 In s Rtn (Ma ste r Effe ct 1 In se rt Re tu rn Le ve l)
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) returned from the Insert effect. Set the
initial value to “100.”
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
9 . You can insert FX2 in the same way. In this case, perform step 1 so that
“MST FX2 INS Sw=” is displayed.
Ad d in g th e So u n d w ith th e Effe ct Ap p lie d to th e Dire ct So u n d (Se n d / Re tu rn )
When adding the sound with effect to the direct sound, such as is done with
reverb or delay, use the EFFECT bus.
With some effects, while you can have output of both the direct sound and effect
sound, it’s usually better to have the effect sound output separately. The direct
sound and effect sound are adjusted with each channel fader. The present signal
flow is shown below.
EQ
Level
(Fader)
Pan
Pan
Pan
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
MIX bus or REC bus
MIX bus or REC bus
AUX bus
(2band, 3band)
FX1
Sw
Send
Level
FX1
FX2
FX2
Sw
Send
Level
AUX
Sw
Send
Level
6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects
Se ttin g s fo r Ea ch Ch a n n e l
Ma ste r Blo ck Se ttin g s 1
(Se n d Le ve l Ad ju stm e n t)
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channel to
which you want to apply the effect.
The CH EDIT indicator lights.
You can adjust the balance of the total effect send level
for each effect with the effect send level and send pan
settings that are assigned to each individual channel
left as they are.
2 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] and p ress the channel 7
[EFFECT-1 (CH EDIT)].
The upper line of the display will indicate “EFFECT
1,” and you can make settings for effect 1.
* If FX1 has been inserted into another channel, or if it has
been inserted into the MASTER OUT jacks, these dis-
plays will not appear (settings cannot be made).
3 . Select how the effect will be connected. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)].
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] until “MST
FX1 SND Lev=” appears in the display.
dB
0
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
4
12
24
48
MST FX1 SN D Le v (Ma ste r Effe ct 1 Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the total volume level of the signal (0–127)
sent to the effect. Set the initial value to “100.”
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 . Press PARAMETER [
“MST FX1 SND Bal=” appears in the display.
].
EFFECT 1 (Effe ct 1 Se n d Se le ct Sw itch )
This selects the how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1
bus (send).
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Off:
The signal is not sent.
MST FX1 SN D Ba l
(Ma ste r Effe ct 1 Se n d Ba la n ce )
This adjusts the balance (L63–0–R63) of the total signal
sent to the effect. Set the initial value to “0” (center).
PreFade: The sound before passing through the
channel fader is sent.
PstFade: The sou nd after p assing throu gh the
channel fader is sent.
6 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
“EFFECT1 Send=” appears in the display.
].
7 . You can adjust the send level in the same way for
FX2 as well. In this case, access the “MST FX2
SND Lev=” display in step 2.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
EFFECT1 Se n d (Effe ct 1 Se n d Le ve l)
This adjusts the volume level of the signal (0–127) sent
to the EFFECT 1 bus. Set the initial value to “100.”
Ma ste r Blo ck Se ttin g s 2
(Re tu rn Le ve l Ad ju stm e n t)
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
Use the channel faders and pan knobs on the top panel
to adjust the effect on volume (return level).
“EFFECT1 Pan=” appears in the display.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times until the
FFFECT1 Pa n (Effe ct 1 Se n d Pa n )
FADER indicator lights red.
Th is ad ju sts th e stereo p lacem en t of th e sign al
(L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT 1 bus.
2 . Press the channel 7 [EFFECT-1 (CH EDIT)].
The CH EDIT indicator lights.
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
9 . You can use the same method to make settings for
each channel for FX2 as well. In this case, hold
down [SHIFT] and press channel 8 [EFFECT-2
(CH EDIT)] in step 2.
6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] until “RTN
Se le ctin g Effe cts (Pa tch )
FX1 RTNLev=” appears in the display.
An effect settings is referred to as a patch. The VS-
880EX provides 210 (A00–A99, B00–B99, C00–C09)
read-only effects (Preset Patches) and 100 (U00-U99)
read and write effects (User Patches). Please take a
moment to check these effects.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
RTN FX1 RTN Le v (Ma ste r Effe ct 1 Re tu rn Le ve l)
Adjust the return level (0–127) of the effect sound. Set
the initial value to “100.”
* If used in combination with the Vari Pitch function (p.
152), delay times may change somewhat, and for distor-
tion effects (distortion, overdrive, etc.), there may be some
change in the quality of the tone.
5 . Press PARAMETER [
“RTN FX1Bal=” appears in the display.
].
6 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
* With some of the effects, you may not want the direct
sound output, or other special setting may be required.
Please refer to “Algorithm List” (Appendices p. 26) when
making these settings.
RTN FX1 RTN Ba l
(Ma ste r Effe ct 1 Re tu rn Ba la n ce )
Adjust the left/ right balance (L63–0–R63) of the effect
sound. Set the initial value to “0” (center).
1 . Press [EFFECT] several times until “EFFECT-1
7 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
PRM?” appears in the display.
Return to Play condition.
2 . Press [YES].
The number and name of the currently selected effect
will be displayed, and you will be able to select the
effect.
8 . You can make master block settings in the same
way for FX2 as well. For step 2 in this case, press
channel 8 [CH EDIT (EFFECT-2)]. At this time, the
channel faders on the top panel will function as
follows.
Effect Number
Effect Name
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
ST IN
FX1
FX2
Balance Balance Balance
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect you
wish to use.
4 . After selecting the effect, press [YES].
5 . Check the effect to make sure that the sound is
actually being played. Repeat Steps 3–5 for any
other patches whose effects you want to confirm.
* Noise may occur with some types of effects when the effect
patches are selected.
If the audio device is at high volume levels, then protect
the speakers and other device from damage, turn off the
[EFFECTS ON/OFF] or lower the volume on the audio
device before selecting the effect patches.
ST IN
Level
FX1
Level
FX2
Level
6 . After you have checked the patches, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
7 . You can use the same procedure to hear the effect
of FX2 as well. For step 1 in this case, make the
display read “EFFECT-2 PRM?”
7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects
* Patches using the following algorithms can not be selected
for FX2. A horizontal line is drawn through the effect
name in such cases. Please select patches using these algo-
rithms for use with FX1.
An effect block which is currently ON is displayed as
“ ” and an effect block which is currently OFF is dis-
played as “
”
3 . Use CURSOR [
] [
] to move the cursor to
• Reverb
the effect block that you wish to turn on/ off.
• Gated Reverb
• Vocorder 2
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. If an effect block is
turned off, parameters related to that effect cannot
be set.
• Voice Transformer
5 . Use PARAMETER [
] [
] to access the
parameter that you wish to adjust.
Cre a tin g N e w Effe cts So u n d s
6 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. Check the effect.
When creating a new effect, first select the existing
patch whose sound is closest to the “image” of the
patch you wish to create, and then alter that patch set-
tings.
7 . Repeat the Steps 5–6 to create new effects sounds.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“FX1 Nam=” appears in the display.
Since changes to effects settings are temporary, they
are lost once you select another patch or recall a differ-
ent Scene. When saving changed effects settings, either
save them to the User Patches or store the mixer set-
tings as a Scene.
9 . Assign a patch name. Use CURSOR [
] [
]
so that the character you wish to change is blink-
ing. Use the TIME/ VALUE d ial to select the
desired character. A name of up to 12 characters
can be assigned.
1 0 . Save the effect. If you wish to keep the effect set-
tings that you have modified, you must save the
settings either as a User Patch or as mixer settings
in a Scene. If you wish to use the effect settings in
another song, save them as a User Patch. If you
wish to use the effect settings in the currently
selected song, save them as a Scene.
Ab o u t Alg o rith m s
An algorithm d eterm ines the com position or
structure of an effect. The VS-880EX features 34
different algorithms. The settings for the effects in
each patch use at least one of these algorithms.
Ch eck th e algorith m s u sed in each p atch in
“Preset Patch List” (Appendices p. 19). For details
on each algorithm , refer to “Algorithm List”
(Appendices p. 26).
Co n ve n ie n t O p e ra tio n s
• You can h old d ow n [SH IFT] an d p ress
[EFFECT] to alternate between the Effect Select
page, Effect N am e page, and Effect On/ Off
page.
1 . Using the p roced u re d escribed in “Selecting
Effects (Patch)” (p. 70), call up the patch contain-
ing the effect on which you will base your new
effect.
• In the Effect On/ Off page, you can move direct-
ly to the setting page for the effect that is blink-
ing by pressing PARAMETER [
].
2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
When you select a patch with an algorithm in which
the effect can be turned on and off, the follow ing
screen is displayed.
• In the Effect Setting page, you can display the
parameters of the next effect block by holding
d ow n [SH IFT] an d p ressin g PARAMETER
[
]. To display the parameters of the previ-
ous effect block, hold down [SHIFT] and press
PARAMETER [ ].
Block
(Off)
Block
(On)
Block
(On)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects
W h e n Sto rin g to a Sce n e
Ab o u t Effe ct Le ve ls
For m ore d etailed in form ation , p lease refer to
“Record in g th e Cu rren t Con d ition of th e Mixer
(Scene)” (p. 73).
Many algorithms include parameters for effect
level, which adjusts the output level of the effect
sound, and direct level, which adjusts the output
level of the direct sound. When these parameters
are preceded by a minus sign, the phase is invert-
ed.
1 . Press [SCENE].
The SCENE indicator lights.
The direct level of the Preset Patches, which were
created with careful consideration given to the
connection to the EFFECT bus, is set to “0.” When
inserting an effect into a channel, raise the direct
level. To determine the type for each Preset Patch,
please refer to “Preset Patch List” (Appendices p.
19).
2 . Press the LOC buttons ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) whose indi-
cators are not blinked. For example, if you want to
store the settings to Scene 1, then press [1/ 5]. If
you wish to store the settings in Scene 5, hold
down [SHIFT] and press [1/ 5].
3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
W h e n Sa vin g to Use r Pa tch e s
5 . Press [SCENE] once more.
The SCENE indicator will go dark. If you wish to halt
the registration procedure, press [SCENE] before step
2.
When you save effect settings to a User Patch, the User
Patch that had previously been in that location is lost.
At the time of purchase, the effects in the VS-880EX’s
User Patches are the same as those stored in the Preset
Patches.
6 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Save User Patch?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the desti-
nation patch number (U00–U99).
4 . Press [YES].
When the User Patch has been saved, the display will
indicate “Complete.”
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Sto rin g Mix e r Se ttin g s
With the VS-880EX, there are two functions to recall
mixer settings easily. One is refered to as the Scene,
and the other one is referred to as the EZ Routing.
According to the circumstances, please use each func-
tion.
4 . Press [SCENE] once more..
The SCENE indicator will go dark. If you wish to halt
the registration procedure, press [SCENE] before step
3.
Scene:
Re ca llin g a Sce n e
A Scene stores the current mixer settings, include that
setting values in a song. For example, during mix-
down, you can create a number of mixes with different
settings for volume, pan, equalizer, etc., and compare
those mixes, each one with all of its settings preserved.
This is a very convenient feature.
1 . Press [Stop].
* You cannot select a Scene during recording or playback.
2 . Press [SCENE].
The SCENE indicator lights.
EZ Routing:
3 . At this point, the LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) act to
store or recall scene. Indicators light for any LOC
buttons ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) storing scene.
The VS-880EX can store settings related to its mixer
connections. These includ e settings for routing of
inputs to tracks for recording, for determining where
signals are output, and for determining which output
is to be monitored. For example, these settings, which
stay the same, regardless of the song, include playback
and recording track settings during track bouncing,
and effects settings during mixdown. This makes EZ
Routing convenient in such situations.
4 . Press a LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) whose button
indicator lights. For example, if you want to recall
the Scene 1, then press [1/ 5]. If you wish to recall
Scene 5, hold down [SHIFT] and press [1/ 5].
5 . Press [SCENE] once more.
The SCENE indicator will go dark. If you wish to halt
the recall procedure, press [SCENE] before step 4.
Re co rd in g th e Cu rre n t Co n d itio n o f
th e Mix e r (Sce n e )
Re ca llin g a Sce n e W ith o u t Affe ctin g
th e Cu rre n t Fa d e r Va lu e s
When a Scene is recalled, the fader values will change
to the recalled settings. However, the positions of the
top panel’s faders themselves do not change. This
means that the locations of the faders will not match
their actual values.
Up to 8 sets of settings, values included, that define
the total condition of the mixer can be stored for each
song, and can be recalled instantly at the touch of a
bu tton. A stored set of m ixer settings is called a
Scene. A Scene includes not only the volume and pan
settings, but also connections (e.g., the track to which
the source from the INPUT 1 jack is recorded), V-track
settings (the track to which each is recorded), and
effects (su ch as th e selection of th e effect to be
applied). This feature is convenient when you want to
compare different balances of volume, pan, equalizer,
and other settings during mixdown.
If you want just the fader values to remain unchanged
when you recall a Scene, make the following settings.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Scene/ Auto Mix ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
“SYS Scene Mode=” appears in the display.
Sto rin g a Sce n e
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select “KeepF.”
1 . Press [SCENE].
The SCENE indicator lights.
2 . At this point, the LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) act to
store or recall scene.
Indicators light for any LOC buttons ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8])
storing scene.
3 . Press a LOC button ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) whose button
indicator does not light. For example, if you want
to record to Scene 1, then press [1/ 5]. If you wish
to store th e settin gs in Scen e 5, h old d ow n
[SHIFT] and press [1/ 5].
7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
SYS Sce n e Mo d e
This setting d etermines the fad er settings w hen a
Scene is recalled.
Ma k in g Mix e r Se ttin g s
Au to m a tica lly (EZ Ro u tin g )
All:
This changes the mixer settings to those of
the Scene being recalled. In this case, when a
Scene is recalled, the location of the faders on
the top panel may no longer match the actual
fader settings.
Settings related to mixer connections, including set-
tings for routing of inputs to tracks for recording, for
determining where signals are output, and for deter-
mining which output is to be monitored can be stored
and recalled easily with the VS-880EX. This is referred
to as EZ Routing.
KeepF: This changes the mixer settings to those of
the Scene being recalled, with the exception
of the fader settings. This means that even
when a Scene is recalled, fader settings will
still match the fader positions on the top
panel.
For example, when setting tracks to be played back or
recorded during track bouncing, or when dealing with
effects settings during mixdown there are settings
which remain the same, regardless of the song. In such
situations, by preparing stored mixer settings to be
recalled later, you can easily get the most effective and
appropriate mixer settings for each parameter.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
At the time of purchase, your VS-880EX came with
three read-only EZ Routing settings (Preset Routings)
already configured. In addition to these, the VS-880EX
offers 29 rew ritable EZ Rou tin g settin gs (User
Routings), allowing you to make changes to the set-
tin gs p rovid ed an d th en save th ese to th e User
Routings.
De le tin g a Sce n e
1 . Press [SCENE].
The SCENE indicator lights.
2 . The indicators for the LOC buttons ([1/ 5]–[4/ 8])
Easy Routing can be used in the following situations.
to which scene are stored then light.
Recording:
3 . Hold down [CLEAR], and press the LOC button
([1/ 5]–[4/ 8]) for the scene that you wish to clear.
For example if you wish to clear the mixer settings
that were stored in scene 1, hold down [CLEAR]
and press [1/ 5]. If you wish to clear the mixer set-
tings that were stored in scene 5, hold down both
[CLEAR] and [SHIFT], and press [1/ 5].
When you want to record the performance input via
the INPUT jacks.
Mixdown:
When you want adjust the balance of each track or to
record a MD player or similar input in two-channel
stereo.
4 . Press [SCENE] once more.
The SCENE indicator will go dark. If you wish to halt
the Clear procedure, press [SCENE] before step 3.
Bouncing:
When recording the performance data from multiple
tracks onto a number of other tracks.
Easy Routing can be set in the following two ways for
recording, mixdown, and track bouncing, respectively.
Template:
Recall a read-only setting (preset routing) or a previ-
ously stored setting (user routing) without change.
Step Edit:
Reply to questions in dialog format to make settings in
a logical sequence.
7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
Display (parameter name) Input
Track
Mixer
Re ca llin g Re co rd in g Se ttin g s
(Re co rd in g / Te m p la te )
Select this when you want to record the performance
input via the INPUT jacks. Recall a preset routing
(recording) which has been pre-registered when the
VS-880EX was shipped.
Mixer
Fader Link
Channel Link
EFFECT1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
EFFECT2
Off
Display (parameter name)
Master Sel
Master Block
1 . Press [EZ ROUTING] several times until “EZR
MIX
Recording ?” appears in the display.
EQ Mode
3band
2 . Press [YES].
“EZR Use Template” (do you wish to apply the tem-
plate?) appears in the display.
Direct Out
Off
Master FX1 Ins
Master FX2 Ins
-
-
3 . Press [YES].
4 . When the routing has been recalled, “Complete”
appears in the display, and return to Play condi-
tion. At this time, the mixer settings will be as fol-
lows.
Display (parameter name)
Effect
FX1 Sel
FX2 Sel
A96:DualComp/ Lim
A96:DualComp/ Lim
INPUT Jack
INPUT 1
Recording Track
Re ca llin g Tra ck Bo u n cin g Se ttin g s
(Bo u n cin g / Te m p la te )
Select this when recording the performance data from
multiple tracks onto a number of other tracks. Recall a
preset routing (bouncing) which has been pre-regis-
tered when the VS-880EX was shipped.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
1 . Press [EZ ROUTING] several times until “EZR
DIGITAL IN1 (7)
DIGITAL IN1 (8)
Bouncing ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
“EZR Use Template” (do you wish to apply the tem-
plate?) appears in the display.
Display (parameter name) Input
Mixer
Track
Mixer
ATT
current value current value
current value current value
3 . Press [YES].
Phase
4 . When the routing has been recalled, “Complete”
appears in the display, and return to Play condi-
tion. At this time, the mixer settings will be as fol-
lows.
MIX Sw
MIX Level
MIX Pan
V.Track
Off
100
On
100
0 (IN7=InsertL, IN8=InsertR) 0
-
currently
selected
V-track
Recording Track: TRACK 7–8
Input jack/ track/ effect assigned to the record ing
track: INPUT 1–6
EQ Switch
On
0 dB
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EQL (Gain)
EQL (Frequency)
EQM (Gain)
EQM (Q)
DIGITAL IN1 (7/ 8)
TRACK 1–6
FX1 Return
FX2 Return
300 Hz
0 dB
0.5
EQM (Frequency)
EQH (Gain)
EQH (Frequency)
FX1 Ins
1.4 kHz
0 dB
4 kHz
Off (IN3=InsertL, IN4=InsertR) Off
FX2 Ins
Off
Off
Off
Off
AUX Sw
7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
Display (parameter name) Input
Mixer
Track
Mixer
Display (parameter name)
Effect
FX1 Sel
FX2 Sel
A00:LargeHall
A22:Short Dly
ATT
current value current value
current value current value
Phase
MIX Sw
Off
100
0
O
Re ca llin g Mix d o w n Se ttin g s
(Mix d o w n / Te m p la te )
Select this when you want adjust the balance of each
track or to record a MD recorder or similar input in
two-channel stereo. Recall a preset routing (mixdown)
which has been pre-registered when the VS-880EX
was shipped.
(TRd=On)
MIX Level
(TRd Ofs Level=100)
MIX Pan
100
0
(TR7=L63,
TR8=R63,
TRd Ofs Bal=0)
V.Track
-
Currently
selected
V-track
1 . Press [EZ ROUTING] several times until “EZR
Mix Down ?” appears in the display.
EQ Switch
-
On
0 dB
300 Hz
0 dB
0.5
2 . Press [YES].
“EZR Use Template” (do you wish to apply the tem-
plate?) appears in the display.
EQL (Gain)
EQL (Frequency)
EQM (Gain)
EQM (Q)
-
-
-
3 . Press [YES].
-
4 . When the routing has been recalled, “Complete”
appears in the display, and return to Play condi-
tion. At this time, the mixer settings will be as fol-
lows.
EQM (Frequency)
EQH (Gain)
EQH (Frequency)
FX1 Ins
-
-
1.4 kHz
0 dB
4 kHz
Off
-
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
PstFade
Playback Track: TRACK 1–8
Input jack/ track/ effect assigned to the master out:
FX2 Ins
Off
AUX Sw
Off
INPUT 1–6
Fader Link
Channel Link
EFFECT1
Off
DIGITAL IN1 (7/ 8)
TRACK 1–8
FX1 Return
Off
PstFade
(TRd=Off)
FX2 Return
EFFECT1 Send
EFFECT1 Pan
EFFECT2
100
0
100
0
Display (parameter name) Input
Mixer
Track
Mixer
PstFade
PstFade
(TRd=Off)
ATT
current value current value
current value current value
EFFECT2 Send
EFFECT2 Pan
0
0
0
0
Phase
MIX Sw
MIX Level
MIX Pan
V.Track
On
On
100
0
100
Display (parameter name)
StereoIn
Return Mixer
0 (IN7=L63, IN8=R63)
-
Off
100
0
Currently
selected
V-track
FX1 RTN Lev
FX1 RTN Bal
FX2 RTN Lev
100
0
EQ Switch
On
0 dB
300 Hz
0 dB
4 kHz
Off
On
0 dB
300 Hz
0 dB
4 kHz
Off
FX2 RTN Bal
EQL (Gain)
EQL (Frequency)
EQH (Gain)
EQH (Frequency)
FX1 Ins
Display (parameter name)
Master Sel
Master Block
MIX
3band
Off
EQ Mode
Direct Out
FX2 Ins
Off
Off
Master FX1 Ins
Master FX2 Ins
Off
AUX Sw (AUX Switch)
Fader Link
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
Display (parameter name) Input
Mixer
Track
Mixer
Sto rin g Re co rd in g Se ttin g s
(Re co rd in g / Ste p Ed it)
Select this when you want to record the performance
input via the INPUT jacks.
Channel Link
EFFECT1
Off
PstFade
100
Off
PstFade
100
EFFECT1 Send
EFFECT1 Pan
EFFECT2
0
0
1 . Press [EZ ROUTING] several times until “EZR
PstFade
100
PstFade
100
Recording ?” appears in the display.
EFFECT2 Send
EFFECT2 Pan
2 . Press [YES].
“EZR Use Template” (do you wish to apply the tem-
plate?) appears in the display.
0
0
Display (parameter name)
StereoIn
Return Mixer
3 . Press [NO].
Off
100
0
FX1 RTN Lev
4 . “REC Track =” appears in the display. Specify the
track on which you will record. Press the STATUS
button of the track that you wish to record. The
STATUS indicator will blink red. Each time you
press the STATUS button, you will cycle between
recording and not recording. You can rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the V-track that you
wish to record.
FX1 RTN Bal
FX2 RTN Lev
100
0
FX2 RTN Bal
Display (parameter name)
Master Sel
Master Block
MIX
2band
Off
EQ Mode
Current track selected for setting
Display of tracks for recording
Direct Out
Master FX1 Ins
Master FX2 Ins
Off
Off
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
Display (parameter name)
Effect
4
FX1 Sel
FX2 Sel
A00:LargeHall
A22:Short Dly
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
5 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
].
6 . “TR* Link=” (“*” is the displayed track) appears
in the display. Specify the tracks for which you
will turn Channel Link ON. Press the STATUS
button of the tracks for which you wish to turn
Channel Link ON, and rotate the TIME/ VALUE
dial.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to
the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER
].
[
7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
8 . “IN* Link=” (“*” is the displayed input) appears
in the display. Specify the inputs for which you
will turn Channel Link ON. Press the SELECT
(CH EDIT) button of the inputs for which you
wish to turn Channel Link ON, and rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 2 . “IN* Pan =” appears in the display. Adjust the
pan of the source. Press the SELECT (CH EDIT)
bu tton for the inp u t w hose p an you w ish to
adjust, and use the TIME/ VALUE dial. You can
also use the pan knobs on the top panel to adjust
the pan.
* When Channel Link is on, adjust the Offset Balance of the
sources. (p. 151)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
12
24
48
dB
0
4
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
12
24
48
9 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 0 . “IN* to =” appears in the display. Specify which
source is to be recorded on each track. First press
the source input SELECT (CH EDIT) button, then
press the track STATUS button for the track to
which the source is to be recorded.
You can also use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the
recording destination track. If you select “---,” that
input will not be output anywhere (i.e., the sound will
not be heard). If you select “MIX,” the source will be
assigned to a mix bus (i.e., sound will be heard but
will not be recorded).
1 3 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
1 4 . “IN* Level =” appears in the display. Adjust the
level of the source. Press the SELECT (CH EDIT)
button for the input w hose level you w ish to
adjust, and use the TIME/ VALUE dial. You can
also use the channel faders on the top panel to
adjust the level.
* When Channel Link is on, adjust the Offset Level of the
sources. (p. 150)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
dB
0
4
12
24
48
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
* Sources that have Channel Link set to “On” cannot be
recorded to tracks on which Channel Link is set to “Off”
with the EZ Routing.
1 5 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
1 6 . “Use EFFECT1 ?” appears in the display. If you
wish to use effect 1, press [YES], and proceed to
step 17. If you do not wish to use effect 1, press
[NO] and proceed to step 31.
1 1 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
1 7 . Th e effect p atch w ill be d isp layed . Use th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect patch that
you wish to use.
1 8 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
1 9 . “IN* FX1 Ins=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 1,
select either “Ins,” “InsL,” “InsR,” or “InsS,” and
proceed to step 20. If you wish to use effect 1 in a
send/ return configuration, select “Off” and pro-
ceed to step 23.
2 7 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
].
2 8 . “IN* SndPan” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send pan.
2 9 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
3 0 . “REC FX1 =” appears in the display. If you wish
to record the effect w hich you are u sing in a
send / return configuration, press the STATUS
bu tton for th e record in g d estin ation track.
However if in step 19 you selected either “Ins,”
“InsL,” “InsR,” or “InsS,” this display will not
appear. (The sound with the inserted effect will be
recorded.)
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
2 0 . “IN* InsSnd =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the insert send level.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
2 1 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
dB
0
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4
12
24
48
2 2 . “IN* InsRtn =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE d ial to ad just the insert return
level.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
2 3 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
3 1 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 4 . “IN* FX1Snd=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to send the input
to the effect 1 bus, select either “Pre” or “Pst,” and
proceed to step 25. If you do not wish to send the
input to the effect 1 bus, select “Off,” and proceed
to step 31.
3 2 . “Use EFFECT2 ?” appears in the display. If you
wish to use effect 2 press [YES], and make settings
for effect 2 as described in steps 17–30. If you do
not wish to use effect 2, press [NO] and proceed
to step 33.
3 3 . “IN* AUX Snd” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to send the input
to the AUX bus, select either “Pre” or “Pst,” and
proceed to step 34. If you do not wish to send the
input to the AUX bus, select “Off,” and proceed to
step 31.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
2 5 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
4
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
12
24
48
2 6 . “IN* SndLev =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send level. If in
step 19 you selected either “Ins,” “InsL,” “InsR,”
or “InsS,” the sound already processed by the
effect will be sent to the effect bus. (It will not be
re-input to effect 1.)
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
3 4 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
3 5 . “IN* SndLev =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send level.
7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
4 5 . “FX1 MstIns=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 1
into the master out, select “On.” If not, select
“Off.” If effect 1 has been inserted in another
channel, the display will indicate “—” and this
item cannot be set.
3 6 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
].
3 7 . “IN* SndPan” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send pan.
3 8 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
3 9 . “Master Sel=” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the bus (MIX, AUX,
FX1, FX2, REC) that you wish to output from the
MASTER jacks.
dB
0
4
12
24
48
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
dB
0
4
4 6 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
12
24
48
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4 7 . “FX2 MstIns=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 2
into the master out, select “On.” If not, select
“Off.” If effect 2 has been inserted in another
channel, the display will indicate “—” and this
item cannot be set.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 0 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4 1 . “EQ Sel=” ap p ears in the d isp lay. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
4
dB
0
12
24
48
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 8 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4 2 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4 9 . “Change Routing ?” appears in the display. Press
[YES]. When the rou ting has been finalized ,
“Complete” appears in the display, and you will
return to Play condition. If you decide to discard
the routing that was set, press [NO].
4 3 . “Direct Out =” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you do not wish to use
Direct OUT, select “Off.” If you wish to output
tracks 1–4, select “1-4.” If you w ish to output
tracks 5–8, select “5-8.”
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 4 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
8 . “TR* to =” appears in the display. Specify which
track will be recorded to which track. First press
the SELECT (CHEDIT) button for the playback
track, and then press the STATUS button for the
track that you wish to record.
Sto rin g Tra ck Bo u n cin g Se ttin g s
(Bo u n cin g / Ste p Ed it)
Select this when recording the performance data from
multiple tracks onto a number of other tracks.
You can also use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the
recording destination track. If you select “---,” that
track will not be played back (it will not be heard). If
you select “MIX,” the playback track will be assigned
to the mix bus (it will be heard but not recorded).
1 . Press [EZ ROUTING] several times until “EZR
Bouncing ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
“EZR Use Template” (do you wish to apply the tem-
plate?) appears in the display.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
3 . Press [NO].
dB
0
4 . “REC Track =” appears in the display. Specify the
track on which you will record. Press the STATUS
button for the track that you wish to record. The
STATUS indicator will blink red. Each time you
p ress the STATUS bu tton, you w ill alternate
between recording and not recording. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the V-track on which
you will record.
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
* Playback tracks that have Channel Link set to “On” can-
not be recorded to tracks on which Channel Link is set to
“Off” with the EZ Routing.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
9 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
dB
0
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4
1 0 . “TR* Pan =” appears in the display. Adjust the
pan of the playback track. Press the SELECT (CH
EDIT) button for the playback track whose pan
you wish to adjust, and use the TIME/ VALUE
dial. You can also adjust the pan using the pan
knobs on the top panel.
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
5 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
* When Channel Link is on, adjust the Offset Balance of the
sources/tracks. (p. 151)
6 . “TR* Link=” (“*” is the displayed track) appears
in th e d isp lay. Sp ecify th e p layback
tracks/ recording tracks for which you will turn
Channel Link ON. Press the SELECT (CH EDIT)
button of the tracks for which you wish to turn
Channel Link ON, and rotate the TIME/ VALUE
dial.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
1 1 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
4
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
].
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
1 2 . “TR* Level =” appears in the display. Adjust the
level of the playback track. Press the SELECT (CH
EDIT) button for the playback track whose level
you wish to adjust, and use the TIME/ VALUE
dial. You can also adjust the level using the chan-
nel faders on the top panel.
2 1 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 2 . “TR* FX1 Snd=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to send the play-
back track to the effect 1 bus, select either “Pre” or
“Pst,” and proceed to step 23. If you do not wish
to send the playback track to the effect 1 bus,
select “Off,” and proceed to step 29.
* When Channel Link is on, adjust the Offset Level of the
tracks. (p. 150)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
dB
0
4
4
12
24
48
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 3 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
2 3 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
1 4 . “Use EFFECT1 ?” appears in the display. If you
wish to use effect 1, press [YES], and proceed to
step 15. If you do not wish to use effect 1, press
[NO] and proceed to step 29.
2 4 . “TR* SndLev =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send level. If in
step 17 you selected either “Ins,” “InsL,” “InsR,”
or “InsS,” the sound already processed by the
effect will be sent to the effect bus. (It will not be
re-input to effect 1.)
1 5 . Th e effect p atch w ill be d isp layed . Use th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect patch that
you wish to use.
2 5 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 6 . “TR* SndPan” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send pan.
1 7 . “TR* FX1 Ins=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 1,
select either “Ins,” “InsL,” “InsR,” or “InsS,” and
proceed to step 18. If you wish to use effect 1 in a
send/ return configuration, select “Off” and pro-
ceed to step 21.
2 7 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 8 . “REC FX1 =” appears in the display. If you wish
to record the effect w hich you are u sing in a
send / return configuration, press the STATUS
bu tton for th e record in g d estin ation track.
However if in step 17 you selected either “Ins,”
“InsL,” “InsR,” or “InsS,” this display will not
appear. (The sound with the inserted effect will be
recorded.)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
dB
0
4
1 8 . “TR* InsSnd =” appears in the display. Use the
12
24
48
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the insert send level.
1 9 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 0 . “TR* InsRtn =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE d ial to ad just the insert return
level.
8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
3 9 . “EQ Sel=” ap p ears in the d isp lay. Rotate the
2 9 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
TIME/ VALUE dial.
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
3 0 . “Use EFFECT2 ?” appears in the display. If you
wish to use effect 2 press [YES], and make settings
for effect 2 as described in steps 15–28. If you do
not wish to use effect 2, press [NO] and proceed
to step 31.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
3 1 . “TR* AUX Snd” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to send the play-
back track to the AUX bus, select either “Pre” or
“Pst,” and proceed to step 32. If you do not wish
to send the playback track to the AUX bus, select
“Off,” and proceed to step 36.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 0 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4 1 . “Direct Out =” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you do not wish to use
Direct OUT, select “Off.” If you wish to output
tracks 1–4, select “1-4.” If you w ish to output
tracks 5–8, select “5-8.”
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
dB
0
4
12
24
48
3 2 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
3 3 . “TR* SndLev =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send level.
4 2 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
3 4 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4 3 . “FX1 MstIns=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 1
into the master out, select “On.” If not, select
“Off.” If effect 1 has been inserted in another
channel, the display will indicate “—” and this
item cannot be set.
3 5 . “TR* SndPan” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send pan.
3 6 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
3 7 . “Master Sel=” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the bus (MIX, AUX,
FX1, FX2, REC) that you wish to output from the
MASTER jacks.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
12
24
48
dB
0
4
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
12
24
48
4 4 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
].
3 8 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
4 5 . “FX2 MstIns=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 2
into the master out, select “On.” If not, select
“Off.” If effect 2 has been inserted in another
channel, the display will indicate “—” and this
item cannot be set.
4 . “TR* Link=” or “IN* Link=” (“*” is the displayed
track/ source) appears in the display. Select the
tracks/ sou rces for w h ich you w ish to tu rn
Channel Link ON. Press the STATUS button for
the track/ source for which you wish to turn on
Channel Link, and use the TIME/ VALUE dial.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
dB
0
4
4
12
24
48
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 6 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
5 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4 7 . “Change Routing ?” appears in the display. Press
[YES]. When the rou ting has been finalized ,
“Complete” appears in the display, and you will
return to Play condition. If you decide to discard
the routing that was set, press [NO].
6 . “TR* =” or “IN* =” appears in the display. Specify
the tracks/ sources that you wish to output to the
mix bus. Press the SELECT (CH EDIT) button for
the corresp ond ing track/ sou rce, and u se the
TIME/ VALUE dial. Tracks/ sources which are
turned “On” will be output.
Sto rin g Mix d o w n Se ttin g s
(Mix d o w n / Ste p Ed it)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
Select this when you want adjust the balance of each
track or to record a MD recorder or similar input in
two-channel stereo. Additionally, when playing back
all 16 tracks, by mixing the output of the VS-880EX
alon g w ith th e ou tp u t of a syn ch ron ized MIDI
sequencer or other such device, you can also record to
MD recorders or similar devices.
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 . “Pan =” appears in the display. Adjust the pan of
the track/ source. Press the SELECT (CH EDIT)
button for the track/ source whose pan you wish
to adjust, and use the TIME/ VALUE dial. You
can also adjust the pan using the pan knobs on the
top panel.
* By Step Editing a mixdown, you can change the track and
source settings to be the same. If you wish to change the
track settings, press [FADER (EDIT)] to make the
FADER indicator light green. If you wish to change the
source settings press [FADER (EDIT)] to make the
FADER indicator light orange. Here we will explain the
example of how to change the track settings.
* When Channel Link is on, adjust the Offset Balance of the
sources/tracks. (p. 151)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
1 . Press [EZ ROUTING] several times until “EZR
Mix Down ?” appears in the display.
dB
0
4
2 . Press [YES].
12
24
48
“EZR Use Template” (do you wish to apply the tem-
plate?) appears in the display.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
3 . Press [NO].
8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
1 7 . “In sRtn =” ap p ears in th e d isp lay. Use th e
TIME/ VALUE d ial to ad just the insert return
level.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
9 . “Level =” appears in the display. Adjust the level
of the track/ source. Press the SELECT (CH EDIT)
button for the track/ source whose level you wish
to adjust, and use the TIME/ VALUE dial. You
can also adjust the level using the channel faders
on the top panel.
1 8 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
1 9 . “FX1 Snd=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE d ial. If you w ish to sen d th e
track/ source to the effect 1 bus, select either “Pre”
or “Pst,” and proceed to step 20. If you do not
wish to send the track/ source to the effect 1 bus,
select “Off,” and proceed to step 24.
* When Channel Link is on, adjust the Offset Level of the
sources/tracks. (p. 150)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
dB
0
4
12
24
48
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
2 0 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
1 1 . “Use EFFECT1 ?” appears in the display. If you
wish to use effect 1, press [YES], and proceed to
step 12. If you do not wish to use effect 1, press
[NO] and proceed to step 24.
2 1 . “Sn d Lev =” ap p ears in th e d isp lay. Use th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send level. If in
step 14 you selected either “Ins,” “InsL,” “InsR,”
or “InsS,” the sound already processed by the
effect will be sent to the effect bus. (It will not be
re-input to effect 1.)
1 2 . Th e effect p atch w ill be d isp layed . Use th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the effect patch that
you wish to use.
2 2 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
1 3 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 3 . “Sn d Pan ” ap p ears in th e d isp lay. Use th e
1 4 . “FX1 Ins=” appears in the d isplay. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 1,
select either “Ins,” “InsL,” “InsR,” or “InsS,” and
proceed to step 15. If you wish to use effect 1 in a
send/ return configuration, select “Off” and pro-
ceed to step 18.
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send pan.
2 4 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 5 . “Use EFFECT2 ?” appears in the display. If you
wish to use effect 2 press [YES], and make settings
for effect 2 as described in steps 12–23. If you do
not wish to use effect 2, press [NO] and proceed
to step 26.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 5 . “In sSn d =” ap p ears in th e d isp lay. Use th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the insert send level.
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
2 6 . “AUX Snd=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE d ial. If you w ish to sen d th e
track/ source to the AUX bus, select either “Pre”
or “Pst,” and proceed to step 27. If you do not
wish to send the track/ source to the AUX bus,
select “Off,” and proceed to step 31.
3 4 . “EQ Sel=” ap p ears in the d isp lay. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
0
4
12
24
48
3 5 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
3 6 . “Direct Out =” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you do not wish to use
Direct OUT, select “Off.” If you wish to output
tracks 1–4, select “1-4.” If you w ish to output
tracks 5–8, select “5-8.”
2 7 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 8 . “TR* SndLev =” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send level.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
2 9 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
dB
0
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
4
3 0 . “TR* SndPan” appears in the display. Use the
12
24
48
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the send pan.
3 1 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
3 2 . “Master Sel=” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the bus (MIX, AUX,
FX1, FX2, REC) that you wish to output from the
MASTER jacks.
3 7 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
3 8 . “FX1 MstIns=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 1
into the master out, select “On.” If not, select
“Off.” If effect 1 has been inserted in another
channel, the display will indicate “—” and this
item cannot be set.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
dB
0
4
3 3 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
12
24
48
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
3 9 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings
4 0 . “FX2 MstIns=” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial. If you wish to insert effect 2
into the master out, select “On.” If not, select
“Off.” If effect 2 has been inserted in another
channel, the display will indicate “—” and this
item cannot be set.
7 . Press PARAMETER [
The cursor will move to the routing number.
].
8 . Press [YES].
9 . If you are overwriting a previously saved user
routing, a message will ask for confirmation. Press
[YES].
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
1 0 . Wh en th e u ser rou tin g h as been saved ,
t”Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
dB
0
4
12
24
48
Re ca llin g Use r Ro u tin g
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 . Press [EZ ROUTING] several times until “User
4 1 . Press PARAMETER [
]. You can return to the
].
Routing ?” appears in the display.
previous screen by pressing PARAMETER [
2 . Press [YES].
The number and name of the user routing will be dis-
played.
4 2 . “Change Routing ?” appears in the display. Press
[YES]. When the rou ting has been finalized ,
“Complete” appears in the display, and you will
return to Play condition. If you decide to discard
the routing that was set, press [NO].
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the routing
number that you wish to recall. If not even one
u ser rou ting has been saved , “EZR N o User
Routing” appears in the display, and return to
step 1.
Sa ving the Current Routing (User Routing)
1 . Use Template or Step Edit to finalize the routing
4 . Press [YES].
that you wish to save.
5 . Wh en th e u ser rou tin g h as been recalled ,
“Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
2 . Press [EZ ROUTIN G] several tim es u n til
“SaveCurRouting ?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
The number and name of the user routing will be dis-
played.
De le tin g Use r Ro u tin g s
1 . Press [EZ ROUTIN G] several tim es u n til
Routing Number
Routing Name
“DelUserRouting ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
The number and name of the user routing will be dis-
played.
dB
0
4
12
24
48
3 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the routing
number that you wish to delete. If not even one
u ser rou ting has been saved , “EZR N o User
Routing” appears in the display, and return to
step 1.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the routing
number for the desired save destination.
4 . Press [YES].
A confirmation message is displayed.
5 . Press PARAMETER [
].
6 . Use CURSOR [ ] [
] to move the cursor.
5 . Press [YES].
Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to assign a name to
the user routing.
6 . Wh en th e u ser rou tin g h as been d eleted ,
“Complete” appears in the display, and you will
return to Play condition.
8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Ed itin g a Re co rd e d Pe rfo rm a n ce (Tra ck Ed itin g )
This chapter explains the content and procedures for
Bank A
Bank B
editing sound that has been recorded. Please read this
chapter to gain an understanding of the concepts of
“editing” described in this section.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ab o u t Ed itin g O p e ra tio n s
On a tape recorder, in order to modify a performance
that has been recorded you have to erase the perfor-
mance which you recorded previously. Additionally,
if you wish to change the composition of a song, you
must re-record it from the beginning, or use scissors
and tape to splice sections or the recording. In either
case, with the tape itself subject to handling, it can
never be returned to its original condition. This type of
editing is known as destructive editing.
Example of when track editing is not possible
H ow ever, Track Exchange (p . 92) is able to ed it
between different V-track banks.
Ab o u t th e Ba r Disp la y
Com p are w ith a tap e record er, w ith d igital d isk
recording, since copying data has negligible effect on
the sound, you can copy the original data before edit-
ing and back it up. It is also easy to copy parts of the
data to different locations, or to erase specified por-
tions of the data (Track Edit). Furthermore, even if you
make a mistake during Punch-In Recording or Track
Bouncing, you can restore data to its condition any
number of steps before the edit, without the edited
content being deleted (Undo function). Editing of this
type which allows the original data to be recovered is
known as non-destructive editing.
When you are selecting a track, the bar display will
indicate the track selection status. The numbers on the
horizontal axis are the track numbers, and the num-
bers on the vertical axis are the V-track numbers.
Locations corresponding to tracks which contain data
will light. Tracks which are selected for modification
will blink.
Copy source track
Copy destination track
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
Tra ck Ed it
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
To edit the sound, you will need to specify the track or
V-track and the location where you wish to edit.
V-Track bank
blinking
Only tracks or V-tracks within the same V-track bank
can be selected for track editing. For example, it is not
possible to copy or move track 1 / V-track 1 of V-track
bank A to V-track bank B.
At this time, you can view a Play List in the bar dis-
play. H old d ow n [SH IFT] and press [PLAY (DIS-
PLAY)]. To return to the previous display, once again
hold down [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
fig.06-00
Bank A
Bank B
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
dB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Example of when track editing is possible
8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
If you have selected an item which specifies a time, a
* The length of the data to be copied must be greater than
0.5 seconds. If data shorter than 0.5 seconds is copied, the
sound will not playback.
play list will appear in the bar display. In this case if
you wish to view an amplitude profile or the track
selection status in the bar display, hold down [SHIFT]
and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. The amplitude profile
allows you to view the sound recorded in the selected
track as a waveform. Use [SELECT (CH EDIT)] to
select the track which will be viewed as an amplitude
profile.
1 . You can use Track Copy with the tracks that are
currently audible. Select the V-track that contains
the copy source playback data, and prepare that
data for playback.
2 . Press [TRACK] several times until “TRK Track
Waveform display
Playback time
Copy ?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
4 . Press CURSOR [
] several times until “TRK
0
4
CopyTr.=?-?=>?-?” appears in the display.
12
24
48
5 . Press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] for the copy source
track.
The SELECT indicator will light orange.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
You can also use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the
copy source track.
Re p e a tin g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
(Tra ck Co p y )
6 . Press [STATUS] for the copy destination track.
The STATUS indicator will light red.
This operation copies the playback data of a specified
area to another location. For example, this is conve-
nient w hen you play the same chorus both at the
beginning and end of a song. If playback data exists at
the copy destination, that data will be overwritten.
7 . Rotating the TIME/ VALUE dial allows you to
specify the copy destination V-track. For example,
“1-1” indicates “Track 1, V-track 1.”
Copy source track
Copy destination track
Example1: Copying twice to the same track
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
A
A'
A"
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Start
End
To
Time
blinking
8 . If you want to copy multiple tracks simultaneous-
Example2: Copying twice to a defferent track
B
ly, repeat Steps 5–7.
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as copy destinations for other Tracks.
9 . If there are any tracks which you decide not to
copy, press that track's [SELECT (CH EDIT)] once
again.
B'
B"
The SELECT indicator will blink orange.
Alternatively, you can u se PARAMETER [
]
Start
End
To
Time
[
] to access the settings for that track, and press
[CANCEL (NO)] twice.
* Playback data of a track for which Channel Link is ON
cannot be copied to a track whose channel has a Channel
Link setting of OFF. In the same way, playback data of a
track for which Channel Link is OFF cannot be copied to a
track whose channel has a Channel Link setting of ON.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“TRK St=” appears in the display.
8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK To =” appears in the display.
St (Sta rt p o in t)
1 7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Specifies the starting time of the copy range.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
To (To p o in t)
“TRK Frm=” appears in the display.
Specifies the reference time of the copy destination.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK Copy Time=” appears in the display.
Frm (Fro m p o in t)
1 9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Specifies the time of the copy source playback data in
relation to the “To” point. Normally you will set this
to be the same as the Start point.
Co p y Tim e
This specifies the number of times (1–99) the data is to
be copied.
Usin g “ Frm ” Effe ctive ly
2 0 . Press PARAMETER [
“TRK Track Copy OK ?” appears in the display.
].
Normally, the data is copied starting at the speci-
fied copy destination time. However, if you want
to have the copy made with reference to a point
w ithin the d esignated range w here a sp ecific
sound occurs, set this with “Frm.”
2 1 . Press [YES].
This executes Track Copy. If you wish to cancel, press
[NO].
For example, suppose that you wish to copy a
sound effect of a tim e bom b ticking and then
exploding, and that you want to place the explo-
sion at a specific timing location. Normally, in
order to specify the copy destination time, you
would have to calculate the time until the explo-
sion occurs. In such cases, however, you can spec-
ify “Frm” as “the copy source time at which the
explosion begins” and “TO” (the reference time of
the copy destination) as “the copy destination
time at which you want the explosion to occur.”
This lets you copy the data with the explosion
placed with precisely the right timing.
2 2 . Wh en th e cop y is com p leted correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
An Ea sy W a y to Sp e cify th e Tim e Se ttin g s
Times for the “St,” “Frm,” “End,” and “To” can be
specified directly without having to display the
Track Copy page. In Play condition, use the fol-
lowing procedure.
1 . Move to the beginning (“St”) of the copy
source performance data.
Example 3: Copying using the “Frm” setting
C
2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/ 5].
3 . Move to the time location in the destination
to which the performance data will be copied
(“Frm”).
4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC2/ 6].
C'
5 . Move to the end location of the copy source
performance data (“End”).
Start From
End
To
Time
6 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/ 7].
7 . Move to the basic time of the copy destination
(“To”).
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
8 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC4/ 8].
If you now access the Track Copy page, the times
that were specified in steps 1–8 will be input as
the time settings for the respective points.
“TRK End=” appears in the display.
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
En d (En d p o in t)
Specifies the ending time of the copy range.
9 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
The SELECT indicator will light orange.
Mo vin g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
(Tra ck Mo ve )
This operation moves the playback data in a specified
range to another location. This is convenient for cor-
recting timing mistakes that can occur during record-
ing. If playback data exists at the move destination,
that data will be overwritten.
You can also use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the
move source track.
6 . Press [STATUS] for the move destination track.
The STATUS indicator will light red.
7 . Rotating the TIME/ VALUE dial allows you to
specify the move destination V-track. For exam-
ple, “1-1” indicates “Track 1, V-track 1.”
Example 1: Moving with in the same track
Move source track Move destination track
A
A
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
Start
End
To
Time
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Example 2: Moving to a different track
B
blinking
8 . If you want to move multiple tracks simultane-
ously, repeat Steps 5–7.
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as move destinations for other Tracks.
B
9 . If there are any tracks which you decide not to
move, press that track's [SELECT (CH EDIT)]
once again.
Start
End
To
Time
The SELECT indicator will blink orange.
* Playback data of a track for which Channel Link is ON
cannot be moved to a track whose channel has a Channel
Link setting of OFF. In the same way, playback data of a
track for which Channel Link is OFF cannot be moved to
a track whose channel has a Channel Link setting of ON.
Alternatively, you can u se PARAMETER [
]
[
] to access the settings for that track, and press
[CANCEL (NO)] twice.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
* The length of the data to be moved must be greater than
0.5 seconds. If data shorter than 0.5 seconds is moved, the
sound will not playback.
“TRK St=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the
section of data that is moved. Any sound which was with-
in 0.5 seconds of the moved data will not playback.
St (Sta rt p o in t)
Specifies the starting time of the move range.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
“TRK Frm=” appears in the display.
].
1 . You can move the tracks that are currently audi-
ble. Select the V-track that contains the move
source playback data, and prepare that data for
playback.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Frm (Fro m p o in t)
2 . Press [TRACK] several times until “TRK Track
Specifies the time of the move source playback data in
relation to the To point. Normally you will set this to
be the same as the Start point.
Move ?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
4 . Press CURSOR [
] several times until “TRK
MoveTr.=?-?=>?-?” appears in the display.
5 . Press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] for the channel con-
taining the move source track.
9 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
Usin g “ Frm ” Effe ctive ly
An Ea sy W a y to Sp e cify th e Tim e Se ttin g s
Times for the “St,” “Frm,” “End,” and “To” can be
specified directly without having to display the
Track Move page. In Play condition, use the fol-
lowing procedure.
Normally, the data is copied starting at the speci-
fied move destination time. However, if you want
to have the move made with reference to a point
w ithin the d esignated range w here a sp ecific
sound occurs, set this with “Frm.”
1 . Move to the beginning (“St”) of the move
For example, suppose that you wish to move a
sound effect of a tim e bom b ticking and then
exploding, and that you want to place the explo-
sion at a specific timing location. Normally, in
order to specify the move destination time, you
would have to calculate the time until the explo-
sion occurs. In such cases, however, you can spec-
ify “Frm” as “the move source time at which the
explosion begins” and “TO” (the reference time of
the move destination) as “the move destination
time at which you want the explosion to occur.”
This lets you move the data with the explosion
placed with precisely the right timing.
source performance data.
2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/ 5].
3 . Move to the time location in the destination
to which the performance data will be moved
(“Frm”).
4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC2/ 6].
5 . Move to the end location of the move source
performance data (“End”).
6 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/ 7].
7 . Move to the basic time of the move destina-
tion (“To”).
Example 3: Moving using the “Frm” setting
8 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC4/ 8].
If you now access the Track Move page, the times
that were specified in steps 1–8 will be input as
the time settings for the respective points.
C
C
Ex ch a n g in g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
Be tw e e n Tra ck s (Tra ck Ex ch a n g e )
Start
End
To
Time
From
This operation exchanges the playback data of two
tracks.
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
“TRK End=” appears in the display.
].
Example: Exchanging tracks 1 and 2
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Track 1
A
B
C
En d (En d p o in t)
Specifies the ending time of the move range.
Track 2
D
D
E
E
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
“TRK To =” appears in the display.
].
Track 1
Track 2
1 7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
To (To p o in t)
Specifies the reference time of the move destination.
A
B
C
1 8 . Press PARAMETER [ ].
“TRK Track Move OK ?” appears in the display.
Time
1 9 . Press [YES].
This executes Track Move. If you wish to cancel, press
[NO].
* Playback data of a track for which Channel Link is ON
cannot be exchanged to a track whose channel has a
Channel Link setting of OFF. In the same way, playback
data of a track for which Channel Link is OFF cannot be
exchanged to a track whose channel has a Channel Link
setting of ON.
2 0 . Wh en th e m ove is com p leted correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
9 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
8 . If you want to exchange multiple tracks simulta-
Tra ck Ex ch a n g e w ith a d iffe re n t V-tra ck
b a n k
neously, repeat Steps 5–7.
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as exchange destinations for other Tracks.
You can use Track Exchange to swap tracks or V-
tracks of different V-track banks. For example if
you wish to copy track 1 / V-track 1 of V-track
bank A (hereafter referred to as A-1-1) to track 1 /
V-track 1 of V-track bank B (referred to as B-1-1),
you can use the following procedure.
9 . If there are any tracks which you decide not to
exchange, press that track's [SELECT (CH EDIT)]
once again.
The SELECT indicator will blink orange.
Alternatively, you can u se PARAMETER [
]
1 . Track exchange A-1-1 and B-1-8.
2 . Copy B-1-8 to B-1-1.
[
] to access the settings for that track, and press
[CANCEL (NO)] twice.
3 . Once again, track exchange B-1-8 and A-1-1.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK TrackExchangeOK ?” appears in the display.
1 1 . Press [YES].
This executes Track Exchange. If you wish to cancel,
press [NO].
1 . You can exchange the tracks that are currently
audible. Select the V-track containing the source
playback data to be exchanged.
2 . Press [TRACK] several times until “TRK Track
1 2 . Wh en th e exch an ge is com p leted correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
Exchange ?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
4 . Press CURSOR [
] several times until “TRK
In se rtin g a Bla n k Sp a ce In to
Tr.=?-*:?=>?-?:?” (“*” is the current V-track bank)
appears in the display.
Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta (Tra ck In se rt)
This operation inserts blank space at the specified
location.
5 . Press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] for the channel con-
taining the exchange source track.
The SELECT indicator will light orange.
You can also use the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the
exchange source track.
6 . Press [STATUS] for the exchange d estination
track.
blank
The STATUS indicator will light red.
7 . Rotating the TIME/ VALUE dial allows you to
specify the exchange d estination V-track. For
example, “1-A:1” indicates “V-track 1 of track 1 in
V-track bank A.”
To
Time
Length
* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the
area into which the data will be inserted. Any sound
which was within 0.5 seconds of the inserted data will not
playback.
Exchange
source track
Exchange
destination track
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
1 . Press [TRACK] several times until “TRK Track
4
Insert ?” appears in the display.
12
24
48
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press CURSOR [
] several times until “TRK
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Insert Tr.=?-?” appears in the display.
blinking
4 . Press [STATUS] for the channel containing the
insert source track.
The STATUS indicator will light red.
9 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
5 . Rotating the TIME/ VALUE dial allows you to
An Ea sy W a y to Sp e cify th e Tim e Se ttin g s
specify the insert destination V-track. For exam-
ple, “1-1” means “V-track 1 of track 1,” “1-*”
means “all V-tracks of track 1,” and “*-*” means
“all V-tracks of all tracks.”
The time for the “To” can be specified directly
without having to display the Track Insert page.
In Play condition, use the following procedure.
blinking
Insert destination track
1 . Move to the time location into w hich you
wish to insert the blank (“To”).
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC4/ 8].
If you now access the Track Erase page, the time
that was specified in steps 1–2 will be input as the
tim e setting for the To point. Just specify the
length of the blank (Length), and execute Track
Erase.
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
6 . If you want to insert multiple tracks simultane-
De le tin g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta (Tra ck Cu t)
ously, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
This operation cuts playback data from the specified
area. When playback data is cut using this operation,
any playback data following the data that was cut will
move forward to fill the gap. To use the analogy of a
tape recorder, this operation is like cutting an unwant-
ed portion out of an audio tape, and splicing the ends.
7 . If there are any tracks which you decide not to
insert, press that track's [STATUS] once again.
The STATUS indicator will blink green.
Alternatively, you can u se PARAMETER [
]
[
] to access the settings for that track, and press
[CANCEL (NO)].
A
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“TRK To=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
To (To p o in t)
Specify the time location at which the blank will be
inserted.
Start
End
Time
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK Len=” appears in the display.
* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the
area to be cut. Any sound which was within 0.5 seconds
of the cut data will not playback.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Le n (Le n g th )
Specify the time (length) length of the blank.
* While it may seem that the performance data has disap-
peared, the data itself is not deleted from the hard disk.
Thus, even when you carry out the Track Cut procedure,
the free disk space shown in the display does not change.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
“TRK Track Insert OK ?” appears in the display.
].
1 3 . Press [YES].
This executes Track Insert. If you wish to cancel, press
[NO].
1 . Press [TRACK] several times until “TRK Track
Cut ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
1 4 . Wh en th e in sert is com p leted correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
3 . Press CURSOR [
] several times until “TRK
Cut Tr.=?-?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [STATUS] for the track on which you want
to carry out Track Cut.
The STATUS indicator will light red.
9 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
5 . You can use the TIME/ VALUE dial to specify the
An Ea sy W a y to Sp e cify th e Tim e Se ttin g s
Times for the “St” and “End” can be specified
directly without having to display the Track Cut
page. In Play condition, use the following proce-
dure.
V-track that you wish to delete. For example, “1-
1” means “V-track 1 of track 1,” “1-*” means “all
V-tracks of track 1,” and “*-*” means “all V-tracks
of all tracks.”
Displayed blinking
Track for cut
1 . Move to the beginning of the area that you
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
wish to cut (“St”).
dB
2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/ 5].
0
4
3 . Move to the end of the area that you wish to
12
24
48
cut (“End”).
4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/ 7].
If you now access the Track Cut page, the times
that were specified in steps 1–4 will be input as
the time settings for the respective points.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
6 . If you want to cut multiple tracks simultaneously,
repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7 . If there are any tracks which you decide not to
cut, press that track's [STATUS] once again.
The STATUS indicator will blink green.
Era sin g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
(Tra ck Era se )
Alternatively, you can u se PARAMETER [
]
This operation erases playback data from the specified
area. If this operation is used to erase playback data,
even if playback data exists after the area that was
erased, it will not be moved forward. To use the analo-
gy of a tape recorder, this operation is like recording
silence over an unwanted section of the tape.
[
] to access the settings for that track, and press
[CANCEL (NO)].
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“TRK St=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
A
St (Sta rt p o in t)
Specifies the starting time of the segment to be cut.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK End=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
En d (En d p o in t)
Start
End
Time
Specifies the ending time of the segment to be cut.
* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the
area to be erased. Any sound which was within 0.5 sec-
onds of the erased data will not playback.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
“TRK Track Cut OK ?” appears in the display.
].
1 3 . Press [YES].
This executes Track Cut. If you wish to cancel, press
[NO].
* While it may seem that the performance data has disap-
peared, the data itself is not deleted from the hard disk.
Thus, even when you carry out the Track Erase proce-
dure, the free disk space shown in the display does not
change.
1 4 . When the cut is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display, and return to Play condi-
tion.
1 . Press [TRACK] several times until “TRK Track
Erase ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press CURSOR [
] several times until “TRK
Erase Tr.=?-?” appears in the display.
9 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
4 . Press [STATUS] for the track on which you want
An Ea sy W a y to Sp e cify th e Tim e Se ttin g s
to carry out Track Erase.
Times for the “St” and “End” can be specified
directly without having to display the Track Erase
page. In Play condition, use the following proce-
dure.
The STATUS indicator will light red.
5 . You can use the TIME/ VALUE dial to specify the
V-track that you wish to erase. For example, “1-1”
means “V-track 1 of track 1,” “1-*” means “all V-
tracks of track 1,” and “*-*” means “all V-tracks of
all tracks.”
1 . Move to the beginning of the area that you
wish to erase (“St”).
2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/ 5].
Displayed blinking
Track for erase
3 . Move to the end of the area that you wish to
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
erase (“End”).
dB
0
4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/ 7].
If you now access the Track Erase page, the times
that were specified in steps 1–4 will be input as
the time settings for the respective points.
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
6 . If you want to erase multiple tracks simultaneous-
Mo d ify in g th e Pla y b a ck Tim e o f th e
Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
ly, press repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7 . If there are any tracks which you decide not to
erase, press that track's [STATUS] once again.
The STATUS indicator will blink green.
(Tim e Co m p re ssio n / Ex p a n sio n )
This operation allows you to expand or compress the
playback time of a song to a specified length of time.
You can specify the amount of compression or expan-
sion in a range of 75–125%, but the more extreme the
settings, the more ad verse the effect w ill be on the
sound quality. We recommend that you normally keep
compression and expansion within a range of 93–107 %.
Alternatively, you can u se PARAMETER [
]
[
] to access the settings for that track, and press
[CANCEL (NO)].
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK St=” appears in the display.
Example 1: Compression
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
St (Sta rt p o in t)
Specifies the starting time of the segment to be erased.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK End=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Start
To
End
Time
En d (En d p o in t)
Specifies the ending time of the segment to be erased.
Example 2: Expansion
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK Track Erase OK ?” appears in the display.
1 3 . Press [YES].
This executes Track Erase. If you wish to cancel, press
[NO].
1 4 . Wh en th e erase is com p leted correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display, and return to
Play condition.
Start
End To
Time
9 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
In general, when you compress or expand the play-
back tim e, the pitch changes in proportion to the
amount of compression or expansion. For example, if
the playback time is shortened, the pitch of the sound
played back then rises. On the VS-880EX, you can
select whether the playback pitch changes in accor-
dance with the ratio of compression or expansion, or
whether the original playback pitch is preserved.
Alternatively, you can u se PARAMETER [
]
[
] to access the settings for that track, and press
[CANCEL (NO)].
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK St=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
St (Sta rt p o in t)
This specifies when compression or expansion of the
playback time starts.
* Time Compression/Expansion creates new performance
data with a different playback time. For this reason, it
cannot be executed if there is not sufficient space on the
current drive.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
* It is not possible to make Track Compression/Expansion
settings when the elapsed time from the Start Point to the
End Point or from the Start Point to the To Point is less
than 0.5 seconds.
“TRK End=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
En d (En d p o in t)
* Do not compress data to a period of 0.5 seconds or shorter.
If it is compressed to 0.5 seconds or less, the sound will
not be played.
This specifies when compression or expansion of the
playback time ends.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
1 . Press [TRACK] several times until “TRK Time
“TRK To=” appears in the display.
Comp/ Exp. ?” appears in the display.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 . Press [YES].
To (To p o in t)
3 . Press CURSOR [
] several times until “TRK
This specifies the ending time location that will result
from the compression or expansion.
CompExpTr.=?-?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [STATUS] for the track on which you want
to compress or expand.
The STATUS indicator will light red.
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK Pitch Mode=” appears in the display.
5 . You can use the TIME/ VALUE dial to specify the
V-track that you wish to compress or expand. For
example, “1-1” means “V-track 1 of track 1,” “1-*”
means “all V-tracks of track 1,” and “*-*” means
“all V-tracks of all tracks.”
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Pitch Mo d e
If you want the playback pitch to change as a result of
the compression or expansion, set this to “Variable”; if
not, set this to “Fixed.”
Displayed blinking
Track forcompress or expand
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
“TRK Type=” appears in the display.
dB
0
1 7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
4
12
24
48
Ty p e
This specifies the type of conversion. Select the setting
that fits your needs or that matches the type song you
are working with.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
A: For vocals or narration.
6 . If you w ant to com p ress or exp and m u ltip le
B: For slow-tempo songs such as slow ballads.
C: For fast-tempo songs such as rock.
tracks simultaneously, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7 . If there are any tracks which you decide not to
compress or expand, press that track's [STATUS]
once again.
1 8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK Amplitude=” appears in the display.
The STATUS indicator will blink green.
1 9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
9 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
Am p litu d e
This specifies the volume level ratio (50, 60, 70, 80, 90,
100%) that will result from the conversion. Normally,
the default value of 60% is recommended. If the vol-
ume level after conversion is too low, use the Undo
function to return to the original data, increase the
am p litu d e settings, and try the op eration again.
H ow ever, excessively high settings can introd uce
noise in the data.
2 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“TRK TimeComp/ Exp. OK ?” appears in the display.
2 1 . Press [YES].
This executes Time Compression/ Expansion. If you
wish to cancel, press [NO].
* Be aware that, depending on conditions, it may take some
time for compression or expansion to be completed. This is
not a malfunction. Progress of the operation is shown in
the display: do not turn off the power until the
compression or expansion the track is complet-
ed. You can cancel compression or expansion by pressing
[NO].
2 2 . When the compression or expansion is completed
correctly, “Complete” appears in the display, and
return to Play condition.
9 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Use w ith a Zip Drive
A Zip drive can be connected to the SCSI connector of
the VS-880EX. Be sure to read the owner’s manual for
your Zip drive as well.
• Do not subject Zip disks to temperature extremes
(e.g., d irect su nlight in an enclosed vehicle).
(Storage temperature: -22–51° C, storage humidi-
ty: 10–90%)
This chapter will explain the procedures for saving
songs to Zip disks and for returning songs saved to
Zip disks back to the internal hard disk.
• Do not expose Zip disks to strong magnetic fields,
such as those generated by loudspeakers.
The identification label should be firmly affixed to
the Zip disk. Should the label come loose while the
Zip disk is in the Zip drive, it may be difficult to
remove the Zip disk.
Be fo re Yo u Use a Zip Drive
Ha n d lin g th e Zip Drive
Put the Zip disk back into its case for storage.
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area
free from vibration. If the unit is tilted excessively,
the Zip drive may malfunction or require service.
Zip disks do not have a protect tab to prevent data
from being erased accidentally. If necessary, use
Song Protect to protect your data (p. 65).
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been
moved to a location with a level of humidity that is
greatly different than its former location. Rapid
changes in the environment can cause condensation
to form inside the Zip drive, which will adversely
affect the operation of the Zip drive and/ or damage
Zip disks. When the unit has been moved, allow it
to become accustomed to the new environment
(allow a few hours) before operating it.
Co n n e ctin g th e Zip Drive
Use the following procedure to connect the Zip drive
to the VS-880EX.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or
other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off
the power on all devices before making any connections.
* Once the connections have been completed, turn on power
to your various devices in the order specified. By turning
on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunc-
tion and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
To insert a Zip disk, push it gently but firmly into
the Zip drive—it will click into place. To remove a
Zip disk, press the EJECT button firmly. Do not use
excessive force to rem ove a Zip d isk w hich is
lodged in the Zip drive.
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down
before switching on power. Even with the volume all the
way down, you may still hear some sound when the power
is switched on, but this is normal, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
Never attempt to remove a Zip disk from the Zip
drive while the Zip drive is operating (the indicator
is lit); damage could result to both the Zip disk and
the Zip drive.
Remove any Zip disk from the Zip drive before
powering up or down.
To prevent damage to the Zip disk drive’s heads,
always try to hold the Zip disk in a level position
(not tilted in any direction) while inserting it into
the Zip drive. Push it in firmly, but gently. Never
use excessive force.
Do not insert disks other than the specified Zip
disks.
Ha n d lin g Zip Disk s
Zip disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating
of magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision
is required to enable storage of large amounts of
data on such a small surface area. To preserve their
integrity, please observe the following when han-
dling Zip disks:
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the Zip
disk.
• Do not use or store Zip disks in dirty or dusty
areas.
9 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive
1 . Turn on the power of the Zip drive.
Drive for initialize
(in the example, a Zip drive)
2 . Tu rn on the p ow er of the VS-880EX w ith the
POWER switch on the rear panel.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
3 . Turn on the power of connected audio equip-
dB
0
ments.
4
12
24
48
4 . Raise the volume of the audio devices to appro-
priate levels.
* For more detailed information regarding Zip drive con-
nections, including the necessary settings, please refer to
“About SCSI” (Appendices p. 5).
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
In it Drive (In itia lize Drive )
Select the disk drive (IDE, SCSI0–SCSI7). “ The inter-
nal hard disk will be shown as “IDE,” and external
disk drives will be shown as “SC0–SC7.” The number
following each disk drive indicates the partition num-
ber. For example, select “SCSI5” when selecting the
Zip drive connection.
In itia lizin g th e Disk
(Drive In itia lize )
A new disk just purchased at computer store or a disk
that was used by another device cannot be used on
the VS-880EX as is. You must initialize the disk so
that it can be used by the VS-880EX. When a disk is
initialized, the entire contents are irretrievably lost.
Check any such disk you plan to initialize to make
sure that it does not contain anything that you don’t
want deleted. Additionally, disks used with the VS-
880EX cannot be used on other devices (such as
personal computers).
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“PhysicalFmt” appears in the display.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ph y sica l Fo rm a t
Select whether or not to use physical formatting. For
new disks or disks that have been used by another
device, select “On.” For new hard disks or when for-
matting disks for Windows or Macintosh platforms,
select “Off”.
* If you accidentally delete data that you need, that data
cannot be restored to its previous condition. Roland
Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of
data.
If you are using a drive or disk that has been parti-
tioned , p lease note that you will not be able to
choose a particular partition that you wish to ini-
tialize. When you carry out a drive initialization, the
whole drive and all its partitions will be initialized at
once.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
“Partition” appears in the display.
].
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Pa rtitio n
Select the partition size (500 MB or 1000 MB). In nor-
mal circumstances, select “1000 MB.”
Here is an example how to initialize new Zip disks.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
“Surface Scan” appears in the display.
].
1 . Confirm that power of the Zip drive and the VS-
880EX is turned on.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 . Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
3 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Su rfa ce Sca n
DriveInitialize” appears in the display.
This confirms that the read and write functions in all
of the disk drive’s partitions are operating correctly
when the drive is initialized. In normal circumstances,
set this to “Off.” When you particularly want to con-
duct a test of the read/ write functions, the set this to
“On” (p. 101).
4 . Press [YES].
“Init.Drive=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 0 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive
* The Surface Scan procedure takes a certain amount of
time. Be aware that Surface Scan requires some time. This
is not a malfunction. For example, the time required to
conduct Surface Scan on one Zip disk (100 MB) is
approximately 10 minutes. The time it will take to con-
duct Surface Scan on your disk drive should be based on
the size (capacity) of the disk. The progress of the Surface
Scan procedure is shown in the display.
1 2 . Press [YES].
“SYS Init.***:* OK ?” appears in the display. “***:*”
refers to the drive’s SCSI ID number. For example,
“SC5:U” indicates a Zip drive.
1 3 . Press [YES].
“SYS Init.***:*, Sure ?” (Really initialize the disk?)
appears in the display.
1 4 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
3 . When Surface Scan is completed, one of the fol-
lowing messages appears in the display.
“File System Err”:
A read or w rite failure has occurred in a location
w hich stores basic d ata used by the VS-880EX for
recording and playback. This disk drive cannot be
used by the VS-880EX.
1 5 . f you wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if
not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
1 6 . After the initialization is completed correctly, the
VS-880EX restarts automatically, and return to
Play condition.
“_____Defect”:
The underlined portion will indicate the number of
unusable memory locations in this drive. The larger
this number is, the lower the reliability of this drive.
* Be aware that initializing a drive requires some time. This
is not a malfunction. For example, when physical format-
ting is turned on, the time required to format one Zip disk
is approximately 10 minutes. The progress of initializa-
tion will be shown in the display. Be sure not to turn
the power off until initialization is complete.
“— Complete —”:
This drive has no unusable memory.
4 . Press [YES].
The VS-880EX will restart.
Ch e ck in g Disk Re lia b ility
Ca n ce lin g Su rfa ce Sca n
You may cancel Surface Scan by performing the
following procedure.
When initializing a hard disk or other disk, you can
confirm that the read and write functions in all of the
disk partitions are operating correctly. This is referred
to as Surface Scan. If there are any places on the disk
where the reading or writing of data cannot be per-
formed, the VS-880EX registers this as unusable
memory. Record in g an d p layback th en becom e
unavailable at that location.
1 . Press [EXIT (NO)].
“Cancel?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
Surface Scan is new canceled. However, the mem-
ory found to be unusable up to that point is not
registered.
Performing this procedure deletes all contents saved
on the d isk. Cond uct this check w hen initializing
new ly purchased d isks or d isks w hich previously
have been used with a personal computer or other
device. Be sure to make a backup copy of any disk you
are presently using on the VS-880EX before carrying
out the procedure on it.
3 . The VS-880EX restarts automatically.
1 . Set Surface Scan to “On,” and as described in
“Initializing the Disk” (p. 111), carry out the Drive
Initialize procedure.
2 . After initialization of the d isk is com p leted ,
Surface Scan begins automatically.
1 0 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive
Sa vin g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta to
a Zip Drive (So n g Co p y )
Song
You can save song data created on the VS-880EX to an
external disk. This is a convenient way to have song
data backed up in the event of possible disk drive
problems or to save data when there is little free disk
space.
Furthermore, since Zip disks are easy to handle and
manage, you can use them when sharing song data
with friends or when you have a VS-880EX both in the
studio and at home. We recommend keeping copies of
important song data on multiple disks.
Archives:
Use this method to copy songs that are too large to be
saved on a single disk. The song data is converted into
a data format specifically for saving (archives format),
and is copied onto multiple disks according to the free
space on the disks. This means that it will not be possi-
ble to directly play back the song data. If you wish to
play back song data copied in archive format, you will
need to reload the archive data into the current drive
using the appropriate procedure. Furthermore, song
data cannot be copied onto disks that already have
songs recorded on them.
* Incorrectly conducting the Song Copy procedure may
result in loss of data. Roland Corporation assumes no lia-
bility concerning such loss of data. Furthermore, Roland
does not warrant any copied data, regardless of the perfor-
mance or condition of the Zip Drive.
Ba ck in g Up So n g Da ta w ith a CD-R Drive
o r DAT Re co rd e r
You can use a CD-R drive or DAT recorder to
back up song data from the VS-880EX. Song data
backed up onto a CD-R disc cannot be overwrit-
ten. Thus, this method is appropriate for backing
up completely finished songs or other such data.
Song data backed up on DAT tapes can be over-
written any number of times, but considering the
time required for saving data, and because of reli-
ability issues, it is more convenient to back up
data using a Zip drive. Roland recommends back-
ing up data (Song Copy) with a Zip drive.
Song
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
There are two ways to carry out the Song Copy proce-
dure. Select the method depend on the amount of free
space on the destination disk (100 MB for Zip disks).
The size of the current song is shown in the display.
To see the size of the current song, hold down [SHIFT]
and press [SONG] (p. 164).
Ab o u t O p tim ize
When operations such as punch-in recording are
repeated, old (now unused) performance data still
remains on the disk drive. By erasing this unnec-
essary data from the disk drive, you can free up a
significant amount of disk space.
Playable:
Use this method to copy songs that use relatively little
data onto disks with sufficient memory to hold them.
If the destination drive or disk already has saved song
data on it, then you can copy additional songs that
will fit within the remaining free space.
When you find that you cannot save something to
a single disk, then try the “Song Optimize” proce-
dure (p. 156). This way, you can reduce the mem-
ory required to save a song, enabling you to save
to a single disk.
1 0 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive
9 . Press [YES].
A message asking if you want to continue appears in
the display.
Sa vin g a So n g to a Sin g le
Disk (Pla y a b le )
Here, the procedure for saving a playable copy of a
song on the VS-880EX’s internal hard disk to a Zip
disk which is set to SCSI ID Number 5 is explained.
1 0 . If “ALL” is specified as the target in step 6, a con-
firmation message will ask you whether you want
to initialize the copy destination disk drive. If you
wish to initialize the copy destination disk drive
and copy the song data, press [YES]. In this case,
all song data that had been saved on the copy des-
tination disk drive will be lost. If you wish to copy
without initializing, press [NO].
The approximate times which can be copied to one Zip
disk (100 Mbyte) are as follows (calculated as one
track).
Recording
Mode
Sample Rate
44.1kHz
1 1 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
48.0kHz
17mins.
34mins.
46mins.
55mins.
32.0kHz
26mins.
52mins.
69mins.
83mins.
MAS
MT1
MT2
LIV
18mins.
37mins.
50mins.
60mins.
1 2 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
(All times approximate)
1 3 . When the Playable Copy procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
1 . Select the disk containing the source song you
want to copy as the current drive.
If “ Disk Me m o ry Fu ll” Ap p e a rs in th e
Disp la y
2 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G Song
Copy ?” appears in the display.
This indicates that the destination disk has insuffi-
cient free space, or that the number of songs on
the disk has exceeded the maximum number (200
songs) that can be stored on the disk, and that the
copy procedure was canceled. However, you can
still use the song data copied up to that point.
3 . Press [YES].
“SNG CpyMode=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate th e TIME/ VALUE d ial. H ere, select
“Playable.”
Cp y Mo d e
Select how the song will be copied.
Playable:
Archives:
Playable type.
Archives type.
5 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SNG CpyTarget=” appears in the display.
6 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE d ial. If you w ish to
copy the current song, select “1 Song.” To copy all
songs from the current drive, select “All.”
7 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SNG Dest.Drive=” appears in the display.
8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. Select the copy
destination disk drive. The internal hard disk will
be shown as “IDE,” and external disk drives will
be shown as “SC0–SC7.” The number following
each disk drive indicates the partition number.
For example if you wish to copy to a Zip disk,
select “SC5:0.”
1 0 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive
To Lo a d Da ta fro m Disk s
(Drive Se le ct)
Internal Hard Disk
Song 1
If you want to take playable songs that have been
cop ied to Zip d isks and load them onto the VS-
880EX’s hard disk, first switch the current drive to the
Zip drive (Drive Select). This is referred to as Drive
Select. Afterwards, you can make playable copies
onto the internal hard disk from the Zip disk.
Song 2
Zip Disk
Song 1
Song 4
* Even if you remake a playable copy of a song from the Zip
disk to the internal hard disk without first deleting an
existing playable copy of the song from the hard disk (even
if you return it to the hard disk), the original song is not
overwritten. In this case, a new song is created with the
same song name as that of the original and is written to
the lowest available song number.
Internal Hard Disk
Song 1
Song 2
Song 1
Song 4
Internal Hard Disk
Song 1
Zip Disk
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
Song 4
Zip Disk
Song 1
1 . Confirm that power of both the Zip drive and the
VS-880EX is turned on.
2 . Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
3 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Drive
Select” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
The connected disk drives will be detected.
Internal Hard Disk
Song 1
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE d ial. Select the d isk
drive to which you want to change. The internal
hard disk will be shown as “IDE,” and external
d isk d rives w ill be show n as “SC0–SC7.” The
number following each disk drive indicates the
partition number. For example if you w ish to
switch to the Zip drive, select “SC5:0.”
Song 2
Song 3
Song 4
Song 1
Zip Disk
Song 1
6 . Press [YES].
A confirmation message appears on the screen.
7 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
8 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
9 . After you have switched the current drive, return
to Play condition.
1 0 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive
1 0 . Following the procedure described in “Saving a
Song to a Single Disk” (p. 103), make a playable
copy of the song on the Zip disk to the internal
hard disk.
6 . Press PARAMETER [
“SNG ArcTarget=” appears in the display.
].
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE d ial. If you w ish to
copy the current song, select “1 Song.” To copy all
songs from the current drive, select “All.”
1 1 . After you have made the copy, repeat Steps 3–9 to
reselect the internal hard disk as the current drive.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SNG Arc.Drive=” appears in the display.
W h e n Yo u Ca n n o t Sa ve a
So n g to a Sin g le Disk
(Arch ive s)
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. Select the copy
destination disk drive. For this operation, you will
be able to select only removable disk drives which
are connected to the SCSI connector. It is not pos-
sible to select the current drive (the internal hard
disk) as the copy destination drive. For example if
you wish to copy to a Zip disk, select “SC5:0.”
Ha n d lin g o f Arch ive s Co p y Disk s
To save songs in archives format, the destination
disk must be initialized. This initialization proce-
dure differs from the usual Drive Initialize for-
matting (p. 111). This procedure lets you carry out
Archives Copy with newly purchased disks, disks
which previously have been used with a personal
computer or other device, or other disks which
have not been formatted with Drive Initialize.
However, any song data saved to the disk is lost
once the Archives Copy procedure is performed.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SNG Arc.Func=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate th e TIME/ VALUE d ial. H ere, select
“Store.”
Arc.Fu n c (Arch ive s Fu n ctio n )
Select the Archive Type copy method.
Store: Saving to Zip Disks.
Additionally, you cannot designate a disk contain-
ing archive format songs as the current drive. If
you try to do this, the disk is identified as being
an uninitialized disk.
Extract: Loading from Zip Disks.
1 2 . Press [YES].
A message asking if you want to continue appears in
the display.
1 3 . Press [YES].
Sa vin g to Disk s (Sto re )
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
Here we will explain the example of when a Zip drive
with SCSI ID number 5 is connected as an external
disk drive.
1 4 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
1 . Make the drive (internal hard disk) containing the
song you want to copy the current drive.
1 5 . The display will ask, “You’ll Lose Data/ Continue
?.” Press [YES]. If you d ecid e to can cel th e
Archives Copy operation, press [NO].
2 . Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
3 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G Song
* All data saved on the Zip disk will be deleted. Do not use
any Zip disk containing song data that you need.
Copy ?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
1 6 . If the song holds a large amount of data, and can-
not be contained on a single Zip disk, the disk is
ejected , and the message “Please Insert Disk”
appears in the display. Insert the next disk and
press [YES]. At this time, be sure to write the disk
numbers on the labels so that you can keep track
of the order in which the disks were inserted into
the drive.
“SNG CpyMode=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate th e TIME/ VALUE d ial. H ere, select
“Archives.”
Cp y Mo d e
Select how the song will be copied.
Playable: Playable type.
Archives: Archives type.
1 0 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive
1 7 . When copying over multiple Zip disks, “Insert
Disk #” (# indicates the number in the order of
insertion) appears in the display. Insert each of
the disks once more in the proper order and press
[YES].
Arc.Fu n c (Arch ive s Fu n ctio n )
Select the Archive Type copy method.
Store: Saving to Zip Disks.
Extract: Loading from Zip Disks.
1 2 . Press [YES].
1 8 . When the Archives Store procedure is finished,
A message asking if you want to continue appears in
the display.
return to Play condition.
Lo a d in g Da ta Fro m Disk s (Ex tra ct)
1 3 . Press [YES].
In step 7, select “1 Song.” If two or more songs were
saved to the Zip disk, the names of the saved songs
will also be displayed. Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to
select the name of the song you wish to copy.
1 . Select the load (restore) destination drive (internal
hard disk) as the current drive.
2 . Insert a disk that was copied by Archives Store
into the Zip drive.
1 4 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
3 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G Song
Copy ?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
“SNG CpyMode=” appears in the display.
1 5 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
5 . Rotate th e TIME/ VALUE d ial. H ere, select
“Archives.”
1 6 . If you have selected “All” in step 3, the display
will ask “Init. IDE:0 OK?” This message is asking
you to confirm that you wish to initialize the load-
ing destination drive (the internal hard disk). If
you wish to initialize the drive and then load,
press [YES]. If you decide not to initialize, press
[NO].
Cp y Mo d e
Select how the song will be copied.
Playable: Playable type.
Archives: Archives type.
6 . Press PARAMETER [
“SNG ArcTarget=” appears in the display.
].
* If at this point you press [YES], all songs saved on the
internal hard disk will be lost. Normally you should press
[NO]. If the loading destination hard disk does not have
sufficient space, you should first make a backup copy of
the internal hard disk, and then press [YES].
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE d ial. If you w ish to
copy the current song, select “1 Song.” To copy all
songs from the current drive, select “All.”
1 7 . Execute the load. When copying over multiple
disks, “Insert Disk #” (# indicates the number in
the order of insertion) appears in the display.
Insert the next disk and press [YES].
8 . Press PARAMETER [
“SNG Arc.Drive=” appears in the display.
].
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE d ial. select the d isk
drive from which the data will be loaded. For this
operation, you will be able to select only remov-
able disk drives which are connected to the SCSI
connector. It is not possible to select the current
drive (the internal hard disk) as the copy destina-
tion drive. For example if you wish to copy from a
Zip disk, select “SC5:0.”
1 8 . When the Archive Extract procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
Ab o u t p o w e r-sa ve m o d e
If approximately thirty minutes pass without data
being written to or read from a disk, a Zip drive will
automatically stop rotation of the disk. This is referred
to as Auto Power Save mode (Sleep mode). This
function limits the power consumption and extends
the life of the disk. When you perform a read or write
operation on the disk, it will return to its normal state.
This will take two or three seconds.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
“SNG Arc.Func=” appears in the display.
].
1 1 . Rotate th e TIME/ VALUE d ial. H ere, select
“Extract.”
1 0 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Use w ith a CD-RW Drive
You can connect a CD-RW drive which is designated
by Roland, to the VS-880EX’s SCSI connector. This
chapter explains the procedures involved in creating
your own original audio CDs and in backing up song
data to CD-RW discs. Refer to the owner’s manual of
CD-RW drive as you proceed.
ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep your
d iscs clean u sing a com m ercially available CD
cleaner.
Using a soft, dry cloth, wipe the disc from the center
to the outer rim. Do not wipe the disc about the cen-
ter in a circular direction.
Do not apply record cleaners or sprays, benzene, or
Before You Use a CD-RW Drive
other solvents.
Avoid ben d in g or tw istin g d iscs, as th is can
adversely affect them to extent that data can no
longer be read from, nor written to them. Device
malfunction can be caused as well.
Ha n d lin g th e CD-RW Drive
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area
free from vibration. If the unit must be installed at
an angle, be sure the installation does not exceed
the permissible range: upward, 5°; downward, 5°.
Co n n e ctin g th e CD-RW Drive
Use the following procedure to connect the CD-RW
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been
moved to a location with a level of humidity that is
greatly different than its former location. Rapid
changes in the environment can cause condensation
to form inside the CD-RW drive, which will adverse-
ly affect the operation of the CD-RW drive and/ or
d am age CD-RW d iscs. When the u nit has been
moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new
environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
drive to the VS-880EX.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or
other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off
the power on all devices before making any connections.
* Once the connections have been completed, turn on power
to your various devices in the order specified. By turning
on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunc-
tion and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
Remove any disc from the loading tray before pow-
ering up or down.
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down
before switching on power. Even with the volume all the
way down, you may still hear some sound when the power
is switched on, but this is normal, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
When transporting the CD-RW drive, remove the
disc from the loading tray. Also, avoid having the
loading tray face downwards when carrying it.
Ha n d lin g CD-RW Discs
DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc (CD-R
disc on which song data has been backed
up) on a conventional audio CD player.
The resulting sound may be of a level
that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Dam age to sp eakers or other system
components may result.
Please observe the following when handling discs:
• Never touch the shiny underside (encoded sur-
face) the disc.
• Do not use or store discs in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject discs to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended
temperature range: 10 to 50° C (50 to 122° F).
0
Put the disc back into its case for storage.
Do not leave discs in the CD-RW drive for extended
periods.
Do not affix stickers, labels, or other such items to
the face of discs.
Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-
To Power Outlet
1 0 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
1 . Turn on the power of the CD-RW drive.
2 . Turn on the power of the VS-880EX.
Cre a tin g a Ma ste r Da ta
What is written to the CD-R disc is performance data
of the current song in two tracks (stereo tracks). This is
not the performance data that can be heard from the
output from the MASTER jacks or PHONES jack. Song
data that can be written to CD-R discs for the creation
of original audio CDs must satisfy the following con-
ditions. Check the disc you plan to use.
3 . Turn on the power of connected audio equipment.
4 . Raise the volume of the audio devices to appro-
priate levels.
* For details on connecting a CD-RW drive and on the
required settings, refer to “About SCSI” (appendices p.5).
Cre a tin g a n Au d io CD
Sa m p le ra te a n d re co rd in g m o d e
Only songs with a sample rate of 44.1 kHz can be
written to CD-R discs. Songs with sample rates other
than this cannot be written to CD-R discs. While any
recording mode may be used, for the higher-quality
original CDs, either MTP (Multi-Track Pro), MAS
(Mastering), or MT1 (Multi-Track 1) is recommended
(p. 40).
You can create your own audio CD by writing sound
data that from two specified tracks on the VS-880EX to
a CD-R disc.
The VS-880EX first creates a CD-R image data file on
its internal IDE hard disk, then writes that image data
to the CD-R disc. Thus, an internal IDE hard disk is
necessary for this procedure. Furthermore, internal
IDE hard disk must has a enough free space on the
hard disk for the creation of the image data file.
Mix in g
The content of adjustments made to mixer settings
during playback are not recorded to the CD-R disc.
* Regardless of partition settings, all free space on the inter-
nal hard disk may be accessed by the image data file. After
writing of the image data file to the CD-R disc is complet-
ed, it is automatically deleted.
For example, in a normal performance, even if you
control fade-ins and fade-outs with the master fader,
this is not reflected in what is written to CD-R disc;
rather, it ends up sounding as if the song is cutting in
and out. Adjust equalizer, level, pan, and other set-
tings during track bouncing.
* With the CD-RW disc, you can record the audio data and
create audio CDs. But it is impossible to play back this
audio data recorded in the CD-RW disc, with the common
CD players, even if the disc is finalized. (Please use CD-R
disc to play back with the common CD players. Audio
data in the CD-RW disc can be played back with “CD
Player Function” on VS series.) You can overwrite the
audio data in the CD-RW disc repeatedly. So it is conve-
nient for making a trial copy before you create final audio
CDs with the multiple CD-R discs.
Setting up Auto Mix beforehand can make the track
bouncing operation simpler (p. 142).
Effe cts
Effects that are operating during playback are not
recorded on CD-R discs. For example, in a normal per-
formance, even if you have reverb or delay applied to
the output of each track, this is not reflected in what is
written to CD-R disc; rather, it ends up sounding as if
no effect has been applied. Add effects during track
bouncing. (p. 61)
Ite m s N e ce ssa ry fo r Cre a tin g a n
Au d io CD
• VS-880EX (1)
Tra ck b o u n cin g
• CD-RW drive (designated by Roland) (1)
• Internal IDE hard disk (1)
Two V-tracks, one as the left track and one as the right,
can be written to a CD-R disc. Bounce the tracks of
song data that has not been mixed down to two-chan-
nel stereo tracks (p. 60). Designate these tracks as the
master tracks (V-track write sources) to be written to
the CD-R disc when writing is to be carried out.
• Blank CD-R (Compact Disc-Recordable) disc
• Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER
jacks, or stereo headphones
1 0 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
Ra n g e
8 . Press [SEL (CH EDIT)] for the track to be written
The two tracks designated by the VS-880EX for writ-
ing to the CD-R disc are written from the beginning of
the tracks (normally “00h00m00s00”) to the end (song
end). Thus, any blank space on the tracks before or
after the actual performance results in wasted space
on the CD-R disc. To avoid this, use Track Cut to
remove any unused portions on the tracks.
to the CD-R R track.
9 . The display appears as shown below. Check each
of the capacity.
Disk space occupied by a song when written to a disc (27MB)
Writing source tracks (left/right)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
00h00m00s00
Blank Space
Performance Data
Blank Space
dB
0
4
Before Track Cutting
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Performance Data
CD-R disc free space (790 MB)
After Track Cutting
Internal hard disk free space (468 MB)
Time
• “MEASURE” “BEAT” field:
Disk space required for the song being written to
the CD-R disc.
Writin g So n g s to CD-R Discs
• “SYNC MODE” “SCENE” field:
Free space on the internal IDE hard disk.
1 . Place a blank CD-R disc in the CD-RW drive.
• “REMAINING TIME” field:
Free space on the CD-R disc.
2 . Press [SONG] several times until “SNG CD-R
Write ?” appears in the display.
* If “the space required for the song being written to the
CD-R disc” exceeds the total of the “free space on the
internal IDE hard disk” and the “free space on the CD-R
disc,” you cannot write the song to the CD-R disc.
3 . Press [YES].
“-Scanning CD-R -” appears in the display. The VS-
880EX is checking the SCSI ID of the connected CD-
RW drive, and displays the next ID number for a set
time.
Disk sp a ce re q u ire d fo r th e so n g b e in g
w ritte n to th e CD-R d isc
Drive model number (Hardware Manufacturer)
SCSI ID (in the example, ID=2)
The disk space occupied by a song when written
to a CD-R disc may not be equivalent to the size
of the song itself (the space is indicated when
[SHIFT] + [SONG] are pressed). This is something
that varies with the number of tracks and record-
ing mode used. You can make a rough estimate of
the space required for a song when written to a
CD-R disc as shown below.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Size (bytes) = 44,100 (Hz) x 2 (stereo tracks) x 2
(bytes) x “song length” (in seconds)
4 . “SNG Write+Finalize?” appears in the display.
Press PARAMETER [ ].
“Write w/ o Fin.?” (Write without finalize?) appears in
the display.
* The used capacity of the song is displayed as 1 MB =
1,000,000 bytes. The displayed value is the approximate
standard value.
5 . Press [YES].
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
6 . Press [SEL (CH EDIT)] for the tracks to be written
“SNG CD-R Write Sure?” appears in the display.
to the CD-R L track.
7 . Press CURSOR [
].
1 0 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
1 1 . Press [YES].
“SNG CD Track No. OK?” is displayed.
Au d itio n in g (Te st Liste n in g ) So n g s
Writte n to CDs (CD Pla y e r Fu n ctio n )
1 2 . Press [YES].
“Obey Copyrights?” is displayed.
You cannot playback CD-RW discs or CD-R discs that
have just had written songs to them with regular com-
mercial CD players. To listen to songs that have been
just written to a disc in order to check them, carry out
the following operation.
1 3 . Carefully read the License Agreement (detailed
on the back cover of this manual); if you agree to
the terms, press [YES.] Writing to the CD-R disc
begins. If you do not agree to the terms, press
[NO]. The VS-880EX just returns to the condition
at Step 2.
* Other commercially-available CD software can also be
played using the CD player function.
* You can listen to the contents of the disc through the VS-
880EX’s MONITOR jacks or the PHONES jack.
You cannot output the contents through the CD-R drive’s
PHONES jack or AUDIO OUT jacks.
If “ N o t 4 4 .1 k So n g !” Ap p e a rs in th e
Disp la y
The sample rate is not 44.1 kHz, so the song can-
not be written to the CD-R disc. Press [ENTER
(YES)] to retu rn to Step 1. Please refer to
“Creating a New Song” (p. 40).
1 . Insert the CD-R disc or commercial CD software
onto the CD-RW drive.
2 . Press [SONG] until “SNG CD Player?” appears in
the display.
3 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
If “ Ple a se In se rt Disc!” Ap p e a rs in th e
Disp la y
This indicates that the CD-RW drive’s loading
tray is open, that there is no disc loaded, or that
the CD-RW drive is in some other way not ready
for use. Insert a CD-R disc, and press [YES].
4 . If you want to store the current song press [YES];
if not, press [NO].
“-Scanning CD-RW -” appears in the display. The VS-
880EX scans for the SCSI ID of the connected CD-RW
drive. When it finds it, the ID number is displayed for
a few moments. The CD-R disc information is then
displayed.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
Total number of songs on the disc (9)
Number of currently-playing song (1)
Play time
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
12
24
48
dB
0
4
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
12
24
48
Disc type (In the example, CD-R disc)
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 4 . After the write procedure has been carried out
normally, “Write Another?” appears in the dis-
play. When you w ant to w rite the sam e song
information to another CD-R disc, insert another
disc in the CD-RW drive and press [YES].
Repeat Steps 10–14. Press [NO] to return to the condi-
tion at Step 2.
If “ Ple a se In se rt Disc!” Ap p e a rs in th e
Disp la y
There is no disc in the CD-RW drive. Insert a com-
mercial software CD or a CD-R disc on which
recording has been completed, press [YES], and
try the operation once more.
1 1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
7 . Press [CANCEL].
If “ Bla n k Disc” Ap p e a rs in th e Disp la y
You are attempting to used the CD player func-
tion with a CD-R disc that has no performance
data written to it. Insert a commercial software
CD or a CD-R disc on which recording has been
completed, and try the operation once more.
This retu rns you to the statu s at Step 2. Pressing
[SONG] also returns you to Step 2.
Writin g Ad d itio n a l So n g s to th e Disc
To the extent that any remaining free space allows,
you can add songs to CD-R discs that have not yet
been finalized . Repeat the proced ure d escribed in
“Writing Songs to CD-R Discs” (p. 106).
5 . Only the following buttons, knobs, and faders
effect the sound. Try listening to the contents of
the disc.
Here you can insert approximately two seconds of
blank space between the new song and the song before
it. The track number is also recorded automatically.
[ZERO]:
Goes to the start of the first song.
[REW]:
Rapidly rewinds as long as the button
is held down.
Track Number
[FF]:
Rapidly advances as long as the but-
ton is held down.
Previous Song
Added Song
[STOP]:
[PLAY]:
Stops the CD.
Silent Portion (approx. 2 sec.)
Begins playing back from the present
location.
[PREVIOUS]: Returns to the previous song.
[NEXT]: Advances to the next song.
Arra n g in g a n d Writin g Mu ltip le So n g s
to Disc
MASTER Fader: Adjusts overall volume.
By sequencing a number of songs on one track, you
can arrange those songs and write them to a CD-R
disc. In this case, by presetting markers at the song
boundaries to function as track numbers, you can
write track numbers like those used in ordinary audio
CDs, using the CD-RW drive to write an audio CD. If
desired, then carry out the following procedure.
PHONES Knob: Adjusts headphone volume.
* Button, knob, and fader response may be slow, but this
does not indicate any malfunction. For example, expect to
wait about five seconds after pressing [PLAY] or [NEXT]
before you hear sound.
* Transport control buttons are used in controlling the CD
control. They are not controls for the VS-880EX’s songs.
Furthermore, the content of the CD currently listened to
cannot be recorded by the VS-880EX.
00h00m00s00
* When listening to discs that have not been finalized, the
last approximately 0.5 seconds of the song cannot be
played back. Finalizing makes this portion audible.
Song 1
Time
Before Marker Setting
00h00m00s00
Listening not possible
(approx. 0.5 sec.)
Marker 1
Marker 2
Marker 3
Listening possible
Song 2
After Marker Setting
Song 1
Song 3
Before Finalizing
Listening possible
Time
1 . While listening to the song, move the track num-
ber to the location in the song you want. If called
for, we recommend the use of the preview and
scrub functions (p. 140).
After Finalizing
6 . When you are finished listening to the material,
press [STOP].
1 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
2 . Hold down [SONG] and press [TAP].
Set a track number mark point at the present location
on the track.
3 . Pressing [PREVIOUS] while also pressing [SONG]
moves you to the previous track number marker.
Pressing [N EXT] w hile also pressing [SON G]
m oves you to the next track nu m ber m arker.
Please check the time at the track number.
A “+” (plus sign) appears at the end of the track num-
ber mark point.
4 . Store the song to the CD-R disc by following pro-
cedure as described in “Writing Songs to CD-R
Discs” (p. 109).
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
To De le te Tra ck N u m b e r Ma rk e rs
4
12
24
48
Delete markers used as track numbers the same
way you would regular markers (p. 39).
1 . Move to the marker you want to delete.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
2 . Hold down [CLEAR] and press [TAP].
* You cannot set markers for four seconds from the top of
songs (“00h00m00s00”).
Writin g th e So n g Da ta (Fin a lize )
* Due to audio CD standards, songs must be at least four
seconds long. Thus, if you try to set two markers as track
numbers within four seconds of each other, “Can’t Set
Marker” appears on the display, and the process cannot be
carried out. Reset the track number markers so there is an
interval greater than four seconds between them.
To make CD-R d iscs prepared w ith the VS-880EX
playable on ordinary CD players, write a TOC (Table
of Contents). This is referred to as Finalize. CD-R discs
that have undergone the finalize procedure can no
longer have additional material written to them.
* Audio CD standards allow up to 99 songs to be stored on
one disc. Furthermore, even if no track number marker is
set at the beginning of the song, it is still used for the
beginning of the first song. Thus, you can set up to 98
markers as track numbers.
Finalize (Appendices p. 123)
TOC (Appendices p. 125)
1 . Press [SONG] until “SNG CD-R Write?” appears
00h00m00s00
in the display.
M1
M2
M3
M97
M98
2 . Press [YES].
“-Scanning CD-R -” appears in the display. The VS-
880EX is checking the SCSI ID of the connected CD-
RW drive, and displays the next ID number for a set
time. “SNG Write+Finalize?” appears in the display.
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
Song 98 Song 99
Time
1 1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
3 . Press PARAMETER[
] until “SNG Finalize?”
Sa vin g So n g s to CD-RW
Discs (CD-R Ba ck u p )
appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
You can save song data stored on the VS-880EX’s hard
disk to CD-RW discs. This procedure is called backup.
Conversely, the process of loading backed up song
d ata onto the internal hard d isk is referred to as
recover. Besides all V-track performance data, backed
up data also includes Locator, Marker, and Scene set-
tings made in the songs.
“Finalize Sure?” appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
“Obey Copyrights?” is displayed.
6 . Carefully read the License Agreement (p. 39); if
you agree to the terms, press [YES.]
In CD-R backup, the song data is converted into a data
format specifically for saving. This means that it will
not be possible to directly play back the song data. If
you wish to play back song data copied in archive for-
mat, you will need to reload the backed up data into
the current drive using the appropriate procedure.
Furthermore, when copying a song that does not fit on
a single disc, it is copied onto multiple discs according
to the free space on the discs.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 . After “--- Complete ---” appears in the display, the
VS-880EX returns to conditions at Step 1. If you do
not agree to the terms of the license, press [NO].
The VS-880EX returns to conditions at Step 1
• It is impossible to save any additional song data to the
CD-RW discs or the CD-R discs that already have songs
backed up on them. When you back up onto the CD-RW
discs, existing contents should be totally erased before the
new contents are saved.
Arra n g in g a n d Writin g So n g s a n d
So n g Da ta
Now you can arrange the writing and finalization of
the song data as has been described thus far. Carry out
the procedure as follows.
• Song data backed up on CD-R discs cannot be rewritten.
Thus, this is an appropriate procedure for backing up
completed song data in its final form.
• Song data recorded onto Zip disks cannot be backed up
onto CD-R discs or CD-RW discs.
1 . Insert the CD-R disc into the CD-RW drive.
• Incorrectly conducting the backup procedure may result
in the loss of data. Roland Corporation assumes no liabili-
ty concerning such loss of data.
2 . Press [SONG] until “SNG CD-R Write?” appears
in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
• Roland does not warrant any copied data, regardless of
the performance or condition of the CD-R drive.
“-Scanning CD-R -” appears in the display. The VS-
880EX is checking the SCSI ID of the connected CD-
RW drive, and displays the next ID number for a set
time. “SNG Write+Finalize?” then appears in the dis-
play.
4 . Press [YES].
5 . Store the song to the CD-R disc by following pro-
cedure as described in “Writing Songs to CD-R
Discs” (p. 109).
1 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
Total number of songs in the current drive (3 songs)
Ite m s N e ce ssa ry fo r CD-R Ba ck u p
• VS-880EX (1)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
• CD-RW drive (1)
4
• Internal IDE hard disk (HDP88 series)
• CD-RW (Compact Disc-ReWritable) disc
12
------
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Sa vin g So n g s to CD-RW Discs
7 . Press [YES].
1 . Select the disk (internal IDE hard disk) containing
the source song you want to back up as the cur-
rent drive.
If a CD-RW Disc w h ich Co n ta in s Da ta is
Pla ce d
7 -1 . If a CD-RW d isc w hich contains d ata is
placed in the above step 2, “Finalized CD!”
or “Not Blank CD!” appears in the display.
2 . Place a CD-RW disc in the CD-RW drive.
3 . Press [SONG] several times until “CD-R Backup
?” appears in the display.
7 -2 . Press [Enter] and “CD-RW Erase?” appears.
4 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
7 -3 . Press [YES]. “CD-RW Erasing...” appears in
the display and all the contents in the CD-
RW disc is erased. If you do not wish to
erase th e d ata, p ress [N O], th en p lace
another CD-RW disc and press [YES].
5 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
7 -4 . Wh en erase is fin ish ed , “Con tin u e?”
appears in the display. Press [YES]. If you
do not wish to save the song data but only
wish to erase the contents in the CD-RW
disc, press [NO].
“CDR Bak=” appears in the display.
6 . Use the TIME/ VALUE d ial to select the song
(only one song or all songs on the current drive)
that you wish to save. To backup all songs from
the current drive, select “All.”
* It is impossible to save any additional song data to the
CD-RW discs or the CD-R discs that already have songs
backed up on them. When you back up onto the CD-RW
discs, existing contents should be totally erased before the
new contents are saved.
8 . If the song holds a large amount of data, and can-
not be contained on a single CD-RW disc, the disc
is ejected, and the message “Insert Disc #” (# indi-
cates th e n u m ber in th e ord er of in sertion )
appears in the display to check the total amount
of necessary discs. Insert the next CD-RW disc
and press [YES]. At this time, we recommend that
you write the disc numbers on the labels so that
you can keep track of the order in which the discs
were inserted into the drive.
Song Number
Song Name
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
9 . Wh en cop yin g over m u ltip le CD-RW d iscs,
“Insert Disc #” (# indicates the number in the
order of insertion) appears in the display. Insert
each of the discs once more in the proper order
and press [YES].
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Sample Rate
Recording Mode
1 0 . When the CD-R backup procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
1 1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Use with a CD-RW Drive
9 . If you wish to initialize the current drive and then
recover, press [YES]. If at this point you press
[YES], all songs saved on the internal hard disk
will be lost. If you decide not to initialize, press
[NO]. Normally you should press [NO].
Lo a d in g So n g s Fro m CD-RW Discs
1 . Select the disk (internal IDE hard disk) containing
the song you want to load as the current drive.
2 . Place the CD-R disc to which the song data has
1 0 . Execute the load. When over multiple discs, the
disc is ejected, “Insert Disc #” (# indicates the
number in the order of insertion) appears in the
display. Insert the next disc and press [YES].
been backed up in the CD-RW drive.
3 . Press [SONG] several times until “CD-R Recover
?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
1 1 . When the CD-R recover procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
5 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
Ho w to Era se th e Da ta in th e CD-RW
Disc
It is impossible to write audio data to the CD-R discs
in which the song data is saved. To write audio data to
the finalized CD-RW discs, erase the existing data as
follows.
“CDR Rcv=” appears in the display.
6 . Use the TIME/ VALUE d ial to select the song
(only one song or all songs on the CD-RW disc)
that you wish to load. To recover all songs from
the current drive, select “All.”
1 . Place the CD-RW disc which includes the data
you wish to erase in the CD-RW drive.
Song Number
Song Name
2 . Press [SONG] several times until “CD-R Backup?”
appears in the display.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
3 . Press [YES] and “STORE Current?” appears.
dB
0
4
4 . Press [YES] to save the current song, or [NO] if
not. If the current song is the demo song, press
[NO]. “CDR Bak=” appears in the display.
12
24
48
5 . Press [YES] and “Finalized CD!” or “Not Blank
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
CD!” appears.
Sample Rate
Recording Mode
6 . Press [EN TER (Yes)] an d “CD-RW Erase?”
appears.
Total number of songs backed up to CD-R (3 songs)
7 . Press [YES] and “CD-RW Erasing...” appears and
the contents in the CD-RW disc is erased.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
8 . “Continue?” appears and press [NO].
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 . Press [YES].
8 . If you selected “All” in step 6, the display will
indicate “INIT ***:* OK ?” (OK to initialize the
disk drive?). “***:*” is the ID number and parti-
tion number of the recover destination disk drive.
For example when recovering to partition 0 of the
internal hard disk drive, the display would indi-
cate “IDE:0.”
1 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Use w ith MIDI De vice s
This chapter describes the MIDI messages that can be
Usin g MTC
handled by the VS-880EX and the operations that the
VS-880EX can perform using MIDI messages.
This section explains how the VS-880EX can be syn-
chronized with a MIDI sequencer that implements
MTC (MIDI Time Code). When using MTC, you can
choose to have the VS-880EX be the master that con-
trols th e MIDI sequ en cer, or to h ave th e MIDI
sequencer be the master that controls the VS-880EX.
For more detailed information about MIDI, please
refer to “About MIDI” (Appendices p. 4).
Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith MIDI
Se q u e n ce rs
MTC Ty p e
The VS-880EX can be operated in synchronization
with a MIDI sequencer. Refer to the owner’s manual
for your sequencer in conjunction with this manual.
There are two main ways to accomplish synchroniza-
tion, one is method using MTC (MIDI time code)
and the other one is method using MIDI Clock, with
MIDI Clock further divided into two types, Sync Track
and Tempo Map, either if which can be selected. Use
the method that is appropriate for your situation.
The VS-880EX can work with the following types
of MTC. Check the specifications of the MIDI
devices that you are using, and select the appro-
priate type of MTC on the VS-880EX.
30: 30 frames per second non-drop format. This
is used by audio devices such as analog tape
recorders, and for NTSC format black and
white video.
29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format.
MTC (Appendices p. 124)
• Using MTC (MIDI time code) (p. 116)
• Using the sync track (p. 119)
• Using the tempo map (p. 121)
This is used for NTSC format color video.
29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This
is used for NTSC format broadcast color
video.
25: 25 fram es p er secon d . Th is is u sed for
SECAM or PAL format video, audio equip-
ment, and film.
Ite m s N e ce ssa ry fo r Sy n ch ro n iza tio n
• VS-880EX (1)
24: 24 frames per second. This is used for video,
audio devices, and film in the US.
• Internal IDE hard disk (HDP88 series)
• Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER
jack, or stereo headphones
• External MIDI sequencer or computer sequencer
software (such as Cakewalk Pro Audio)
• MIDI cables
Ma ste r a n d Sla ve
When synchronizing the VS-880EX w ith a MIDI
sequencer, the device that sends, or transmits MTC or
MIDI Clock and acts as the reference device is referred
to as the master. Conversely, the device that receives
the MTC or MIDI Clock signals from the controlling
device is called the slave.
When using MTC, you can choose whether to have the
MIDI sequencer be the master that controls the VS-
880EX, or to have the VS-880EX be the master that con-
trols the MIDI sequencer. In contrast, when you use
MIDI Clock, whereas you can synchronize a MIDI
sequencer from the VS-880EX (VS-880EX as master), it
will not be possible to synchronize the VS-880EX from
the sequencer (VS-880EX as slave).
1 1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
Sy n ch ro n iza tio n w ith th e VS-8 8 0 EX
a s th e Re fe re n ce (Ma ste r)
When you are having the VS-880EX act to control the
MIDI sequencer, use the following procedure.
Dro p Fra m e a n d N o n -Dro p Fra m e
There are two types of time code used by NTSC
format video cassette recorders, drop, in which
the time code is not continuous, and non-drop,
which features continuous time code. In drop,
which is used for NTSC color video format, the
first two frames of every minute are dropped,
except for those at ten-minute intervals.
1 . Connect the VS-880EX and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
00m59s
01m00s
... 25 26 27 28 29 00 01 02 03 04 05f ...
Drop Frame (29D)
00m59s
01m00s
... 25 26 27 28 29 02 03 04 05 06 07f ...
In most video and audio production, since for-
mats with continuous frames are easier to deal
with, non-drop is generally used. In contrast, in
situations such as in broadcast, where the time
code must match actual clock time, drop is used.
MIDI IN
MIDI Sequencer
(implements MTC)
Frame (Appendices p. 123)
NTSC Format (Appendices p. 124)
SECAM Format/PAL Format (Appendices p. 124)
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
PRM ?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID: MIDIThr=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIDI Th ru (MIDI Th ru Sw itch )
This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/ THRU con-
nector. For now, select “Out.”
Out: The connector transmits MIDI messages from
the VS-880EX. Select this when you want to
transmit metronome Note messages or mixer
parameter settings (control change messages or
exclusive messages).
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con-
nector will be retransmitted from the connector
without change.
1 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
6 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
1 . Connect the VS-880EX and the MIDI sequencer as
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
shown below.
7 . Press [YES].
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Gen.=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ge n . (Ge n e ra to r)
This selects the type of synchronization signal that will
be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. At this
point, select “MTC.”
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MTC:
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is
transmitted.
MIDI OUT
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track
is transmitted.
MIDI Sequencer
(implements MTC)
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS MTC Type=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MTC Ty p e
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
This selects the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D 25, 24). Select
the MTC that matches your MIDI sequencer.
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
1 2 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Return to Play condition.
“SYS Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 3 . Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate
according to the MIDI Clock messages received
from external devices, and set it so that it can play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on
the VS-880EX, the MIDI sequencer begins play-
back as well.
ErrLe ve l (Erro r Le ve l)
This sets the interval (0–10) for checking MTC recep-
tion when synchronizing the VS-880EX as MTC is
transmitted by an external MIDI device. When MTC is
not sent continuously, the VS-880EX checks the MTC
and cancels synchronization if there is an error. By set-
ting a longer interval under such circumstances, syn-
chronization can continue, even if there is a certain
degree of error.
Sy n ch ro n iza tio n w ith th e MIDI
Se q u e n ce r a s th e Re fe re n ce (Sla ve )
When the MIDI sequencer is used as the basis to con-
trol the VS-880EX, use the following procedure.
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS MTC Type=” appears in the display.
W h e n u sin g MIDI se q u e n ce r so ftw a re fo r
p e rso n a l co m p u te rs
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
When using MIDI sequencer software for person-
al computers, then depending on the hardware
specifications and the playing cond itions, the
MTC signal sent to the VS-880EX may be unstable.
As much as possible, try to synchronize using
the VS-880EX as the master.
MTC Ty p e
This selects the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D 25, 24). Select
the MTC that matches your MIDI sequencer.
1 1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
* With the VS-880EX, continuous playback from
“23h59m59s29f99” to “00h00m00s00f00” does not corre-
spond to (overnight mode). The song that crosses over
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
9 . Set your MIDI sequencer to send MTC.
“00h00m00s00f00”
momentarily
stops
at
1 0 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SYSTEM].
The “SYNC MODE” field of the display will show
“EXT,” indicating that the unit will now operate in
synchronization w ith MTC received from a MIDI
sequencer.
“23h59m59s29f99” then resumes playback.
Song
1 1 . Press [PLAY].
The PLAY indicator blinks green, indicating that the
VS-880EX is in MTC receive standby mode. When the
MIDI sequencer begins playback, then playback also
begins on the VS-880EX. During synchronization, the
PLAY indicator are lit.
00h00m00s00f
23h59m59s00
Time
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
1 2 . When you stop the MIDI sequencer, the VS-880EX
will also stop.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
].
The PLAY indicator blinks green.
4 . “TimeDispFmt=” appears in the display. Rotate
the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 3 . Press [STOP].
The PLAY indicator goes off.
Tim e Disp Fm t (Tim e Disp la y Fo rm a t)
1 4 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SYSTEM].
The “SYNC MODE” field of the display will show
“INT,” indicating that the unit will no longer operate
in synchronization.
Select one of the reference tim es (REL, ABS) that
appear in the display. For now, choose “ABS.”
REL: The starting time of the song is displayed as
“00h00m00s00f00.”
ABS: The time displayed includes the addition of the
Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith a n Ex te rn a l MIDI
De vice
offset time.
5 . Press PARAMETER [
].
When the VS-880EX is running under the control of
the MTC from an external MIDI device, you can syn-
chronize the song’s playback time and the MTC time.
This time is called the offset. For example, if the MTC
tim e is “01h00m 00s00f00,” and the song’s tim e is
“00h10m00s00f00,” the “offset” is as follows.
6 . “Ofs=” ap p ears in th e d isp lay. Rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial.
O fs (O ffse t)
When the VS-880EX is running under the control of
the MTC from an external MIDI device, you can syn-
chronize the song’s playback time and the MTC time.
The offset settings range varies depending on the MTC
type selected for the current song.
(Offset)
= (MTC time) - (destined time of the song)
= (01h00m00s00f00) - (00h10m00s00f00)
= (00h50m00s00f00)
7 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
If the offset valu e tu rns ou t to be negative, ad d
“24h00m00s00f00” to the MTC time before subtracting
the destined time of the song. For example, if the MTC
time transmitted is 00h00m50s00f00,” and you want
the song to play back at “00h01m00s00f00,” then the
offset works out as shown below.
Usin g th e Sy n c Tra ck (Ma ste r)
If you r MIDI sequ en cer su p p orts Son g Position
Pointer messages, you can use the MIDI Clock to syn-
chronize operations. There are two methods of syn-
chronization using the MIDI Clock: one is using the
sync track, and the other one is using the tempo map.
Here is an explanation of how to control the MIDI
sequencer from the VS-880EX using the sync track.
(Offset)
= (MTC time) - (destined time of the song)
= (00h00m50s00f00) - (00h01m00s00f00)
= ((24h00m00s00f00) + (00h00m50s00f00)) -
(00h01m00s00f00)
= (23h59m50s00f00)
1 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
W h a t is th e Sy n c Tra ck ?
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
In addition to the tracks for recording audio signals,
the VS-880EX has a separate track for recording MIDI
Clock signals. This is called the sync track. Unlike
conventional multi-track recorders, it is not necessary
to reserve one of the audio tracks for recording the
sync signal.
3 . Press [YES].
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS SYN: Sync Tr. Rec?” appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
“Wait for Start” appears in the display, and the sync
track is ready for record MIDI clock data.
To use the sync track, first the MIDI clock of the MIDI
song data to which you want to synchronize must first
be recorded onto the sync track. Then, transmit the
recorded MIDI clock data to the MIDI sequencer to
synchronize the MIDI song data. This is a convenient
method to use when the MIDI song data has been cre-
ated earlier than the VS-880EX song.
6 . Start playback of the MIDI song data.
The MIDI clock data is recorded on the sync track.
While MIDI clock data is being recorded onto the sync
track, the input sources can be monitored, but audio
tracks cannot be recorded or played back.
In particular, when synchronizing to MIDI song data
in which the tempo gradually increases or decreases,
using the tempo map allows more precise following of
tempo changes, compared to the tempo map in which
tempo is set for each measure.
7 . When the MIDI song d ata is finished playing
back, the VS-880EX automatically stops recording
MIDI clock data. Return to Play condition.
Sy n ch ro n ize d O p e ra tio n
Re co rd in g MIDI Clo ck Me ssa g e s
1 . Connect the VS-880EX and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
1 . Connect the VS-880EX and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
MIDI Sequencer
1 2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
Usin g th e Te m p o Ma p (Ma ste r)
PRM ?” appears in the display.
If you r MIDI sequ en cer su p p orts Son g Position
Pointer messages, you can use the MIDI Clock to syn-
chronize operations. There are two methods of syn-
chronization using the MIDI Clock: one is using the
sync track, and the other one is using the tempo map.
This section gives an explanation of how to control the
MIDI sequencer from the VS-880EX using the tempo
map.
3 . Press [YES].
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID: MIDIThr=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIDI Th ru (MIDI Th ru Sw itch )
This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/ THRU con-
nector. For now, select “Out.”
W h a t is a Te m p o Ma p ?
Out: The connector transmits MIDI messages from
the VS-880EX. Select this when you want to
transmit metronome Note messages or mixer
parameter settings (control change messages or
exclusive messages).
A tempo map is a song’s measure, beat, and tempo
information. Transmitting this information to MIDI
sequencers and other devices, it can be used in syn-
chronizing operations with external MIDI devices. The
tempo map sets tempo changes for each measure, so
you can record information specifying changes in
rhythm and tempo to be played from any designated
measure. With the VS-880EX, tempo maps are num-
bered sequentially from the beginning of the song,
with Tempo Map 1 first, followed by Tempo Map 2,
Tempo Map 3, and so on. Tempo Map 1 is already
specified at the beginning of the song, and determines
the initial tempo of the song. To change the tempo at a
subsequent measure, create a new tempo map at each
location where you want the tempo to change. Up to
50 tempo maps can be created.
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con-
nector will be retransmitted from the connector
without change.
6 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
7 . Press [YES].
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Gen.=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ge n . (Ge n e ra to r)
Example 1: Song with no tempo changes
Tempo Map 1 (120 BPM)
This selects the type of synchronization signal that will
be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. At this
point, select “SyncTr.”
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
Example 2: Song with tempo changes occurring during the song
MTC:
Tempo Map 1
(120 BPM)
Tempo Map 2
(117 BPM)
Tempo Map 3
(108 PBM)
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is
transmitted.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track
Time
is transmitted.
1 0 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Cre a tin g a Te m p o Ma p
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
1 1 . Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate
according to the MIDI Clock messages received
from external devices, and set it so that it can play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on
the VS-880EX, the MIDI sequencer begins play-
back as well.
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Syn: Tmap1=” appears in the display.
1 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
4 . Tempo Map 1 (the song’s initial tempo) is dis-
played. The measure appearing in the display and
its beat, metronome sound, and MIDI Clock trans-
mitted from the VS-880EX follow the tempo map
settings. The following example indicates that a
tempo map with time signature of 4/ 4 and quar-
ter note=120 begins at measure 1.
1 4 . Repeat steps 4–13 to specify the tempo map. By
rotating the TIME/ VALUE dial counterclockwise
in step 12, you can modify a previously-specified
tempo/ starting measure/ time signature.
Lim ita tio n s o n ch a n g in g th e sta rtin g m e a -
su re
Tempo maps are numbered from the beginning of
the song as tempo map 1, tempo map 2, tempo
map 3, etc. This means that it is not possible to
modify the starting measure of a tempo map to
make it earlier than the starting measure of the
previous tempo map, or later than the starting
measure of the following tempo map. For exam-
ple if tempo map 2 has a starting measure of “8”
and tempo map 4 has a starting measure of “16,”
the starting measure of tempo map 3 can be modi-
fied only in the range of “9–15.”
Begining Measure
Beat
Tempo Map Number
Tempo
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
5 . Press CURSOR [
].
The cursor will move to the tempo display.
1 5 . When you are finished making tempo map set-
tings, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
6 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Return to Play condition.
(Te m p o )
Sets the tempo map tempo (25.0–250.0).
Sy n ch ro n ize d O p e ra tio n
7 . Press CURSOR [
].
The cursor will move to the measure display (“MEA-
SURE” field).
1 . Connect the VS-880EX and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Me a su re (Me a su re )
Selects the beginning measure (1–999) for each tempo
map.
* Tempo Map 1 is the song’s initial tempo. You cannot be
changed or deleted the beginning measure setting of “1.”
9 . Press CURSOR [
].
The cursor will move to the time signature display
(“BEAT” field).
1 0 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Be a t
This sets the tempo map time signature (1/ 1–8/ 1,
1/ 2–8/ 2, 1/ 4–8/ 4, 1/ 8–8/ 8).
MIDI IN
1 1 . If you wish to change the tempo during the song,
press CURSOR [
].
The cursor will move to the tempo map number dis-
play.
1 2 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial clockwise.
“<New>” appears in the display.
MIDI Sequencer
1 3 . Press [YES].
1 2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
Va rio u s O p e ra tio n s Re la te d to
PRM ?” appears in the display.
Sy n ch ro n ize d O p e ra tio n
3 . Press [YES].
There may be times when you want to use MIDI Clock
to synchronize with an external MIDI sequencer or
oth er d evice, even w ith ou t record in g u sin g th e
metronome. In such instances, to synchronize with the
tempo of the recorded song, first set a Marker. You can
then create a sync track or tempo map beginning at
that Marker.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID: MIDIThr=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIDI Th ru (MIDI Th ru Sw itch )
This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/ THRU con-
nector. For now, select “Out.”
Se ttin g Ma rk e rs Alo n g w ith th e Te m p o
Out: The connector transmits MIDI messages from
the VS-880EX. Select this when you want to
transmit metronome Note messages or mixer
parameter settings (control change messages or
exclusive messages).
1 . Press [ZERO].
2 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
3 . While listening to the song, press [TAP] at the
downbeat at the each beat.
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con-
nector will be retransmitted from the connector
without change.
4 . When you have finished setting the Markers,
press [STOP].
* To correctly place Markers on the downbeats of other
song, we recommend using the Preview and Scrub func-
tions.
6 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
7 . Press [YES].
Cre a tin g a Sy n c Tra ck fro m th e
Ma rk e r
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Gen.=” appears in the display.
A sync track can be generated from markers that were
assigned accord ing to the tem p o of a p reviou sly
recorded performance. This is convenient when you
have already recorded a performance of an acoustic
instrument such as guitar or vocal, and now you wish
to synchronize a MIDI sequencer etc. to the recording.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ge n . (Ge n e ra to r)
This selects the type of synchronization signal that will
be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. At this
point, select “MIDIClk.”
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
Sync/ Tempo?” appears in the display.
MTC:
2 . Press [YES].
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
transmitted.
“SYS MIDI PRM ?” appears in the display.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track
4 . Press [YES].
is transmitted.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 0 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
CV (Co n ve rt)
Return to Play condition.
Here you can select how the sync track / tempo map
will be created. For this example, select “CV1.”
1 1 . Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate
according to the MIDI Clock messages received
from external devices, and set it so that it can play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on
the VS-880EX, the MIDI sequencer begins play-
back as well.
CV1=Tap→S.Tr:
Create the sync track from mark
points.
CV2=Tap→T.Map: Create the tempo map from mark
points.
CV3=S.Tr→T.Map: Create the tempo map from the
sync track.
CV4=Time→S.Tr: Au tom atically create the sync
track.
1 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
CV3=S.Tr→T.Map: Create the tempo map from the
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
sync track.
“SYS CV:Beat=” appears in the display.
CV4=Time→S.Tr: Au tom atically create the sync
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
track.
Be a t
6 . Press PARAMETER [
“SYS CV:Beat=” appears in the display.
].
Sp ecify th e n u m ber of beat (1/ 1–8/ 1, 1/ 2–8/ 2,
1/ 4–8/ 4, 1/ 8–8/ 8) in one measure.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS CV:Tap Beat=” appears in the display.
Be a t
Sp ecify th e n u m ber of beat (1/ 1–8/ 1, 1/ 2–8/ 2,
1/ 4–8/ 4, 1/ 8–8/ 8) in one measure.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ta p Be a t
8 . Press PARAMETER [
“SYS CV:Tap Beat=” appears in the display.
].
Specify the number of marks (1–8) in each measure.
1 0 . Press [YES].
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 1 . A confirmation message asking if you want to
save the changes to the sync track appears in the
display. If you want to save the changes, press
[YES]. If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
Ta p Be a t
Specify the number of marks (1–8) in each measure.
1 0 . Press [YES].
1 2 . Wh en th e syn c track h as been com p leted ,
1 1 . A confirmation message asking if you want to
save the changes to the tempo map appears in the
display. If you want to save the changes, press
[YES]. If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
“--- Complete ---” appears in the display.
1 3 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 2 . Wh en th e tem p o m ap h as been com p leted ,
Cre a tin g a Sy n c Tra ck fro m th e
Ma rk e r
“--- Complete ---” appears in the display.
1 3 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
A sync track can be generated from markers that were
assigned accord ing to the tem p o of a p reviou sly
recorded performance. This is convenient when you
have already recorded a performance of an acoustic
instrument such as guitar or vocal, and now you wish
to synchronize a MIDI sequencer etc. to the recording.
Return to Play condition.
Cre a tin g a Te m p o Ma p fro m a Sy n c
Tra ck
You can create a tempo map from sync track stored in
the VS-880EX. This is convenient when you want to
change a sync track’s MIDI Clock with the VS-880EX.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo?” appears in the display.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Sync.Tr Cnv?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
4 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“YS Sync.Tr Cnv?” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
4 . Press [YES].
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
CV (Co n ve rt)
Here you can select how the sync track / tempo map
will be created. For this example, select “CV2.”
CV1=Tap→S.Tr:
Create the sync track from mark
points.
CV2=Tap→T.Map: Create the tempo map from mark
points.
1 2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
CV (Co n ve rt)
CV (Co n ve rt)
Here you can select how the sync track / tempo map
will be created. For this example, select “CV3.”
Here you can select how the sync track / tempo map
will be created. For this example, select “CV4.”
CV1=Tap→S.Tr:
Create the sync track from mark
points.
CV1=Tap→S.Tr:
Create the sync track from mark
points.
CV2=Tap→T.Map: Create the tempo map from mark
CV2=Tap→T.Map: Create the tempo map from mark
points.
points.
CV3=S.Tr→T.Map: Create the tempo map from the
CV3=S.Tr→T.Map: Create the tempo map from the
sync track.
sync track.
CV4=Time→S.Tr: Au tom atically create the sync
CV4=Time→S.Tr: Au tom atically create the sync
track.
track.
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Sync Trk Beat=” appears in the display.
“Start Time=” appears in the display.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Sta rt Tim e
Specify the song start time.
Sy n c Trk Be a t (Sy n c Tra ck Be a t)
Sp ecify the nu m ber of beats (1/ 1–8/ 1, 1/ 2–8/ 2,
1/ 4–8/ 4, 1/ 8–8/ 8) per measure in the MIDI clock that
is recorded in the sync track.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
“End Time=” appears in the display.
].
8 . Press [YES].
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
9 . A confirmation message asking if you want to
save the changes to the tempo map appears in the
display. If you want to save the changes, press
[YES]. If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
En d Tim e
Specify the song end time.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Measure=” appears in the display.
1 0 . Wh en th e tem p o m ap h as been com p leted ,
“--- Complete ---” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 1 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Me a su re
Specify the number of measures (1–999) within a spec-
ified time.
Cre a tin g a Sy n c Tra ck Au to m a tica lly
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
You can automatically create a sync track by specify-
ing the start and end times of the song, and the num-
ber of measures that it contains. This is convenient
when you already know the length of the song, such
as with commercials.
“Beat=” appears in the display.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Be a t
Sp ecify th e n u m ber of beat (1/ 1–8/ 1, 1/ 2–8/ 2,
1/ 4–8/ 4, 1/ 8–8/ 8) in one measure.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo?” appears in the display.
1 4 . Press [YES].
2 . Press [YES].
1 5 . A confirmation message asking if you want to
save the changes to the sync track appears in the
display. If you want to save the changes, press
[YES]. If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Sync.Tr Cnv?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 6 . Wh en th e syn c track h as been com p leted ,
“--- Complete ---” appears in the display.
1 7 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
De la y in g Sy n c Tra ck a n d Te m p o Ma p
Sta rt Tim e s
Use w ith a MIDI Co n tro lle r
The VS-880EX can transmit its mixer settings and
functions as MIDI messages. Conversely, MIDI mes-
sages from an external MIDI controller can be used to
control the VS-880EX’s track status and mixer settings.
Usually, a sync track or tempo map is created with
“00h00m 00s00f00” as the beginning of the song.
How ever, record ing usually d oesn’t actually start
from “00h00m00s00f00.” In this kind of situation, you
can determine how much later recording begins after
the start of the song. This time is referred to as offset.
For example, if you want recording to begin ten sec-
onds after the start of the song (with time to spare), set
the offset time to “00h00m10s00f00.”
Sw itch in g Tra ck Sta tu s
Switching Track Status
You can use MIDI control change messages to switch
the status of each track (track status). MIDI channels
1–8 correspond to Tracks 1–8 respectively. Use con-
troller number 29 to switch the track status.
* During recording or playback, when the beginning of a
sync track or tempo map is reached, the start message is
sent from the MIDI OUT connector. This is convenient
when you wish to synchronize operation with an external
MIDI sequencer.
Depending on the value of controller number 3, the
track status changes as shown below.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo?” appears in the display.
W h e n sto p p e d
VALUE 0–31
32–63
64–95
96–127
2 . Press [YES].
STATUS MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
MUTE
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
→OFF
→PLAY →REC
→SOURCE
“SYS Ofs=” appears in the display.
PLAY
PLAY PLAY
PLAY
→SOURCE
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
→MUTE →PLAY →REC
REC REC REC
→MUTE →PLAY →REC
O fs (O ffse t)
REC
→SOURCE
Specify the time at which the sync track/ tempo map
will begin.
SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE
→MUTE →PLAY →REC
→SOURCE
Usin g [N UMERICS]
[NUMERICS] allows you to use the ten LOCA-
TOR buttons as numeric keys to input numbers
directly. Refer to “Directly Inputting Numeric
Characters” (p. 153).
Du rin g p la y b a ck o r re co rd in g
VALUE 0–31
32–63
64–95
96–127
– (*1)
STATUS – (*1)
MUTE
– (*1)
→PLAY
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
PLAY
PLAY
→MUTE →PLAY
– (*1)
– (*1)
– (*1) – (*1)
REC
REC
→REC
→SOURCE
(*2)
SOURCE – (*1)
SOURCE SOURCE
→MUTE
→REC (*2) →SOURCE
(*1) Ignored.
(*2) Cannot be sw itched w hile record ing. Also,
“SOURCE” here indicates “the status in which
the track indicator blinks alternately red and
oran ge,” an d is valid on ly w h en Record
Monitor is set to “AUTO” (p. 168).
1 2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices
P.C.Eff (Pro g ra m Ch a n g e Effe ct)
Sw itch in g Sce n e s
You can switch Scenes with MIDI Program Change
messages sent by the external MIDI controller.
With this set to “On,” the effect is switched when pro-
gram change messages are received. For now, select
“On.”
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Du rin g Pla y b a ck o f a So n g
Scenes cannot be switched during playback of a
song. Because of this, the VS-880EX stops momen-
tarily if it receives a program change message
during playback instructing it to change scenes.
While it is stopped, the scene is switched, and
then playback resumes.
Use MIDI channel 1 to switch effect 1, and MIDI chan-
nel 2 to switch effect 2. The relationship between the
bank number received by the VS-880EX and the Effect
Patch Number it switches to is shown below.
Bank No.MSB Bank No.LSB Program No.
Patch No.
Furthermore, during recording, only effect pro-
gram change messages can be received. Scenes
cannot be switched during recording.
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
0–99
0–99
0–99
0–99
Preset A00–A99
Preset B00–B99
User U00–U99
Prset C00–C09
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
* For more detailed information, please refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 74).
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Ad ju stin g Effe cts
“SYS MID:P.C.Scne=” appears in the display.
You can use MIDI control change messages transmit-
ted from an external MIDI controller to control effects.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
P.C.Sce n e (Pro g ra m Ch a n g e Sce n e )
With this set to “On,” the scene is changed when pro-
gram change messages are received. For now, select
“On.”
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
“SYS MID:C.C.Eff=” appears in the display.
Return to Play condition.
Use MIDI channel 15 for switching scenes. The rela-
tion sh ip betw een th e p rogram ch an ge n u m ber
received by the VS-880EX and the Scene Number it
switches to is shown below.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
C.C.Eff (Co n tro l Ch a n g e Effe ct)
With this set to “On,” the effect is adjusted when con-
trol change messages are received. For now, select
“On.”
Program Number
1–8
Scene Number
1–8
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* For more detailed information, please refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 74).
* If you wish to use control change messages to switch
effects, use NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Numbers).
For more detailed information, please refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 74).
Sw itch in g Effe cts
You can use MIDI control change messages transmit-
ted from an external MIDI controller to switch effects.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID:P.C.Eff=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 0 Use w ith a DAT Re co rd e r (DAT Ba ck u p )
This chapter explains the procedures for using a DAT
Ite m s N e ce ssa ry fo r DAT
recorder in conjunction with the VS-880EX. Refer to
the owner’s manual for your DAT recorder as you
read this manual.
Ba ck u p
• VS-880EX (1)
• Internal IDE hard disk (HDP88 series)
Be fo re Ba ck in g Up w ith DAT
• DAT recorder (1)
With a DAT recorder connected to the VS-880EX’s
DIGITAL OUT connector (coaxial or optical), song
• DAT tape (as many as needed)
data created on the VS-880EX can be saved using a
DAT recorder. This procedure is referred to as backup.
Conversely, the procedure of loading the previously
backed up song data into the VS-880EX is referred to
as recover. The song data that is backed up includes
the data of all V-tracks, and song settings such as
locate points, mark points, and scene settings. You
should make backups of your data as a precaution
against unforeseen problems, or when your disk drive
is full and no more recording is possible. Furthermore,
since DAT tapes are easily transported, this is conve-
nient when you wish to exchange song data with a
friend who also has a VS-880EX, or when you have a
VS-880EX both at home and in the studio. We recom-
mend that important data be backed up onto multiple
tapes.
• Digital connection cables (coaxial or optical)
Ab o u t th e De vice s Use d in DAT
Ba ck u p
DAT re co rd e r:
You can use a conventional DAT recorder.
Oth er d igital record in g d evices, in clu d in g MD
recorders or DCC recorders, cannot be used to back up
data. Furthermore, you cannot back up data if you are
using a DAT record er, for exam ple one featuring
external digital signal processing, whose playback
data differs from the data as it was recorded.
* Portable DAT recorders may require a special adapter
when connecting to the VS-880EX. Please check the
owner’s manual for your DAT recorder, or consult your
dealer or service center to see what your model may
require.
DAT (Appendices p. 123)
* Incorrectly conducting the DAT Backup procedure may
result in loss of data. Roland Corporation assumes no lia-
bility concerning such loss of data. Furthermore, Roland
does not warrant any copied data, regardless of the perfor-
mance or condition of the DAT recorder.
Ta p e :
You can use a conventional DAT tapes.
However, 180-minutes tapes are very thin, and may
easily stretch or become tangled in the recorder. Avoid
using 180-minutes tapes.
Ba ck in g Up So n g Da ta w ith a CD-R Drive
o r Zip Drive
You can use a CD-R drive or Zip drive to back up
song data from the VS-880EX. Song data backed
up onto a CD-R disc cannot be overwritten. Thus,
this method is appropriate for backing up com-
pletely finished songs or other such data. Song
data backed up on Zip disks can be overwritten
any number of times, but considering the time
required for saving data, and because of reliability
issues, it is more convenient to back up data using
a Zip drive. Roland recommends backing up data
(Song Copy) with a Zip drive.
When you need more than one tape to do the backup,
prepare whatever number of tapes you need, making
sure that all of the tapes feature the same recording
time. It is recommended that you write the numbers of
the tap es to ind icate the ord er in w hich they are
backed up.
Au d io e q u ip m e n t:
During DAT backups, no sound is output from the
VS-880EX analog output jacks.
Additionally, turn down the volume of any connected
audio devices at minimum level while song data is
being backed u p . The song d ata sent to the DAT
record er from the VS-880EX is a particular signal
recorded on the disk. Monitoring this with the DAT
recorder’s volume raised may result in damage to
your speakers, and may adversely affect your hearing.
1 2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
2 . Set the DAT recorder so that it is able to record
Sa vin g So n g Da ta to a DAT
Re co rd e r (Ba ck u p )
digital signals.
* Normally, the sample rate at which song data is transmit-
ted is set at 48 kHz. This sample rate has no relation to
the sample rate of the song data. If your DAT recorded
requires you to set the sample rate, set it to 48 kHz.
Use the following procedure to back up the song data
on the current drive.
1 . Connect the VS-880EX and the DAT recorder as
3 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G DAT
shown below.
Backup ?” appears in the display.
Optical
4 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
5 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
6 . “SN G Bak=” ap p ears in the d isp lay. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the song that you
wish to save. To save all songs from the current
drive, select “All.”
Song Number
Song Name
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
Digtal In
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Sample Rate
Recording Mode
DAT Recorder
Coaxial
Total number of songs in the current drive (3 songs)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Tape Len=” appears in the display.
8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ta p e Le n (Ta p e Le n g th )
Specify the interval at which backup will be paused.
Set this so that the interval is no less than about five
minutes shorter than the length of tape on which you
are recording. When using tapes with different record-
ing times, set this to the recording time of the shortest
tape.
Digital In
DAT Recorder
1 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
1 8 . Put the DAT record er in record stand by, and
press [YES] once more.
9 . Press PARAMETER [
“Backup Wait=” appears in the display.
].
Backup will begin.
1 0 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
* If you wish to cancel the backup, then press [CANCEL
(NO)]. This cancels the process, even if done during the
backup itself. However, the song data recorded up to that
point cannot be loaded into the VS-880EX.
Ba ck u p W a it
When this is set to “On,” the data transmission speed
will be slower. Turn this on when using a disk drive
(such as a Zip drive) whose data read/ write speed is
slower. When this is set to “On,” although it takes
longer for the backup to finish, problems arising from
the data transfer (such as data loss) are minimized.
Normally, this is set to “Off.”
1 9 . If you cannot back up everything on one tape, the
operation is carried out for the length of time des-
ignated in “Tape Len.” Insert the next tape into
the DAT record er and again p u t it in record
standby, then press [YES].
The backup procedure continues in this fashion. At
this time, we recommend that you write the tape num-
bers on the labels in the order they are backed up.
1 1 . Press PARAMETER [
“Sample Rate=” appears in the display.
].
1 2 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 0 . When the backup procedure is finished, “Please
Stop DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT
recorded and press [YES].
Sa m p le Ra te
This sets the sample rate (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz) during
DAT backup. This sample rate has no relation to the
sample rate of the song data. Normally, this is set to 48
kHz.
2 1 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* To check whether or not a backup has been performed cor-
rectly, we recommend that you carry out the Verify proce-
dure (p. 134).
1 3 . The approximate time it will take and the number
of tapes needed to back up the data are indicated
in the display. Please prepare the necessary num-
ber of tapes.
Disk Ca p a city N e e d e d fo r Ba ck u p
Required time (47 minutes 34 seconds)
Sample Rate
One 60-minutes tape can back up approximately
330 MB of song data. For example, you need four
60-minutes (or two 120-minutes) tapes to back up
1000 MB of song data. However, the disk space
available for each song decreases as the number of
songs save increases. Look at the display to see
the number of tapes needed to do the backup.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Required number of tapes (1 tape)
Tim e N e e d e d fo r Ba ck u p
It takes about 60 minutes to back up 330 MB of
song data. For example, backing up 1000 MB of
data takes about 190 minutes. However, the high-
er the number of songs backed up, the longer it
takes.
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
“D.Out Sel=” appears in the display.
].
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
D.O UT Se l (Dig ita l O u t Se le ct)
Select either “DIGOUT1” (coaxial) or “DIGOUT2”
(optical) if you are going to back up data using the
DIGITAL OUT connector.
1 6 . Press [YES].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
1 7 . Press [YES].
“Please Rec DAT” appears in the display.
1 3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Coaxial
Lo a d in g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
fro m a DAT Re co rd e r
(Re co ve r)
Use the following procedure to load song data that
was backed up on a DAT recorder. If two or more
songs were saved together during the backup, the data
of all songs will be loaded.
* You can recover VS-880 song data backed up using DAT
backup. For more detailed information, please see
“Compatibility” (p. 136).
1 . Connect the DAT recorder to the VS-880EX as fol-
lowing.
Optical
Digital Out
DAT Recorder
2 . Insert the tape which contains the song data into
the DAT recorder. If the song data is backed up
on two or more tapes, insert the first tape.
3 . Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning
of the song data.
4 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G DAT
Recover?” appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
Digtal Out
6 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
DAT Recorder
7 . “D.IN Sel =” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
D.IN Se l (Dig ita l In Se le ct)
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical)
if you are going to recover data using the VS-880EX’s
DIGITAL IN connector.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Recover Ready?” appears in the display.
9 . Press [YES].
1 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
1 0 . The display will indicate “Init ***:* OK ?” (OK to
W h e n Ca n ce lin g th e Re co ve r
initialize the current drive?). “***:*” will show
“IDE:*” for th e in tern al h ard d isk, or
“SC0:*–SC7:*” for an external drive (the number is
the SCSI ID number). The number following the
d isk d rive nam e is the p artition nu m ber. For
example when recovering to partition 0 of the
internal hard d isk, the d isp lay w ill ind icate
“IDE:0.”
O p e ra tio n
You can stop the recover operation by pressing [EXIT
(NO)] during the recover. Moreover, when there is an
error in song data backed up on a tape, the recover
operation is temporarily halted. In such instances, you
can choose whether to leave or delete the (unfinished)
song data recovered up to that point.
1 1 . If you wish to initialize the current drive and then
recover, press [YES]. If at this point you press
[YES], all songs saved on the internal hard disk
will be lost. If you decide not to initialize, press
[NO].
* This procedure does not correct the disk error, but
tries to restore the song data while keeping as much possi-
ble of the non-error data. Depending on the location in
which the error occurred, some noises may generated or
settings for mixer, tempo map and sync track may be lost.
1 2 . “Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
Put the DAT recorder in play mode.
* Loud noises may damage your audio equipment such as
amplifier and speakers. Please make sure to turn down the
headphones level and master volume of the VS-880EX
when you check errors in the song data.
1 3 . Load the data. If you have backed up the data to
multiple tapes, then the operation is suspended
when the end of each tape is reached. Insert the
number tape indicated in the display, press [YES],
and start the DAT recorder playing again.
Ca n ce lin g a DAT Re co ve ry O p e ra tio n
in Pro g re ss
1 4 . When the recover procedure is finished, “Please
Stop DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT
recorder, then press [YES].
1 . Press [EXIT (NO)] during the DAT recovery.
Recovery is stopped, and “Delete Err Song?” (Delete
the song containing the error?) appears in the display.
1 5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2 . If you would like to delete from the hard disk the
song data that stopped the recovery operation,
press [YES]. If you would like to keep it as it is
though the recovery is not completed, press [NO].
W h e n a n Erro r is Fo u n d in th e So n g
Da ta
1 . If an error is found in the song data which was
recovered w ith the DAT recovery op eration,
“Recover Err Retry?”(An error was found. Retry
the song?) appears in the display.
2 . If you want to try to recover the data, press [YES].
If you want to cancel the recovery, press [NO].
3 . If you press [NO] in Step 2, “Delete Err Song?”
then appears in the display.
4 . If you would like to delete the song data with the
error from the hard d isk, p ress [YES]. If you
would like to keep it as it is though the error is
included, press [NO].
1 3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Coaxial
Ch e ck in g N a m e s o f Sa ve d
Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta (N a m e )
This operation lets you check the names of song data
that was saved to a DAT tape. Even if you have saved
the data of two or more songs in a single backup oper-
ation, you can check the name of each song.
This operation also allows you to load selected song
data into the VS-880EX. When the recover operation is
used, the data for all songs which were saved together
by the backup operation are loaded. In contrast, with
the Name procedure, only the song data that you spec-
ify is loaded.
1 . Connect the DAT recorder to the VS-880EX as fol-
lowing.
Digital Out
Optical
DAT Recorder
2 . Insert the tape which contains the song data into
the DAT recorder. If the song data is backed up
on two or more tapes, insert the first tape.
3 . Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning
of the song data.
4 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G DAT
Recover?” appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
Digtal Out
6 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
7 . “D.IN Sel =” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
DAT Recorder
D.IN Se l (Dig ita l In Se le ct)
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical)
if you are going to recover data using the VS-880EX’s
DIGITAL IN connector.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] twice.
“Name Ready?” appears in the display.
9 . Press [YES].
“Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
1 0 . Put the DAT recorder in play mode.
This executes the loading of the song name.
1 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
1 1 . When the load procedure is finished, “Please Stop
DAT” ap p ears in the d isp lay. Stop the DAT
recorder, then press [YES].
1 8 . When the recover procedure is finished, “Please
Stop DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT
recorder, then press [YES].
The DAT Name screen appears in the display. If data
for two or more songs was saved together, you can
rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to view the song names.
1 9 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* To cancel this operation, press [CANCEL (NO)].
Song Number
Song Name
Ch e ck in g th e Re co rd in g
Co n d itio n o f Sa ve d
Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta (Ve rify )
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
This operation checks the condition of song data that
was recorded to DAT tape. However, it does not per-
form a comparison of the song data on the hard disk
and the tape.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Sample Rate
Recording Mode
If results of the DAT verify operation warns that data
is not recorded correctly, it is possible that the tape has
been scratched or stretched. If the original song data
still exists in the disk drive, perform the backup opera-
tion once again to a different DAT tape.
Total number of songs backed up to DAT (3 songs)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
* When performing DAT backups, in order to confirm that
the data indeed has been properly backed up, we recom-
mend that you carry out the Verify procedure as well.
4
12
------
24
48
1 . Connect the DAT recorder to the VS-880EX as fol-
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
lowing.
1 2 . If you w ish to end the operation after merely
checking the, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Optical
1 3 . If you wish to recover only the data for a specific
song, use the TIME/ VALUE dial to display the
name of the song that you wish to recover.
1 4 . Press [ENTER (YES)].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
1 5 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
1 6 . “Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
Rewind the tape and then put the DAT recorder in
play mode.
1 7 . Load ing of the song d ata begins. If you have
backed up the data to multiple tapes, then the
operation is suspended when the end of each tape
is reached. Insert the number tape indicated in the
display, press [YES], and start the DAT recorder
playing again.
Digtal Out
DAT Recorder
1 3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
1 0 . Put the DAT recorder in play mode.
Coaxial
Verify the tape. If you have backed up the data to mul-
tiple tapes, then the operation is suspended when the
end of each tape is reached. Insert the number tape
indicated in the display, press [YES], and start the
DAT recorder playing again.
1 1 . When load ing is finished , “Please Stop DAT”
appears in the display. Stop the DAT recorder,
then press [YES].
1 2 . If there is no problem with the condition of the
recorded song data, “Complete” appears in the
display. If “Verify Error, Retry?” appears when
the song data is loaded, then that song data can-
not be loaded correctly. If you wish to check a
tape again, insert the number tape indicated in the
display, press [YES], and start the DAT recorder
playing again. Press [NO] if you want to finish the
procedure without checking the tape again.
Digital Out
* To cancel this operation, press [CANCEL (NO)].
DAT Recorder
2 . Insert the tape which contains the song data into
the DAT recorder. If the song data is backed up
on two or more tapes, insert the first tape.
3 . Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning
of the song data.
4 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G DAT
Recover?” appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
6 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
7 . “D.IN Sel =” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
D.IN Se l (Dig ita l In Se le ct)
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical)
if you are going to recover data using the VS-880EX’s
DIGITAL IN connector.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] thrice.
“Verify Ready?” appears in the display.
9 . Press [YES].
“Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
1 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 1 Co m p a tib ility
Disks used with Roland’s VS-880 and VS-840 models
can also be used by the VS-880EX. Additionally, song
data recorded on such disks can be loaded by the VS-
880EX. However, because differences in the structure
of disk space and song data on disks that can be used,
there are a number of precautions concerning the load-
ing and saving of data that should be observed.
If you wish to playback or edit VS-880EX song data
with VS-880, convert it to VS-880 song data (Song
Export).
Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy
p roced u re on th e VS-880EX can n ot be restored
(archive extracted) by the VS-880.
Song data that has been saved using the DAT Backup
procedure on the VS-880EX cannot be restored (DAT
recovered) by the VS-880.
Disk Co m p a tib ility
VS-8 8 0 → VS-8 8 0 EX
VS-1 6 8 0 → VS-8 8 0 EX
When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS-
880 are installed in the VS-880EX, or when Zip disks
that have been used by a VS-880 are inserted into a Zip
drive connected to the VS-880EX, they are recognized
as the initialization disk. In this case, the VS-880EX can
be used for playing back songs recorded with the VS-
880 and creating new songs as well. However, you
cannot use the VS-880EX to edit songs that were
recorded on the VS-880 or save new versions of
songs.
When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS-
1680 are installed in the VS-880EX, or when Zip disks
that have been used by a VS-1680 are inserted into a
Zip drive connected to the VS-880EX, they are recog-
nized as the initialization disk, provided they meet the
cond itions below . In this case, how ever, the VS-
880EX can create new songs on the disk.
Fu rtherm ore, the VS-880EX cannot recognize
songs recorded on the VS-1680.
Partition space:
If you wish to edit VS-880 song data with VS-880EX,
convert it to VS-880EX song data (Song Import).
1 GB or less (Even if the disk has been initialized with
the “Partition” set to “2000 MB,” the disk can be used
if the actual partition is 1 GB or less.)
Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy
proced ure on the VS-880 can be restored (archive
extracted ) w ith the VS-880EX. H ow ever, the VS-
880EX cannot edit or save new versions of the
extracted songs. In this case, you should first execute
Song Archive Extract (p . 106). Then convert the
extracted song data for use with the VS-880EX (Song
Import).
Partition numbers: 1–4 (5–8 cannot be used)
If you wish to edit/ playback a VS-1680 song on the
VS-880EX, you must first convert the VS-1680 song
data into the VS-880 format, and save it on a Zip disk
etc. (the VS-1680’s Song Export function). Then you
must convert that song data into the VS-880EX format
(the VS-880’s EX Song Import function).
You can recover VS-880 song data backed up using
DAT backup. However, you cannot edit or resave
the recovered data on the VS-880EX. In this case,
you should first execute DAT Recover (p. 131). Then
convert the extracted song data for use with the VS-
880EX (Song Import).
Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy
procedure on the VS-1680 cannot be restored (archive
extracted) by the VS-880EX.
Song data that has been saved using the DAT Backup
procedure on the VS-1680 cannot be restored (DAT
recovered) by the VS-880EX.
VS-8 8 0 EX → VS-8 8 0
When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS-
880EX are installed in the VS-880, or when Zip disks
that have been used by a VS-880EX are inserted into a
Zip drive connected to the VS-880, they are recognized
as the initialization disk. I n this case, however, the
VS-880 can create new songs on the disk. Further
more, the VS-880 cannot recognize songs recorded on
the VS-880EX.
1 3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Compatibility
So n g Da ta Co m p a tib ility
VS-8 8 0 EX → VS-1 6 8 0
When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS-
880EX are installed in the VS-1680, or when Zip disks
that have been used by a VS-880EX are inserted into a
Zip drive connected to the VS-1680, they are recog-
nized as the initialization disk. In this case, the VS-
1680 can be used for playing back songs recorded with
th e VS-880EX an d creatin g n ew son gs as w ell.
H ow ever, you cannot use the VS-1680 to edit
songs that were recorded on the VS-880EX or save
new versions of songs.
Lo a d in g VS-8 8 0 Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
in to th e VS-8 8 0 EX (So n g Im p o rt)
You can convert songs created on a VS-880 or VS-840
for use w ith the VS-880EX and copy them as new
songs to the current drive. This is referred to as Song
Import.
• All the data such as mixer setting including equaliz-
er and stereo link, system setting including sync
track and tempo map, locators and markers, and
effect setting will be copied.
If you wish to edit/ playback a VS-880EX song on the
VS-1680, you must first convert the VS-880EX song
data into the VS-880 format, and save it on a Zip disk
etc. (the VS-880EX’s Song Export function). Then you
must convert that song data into the VS-1680 format
(the VS-1680’s Song Import function).
• The sample rate and recording mode of the newly
created song will be the same as the original song.
• If there is insufficient free space on the current
drive, Song Import cannot be carried out.
Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy
p roced u re on th e VS-880EX can n ot be restored
(archive extracted) by the VS-1680.
Here we will explain the procedure of how a VS-880
song which was copied as a playable copy to a Zip
disk can be read from a Zip drive connected to the VS-
880EX and converted for use with the VS-880EX. If you
need to use Song Archive Extract, or to convert a song
which was recovered from DAT, read from step 3.
Song data that has been saved using the DAT Backup
procedure on the VS-880EX cannot be restored (DAT
recovered) by the VS-1680.
1 . Make settings as shown below.
VS-8 4 0 ↔ VS-8 8 0 EX
Zip disks used on the VS-840 and VS-880EX are
not mutually compatible. When a Zip disk used by a
VS-840 is inserted in a Zip drive connected to the VS-
880EX, it is recognized as an uninitialized disk.
When a Zip disk used by a VS-880EX is inserted in a
Zip drive connected to the VS-840, it is recognized as
an uninitialized disk.
If you wish to playback/ edit an VS-840 song on the
VS-880EX, you must first convert the VS-840 song data
into VS-880 format, and save it on a Zip disk (the VS-
840’s Song Convert function). Then you must convert
that song d ata into the VS-880EX format (the VS-
880EX’s Song Import function). However in this case,
only the performance data (audio data) and the data
specifying the track on which each audio data is
recorded will be converted.
If you wish to playback/ edit an VS-880EX song on the
VS-840, you must first convert the VS-880EX song data
into VS-880 format, and save it on a Zip disk (the VS-
880EX’s Song Export function). Then you must convert
that song data into the VS-840 format (the VS-840’s
Song Convert function). However in this case, only the
performance data (audio data) and the data specify-
ing the track on which each audio data is recorded
will be converted.
2 . Insert the disk onto which VS-880 song data has
been recorded into the Zip drive.
1 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Compatibility
3 . For the current drive, select the drive (internal
IDE hard disk) you want to be the load destina-
tion.
Co n ve rtin g VS-8 8 0 EX So n g Da ta fo r
Use w ith th e VS-8 8 0 (So n g Ex p o rt)
You can convert the current song for use with a VS-
880 and copy it as a new songs to a Zip drive connect-
ed to the VS-880EX’s SCSI connector. This is referred
to as Song Export.
4 . Press [SONG] several times until “Song Import ?”
appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
6 . “Source Drv=” (the drive from which the data
w ill be read ) ap p ears in the d isp lay. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the drive which con-
tains the song you wish to convert. For example if
the source drive is the Zip drive, select “SC5:0.”
• All song d ata, includ ing mixer settings such as
equalizer and Stereo Link, system settings such as
sync tracks and Tem po Maps, locate and m ark
points, effects settings, and so on are copied.
• Song data in the V-track bank A (Tracks 1–8, V-
tracks 1–8) is Song Exported. Please copy the data in
the V-track bank B to the V-track bank A before-
hand, by using Track Exchange. (P. 92)
Load source drive (in the example, a Zip drive)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
• The sample rate and recording mode of the newly
created song will be the same as the original song.
4
12
24
48
• If there is insufficient free space on the conversion
destination drive, Song Export cannot be carried
out.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Here we will explain the procedure of converting a
VS-880EX song for use by the VS-880, and saving it in
playable format to a Zip disk.
7 . Press PARAMETER [
].
8 . “Sel=” ap p ears in th e d isp lay. Use th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to select the song you want to
convert.
1 . Make settings as shown below.
Song Type (In the example, VS-880 EX’s song)
Song Number
Song Name
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Sample Rate
Recording Mode
9 . Press [YES].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
1 0 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
1 1 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
1 2 . After Song Import is completed, return to Play
2 . Select the song you want to convert as the current
condition.
song.
3 . Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
1 3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Compatibility
4 . Press [SONG] several times until “Song Export ?”
appears in the display.
5 . Press [YES].
6 . “Dest. Drv=” (the save destination drive) appears
in the d isplay. Use the TIME/ VALUE d ial to
select the drive on which you wish to save the
converted song data. For example if you wish to
save the data to the Zip drive, select “SC5:0.”
Write destination drive (in the example, a Zip drive)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
7 . Press [YES].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
8 . Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
9 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
1 0 . After Song Export is completed, return to Play
condition.
1 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 2 O th e r Co n ve n ie n t Fu n ctio n s
Fin d in g th e Lo ca tio n W h e re th e So u n d
Be g in s (e x a m p le )
Pre vie w in g Te ch n iq u e s
(Pre vie w )
1 . While pressing [STOP], press the STATUS button
When editing a song, you will likely want to find pre-
for the track you want to monitor.
cise points in the song, for example the point where
The STATUS indicator lights green.
sound begins or where the climax begins, when using
Auto Punch-In Recording, and in other editing situa-
tions. In such instances, you can specify the amount of
time for playback leading up to or following a desig-
nated point as well as monitor the data on the tracks
while gradually shifting the current time in the song.
This is referred to as the Preview function.
2 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
3 . Play back the song until you reach the point you
are looking for. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
4 . Alternately press [TO] and [FROM].
The song before and after the current time is played
back. Determine whether the beginning of the sound is
earlier or later than the current time.
There are four Preview buttons, and each one works
d ifferently. Select the one w hose function is most
appropriate for what you are trying to accomplish.
5 . Next, rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to move the
current time until you can hear a bit of the begin-
ning of the sound when you press [TO].
Usin g [TO ] [FRO M]
You can set the length of playback time for the tracks
you want to monitor for 1.0–10.0 seconds leading up
to or starting from the current point in the song. Press
each buttons while the song is stopped.
6 . Finally, rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to move the
current tim e until the sound begins precisely
when you press [FROM].
7 . N ow you can easily find the p recise location
where the sound begins. Place a mark point at the
current time or store the current time in a locate
point so that you will be able to easily find it later.
[TO]:
A preview of the song is played back one
time for the specified period of time up to
the current time in the song (Preview To).
FROM]:
A preview of the song is played back one
time for the specified period of time start-
ing from the cu rrent tim e in the song
(Preview From).
Ad ju stin g th e Pre vie w Le n g th
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [TO] or [FROM].
[TO] + [FROM]: A preview of the song is played back
for the specified period of time both
up to and from the designated point
in the song, i.e., with the current time
placed at the center of the playback
(Preview To + Preview From).
2 . Th e “Preview Len ” is d isp layed . Rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the time. Press [TO]
or [FROM] to check the actual playback time.
Preview Length (1.0 sec)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Current Time
dB
0
Preview Length
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Time
Pre vie w Le n (Pre vie w Le n g th )
It sets a length of playback time in the preview func-
tion.
PREVIEW TO PREVIEW FROM
PREVIEW THRU
3 . After you have finished making the settings, press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
The initial display reappears.
1 4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
The sound (waveform) being played back will be dis-
played for your reference.
Usin g [SCRUB]
This function is used to repeat playback of the song
before and after a designated point on a selected track
for a more precisely specified length of time (25–100
msec). Press [SCRUB] while the song is stopped. The
button indicator lights, and the specified section is
played back repeatedly.
Waveform display
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
The playback time (25–100 msec) is shorter than when
Preview as used.
4
12
24
48
Press the following buttons while their button indica-
tors are lit.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
STATUS button: Selects the track to be played back.
Displayed blinking (Scrub Length)
[TO]:
The song is played back repeatedly
up to the designated point.
7 . N ow you can easily find the p recise location
w here the sound begins. Press [SCRUB] once
more.
[FROM]:
The song is played back repeatedly
starting from the designated point.
The SCRUB indicator light goes off.
Current Time
8 . Place a marker at the current time or store the cur-
rent time in a locator so that you will be able to
easily find it later.
Scrub Length
Scrub Length
Ad ju stin g th e Scru b Le n g th
Time
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SCRUB].
SCRUB
SCRUB
2 . The “Scru b Length” is d isp layed . Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE d ial to ad ju st the tim e. Press
[SCRUB] to check the actual playback time.
Fin d in g th e Lo ca tio n W h e re th e So u n d
Be g in s (e x a m p le )
Scrub Length (45 msec)
1 . While pressing [STOP], press the STATUS buttons
for all tracks that you want to monitor.
The STATUS indicator lights green.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
2 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
12
24
48
3 . Play back the song until you reach the point you
are looking for. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 . Press [SCRUB].
The SCRUB indicator lights, and the specified section
is played back repeatedly. Press [TO] or [FROM] to
select the range before or after the current time that
you want to play back.
Scru b Le n g th
This sets a length (25–100 msec) of playback time
when the Preview function [SCRUB] button is pressed.
3 . After you have finished making the settings, press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
The initial display reappears.
5 . Press STATUS button for the track on which you
want to use Scrub playback.
6 . If you p ressed [TO] in Step 4, rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to move the current time until
you can just hear the very beginning of the sound.
If you p ressed [FROM] is Step 4, rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to move the current time until
the sound begins precisely.
1 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
* Items printed in bold are those that can be adjusted direct-
ly with the faders on the top panel. You can record the
time-based movements of the faders by moving the faders
during playback of the song.
Re ca llin g a Sp e cific Lo ca tio n
(Ju m p )
Besides using the TIME/ VALUE dial, markers and
locators to move the current time of the song, you can
also directly specify a location or measure and beat to
be recalled. This is convenient when designating loca-
tions during Track Edit.
IN PUT/ TRACK
Fader
Pan
FX1 Lev (Effect 1 Send Level)
FX1 Pan (Effect 1 Send Pan)
FX2 Lev (Effect 2 Send Level)
FX2 Pan (Effect 2 Send Pan)
AUX Lev (AUX Level)
AUX Pan
1 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2 . If you wish to directly recall a marker time loca-
tion , u se CURSOR [
] [
] to m ake th e
“MARKER” field blink. If you wish to directly
recall the time location of a specific measure,
make the “MEASURE” field blink.
3 . Press [NUMERICS].
4 . The LOCATOR buttons will function as numeric
keys to directly input a numerical value (p. 153).
Input the desired value.
STEREO IN
(Fader)
(Balance)
blinking (Cursor)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
EFFECT RETURN
dB
0
(Effect 1 Return Level)
(Effect 1 Return Balance)
(Effect 2 Return Level)
(Effect 2 Return Balance)
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
5 . Press [ENTER (YES)].
The designated time location is recalled, and you are
returned to Play condition.
Ma ste r Blo ck
(Master Level)
Master Balance
Re co rd in g Mix e r Se ttin g s
(Au to Mix )
(Master Effect 1 Send Level)
(Master Effect 1 Send Balance)
(Master Effect 2 Send Level)
(Master Effect 2 Send Balance)
(Master AUX Send Level)
(Master AUX Send Balance)
With the VS-880EX, you can record the present status
or condition of the mixer as a Scene. Unlike with
Scenes, you can alternatively store information at spe-
cific times during playback to markers. Referred to as
Auto Mix, this includes the mixer settings, time-based
channel fader movements, and other settings. When
during playback you reach a point where a marker is
set, the mixer settings automatically switch to those
stored at the marker. This is convenient when mixing
with complicated settings that are difficult to repro-
duce manually.
EFFECT
FX1 (Effect 1 Program Number)
FX2 (Effect 2 Program Number)
The following mixer settings can be recorded in Auto
Mix.
1 4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Pre p a ra tio n s fo r Au to Mix
Press [AUTOMIX]. The button indicator lights, indi-
cating that Mix mode is on.
Record ing the Mix er Setting s, Method 1
(Sn a p sh o t)
Mixer settings recorded with Auto Mix can be record-
ed directly to markers. This method is known as tak-
ing a Snapshot. When you move to that marker, the
mixer settings that were recorded will be reproduced.
For example, this is convenient when you want the
intro and ending to have different volume levels or
different effect send levels for guitar parts during
intros or solos.
lit
At this time, while holding down the [AUTOMIX] but-
ton once more, each time the each channel SELECT
button or [EZ ROUTING] (Master Block) is pressed,
the status
1 . Move to the tim e location w here you w ish to
record the auto mix.
2 . Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
3 . Select the channels which you want to record
using Auto Mix. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the each
ch an n el SELECT bu tton or [EZ ROUTIN G]
(Master Block).
Indicator off:
Auto Mix is disabled.
dark
Indicator on:
4 . Hold down [AUTOMIX] and press [TAP].
A marker is added at the current time location. At the
same time, a Snapshot of the mixer settings is recorded
at the marker. A marker in which mixer settings are
recorded will be indicated by an “*” following it.
Auto Mix playback is enabled.
lit
Indicator blinking:
Auto Mix is enabled for recording and
playback.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
blink
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
* If a marker already exists within 0.1 seconds before the
time location where you are attempting to place a new
marker (i.e., the current time), the Snapshot is recorded at
the earlier marker. A marker will not be newly assigned. If
a marker already exists within 0.1 seconds after the time
location at which you are attempting to place a new mark-
er (i.e., the current time), the Snapshot is recorded at the
later marker.
5 . Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator light goes off.
1 4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
W h e n th e cu rre n t tim e m a tch e s w ith a
m a rk e r
When you press [AUTOMIX] and [PREVIOUS], the
gradation includes the preceding marker; pressing
[AUTOMIX] and [NEXT] creates a gradation including
the following marker.
Record ing the Mix er Setting s, Method 2
(Gra d a tio n )
This creates an au to m ix that sm oothly connects
Snapshots recorded in two adjacent markers. This
method is called Gradation.
For example, this is convenient when you wish to
specify the length of a fade-in or fade-out.
1 . Follow the operation as described in “Recording
the Mixer Settings, Method 1,” record a Snapshot
w ith th e tim e location s at w h ich you w an t
Gradation to begin and end.
Current Time
Marker 2
Marker 1
Marker 3
2 . Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
Time
3 . Select the channels which you want to record
using Auto Mix. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the each
ch an n el SELECT bu tton or [EZ ROUTIN G]
(Master Block).
Gradation Range
Gradation Range
6 . Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator light goes off.
4 . Hold down [AUTOMIX] and press [PREVIOUS]
or [NEXT].
Re co rd in g Fa d e r O p e ra tio n s
(Re a ltim e )
5 . A confirmation message appears on the screen.
Press [YES].
A new mark point is automatically added between the
two mark points, and Gradation is executed. Press
[CANCEL (NO)] if you wish to cancel Gradation.
With this method, time-based both channel fader and
master fader movement during play back song are
record ed to the m arker d irectly. This m ethod is
referred to as Realtime. This is convenient when, for
example, you want to freely adjust the volume levels
of individual tracks.
W h e n th e cu rre n t tim e is in clu d e d in
a n a d ja ce n t m a rk e r
Press eith er [AUTOMIX] an d [PREVIOUS] or
[AUTOMIX] and [NEXT], the gradation range will be
specified in a same range.
1 . Move to the time location at which you wish to
record in Realtime.
2 . Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
3 . Select the channels which you want to record
using Auto Mix. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the each
ch an n el SELECT bu tton or [EZ ROUTIN G]
(Master Block).
Marker 1
Current Time
Marker 2
4 . Hold down [AUTOMIX] and press [REC].
The AUTOMIX indicator blinks, indicating that Auto
Mix Realtime recording is ready.
Time
5 . Press [FADER] to select the faders that will be in
Gradation Range
effect with the input mixer or track mixer.
6 . Adjust the top panel channel faders, master fader,
and PAN knobs to the desired positions.
* When the Fader Match (p. 164) in the System parameters
is set to “Null,” and the current fader positions of do not
match the actual volume levels, if you don’t first move the
channel faders to their actual values, you will be unable to
record the data using Auto Mix.
1 4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
7 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback.
Pla y in g Ba ck th e Au to Mix
8 . Operate the channel faders, master fader, and
PAN knobs on the top panel.
Auto mix data will be recorded only for those chan-
nels that are modified.
1 . Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the VS-
880EX is in Auto Mix mode.
2 . Select the channels for which you want Auto
Mix played back. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that each button indicators light, press the each
ch an n el SELECT bu tton or [EZ ROUTIN G]
(Master Block).
9 . When the mix is finished, press [STOP].
m arkers w ill be autom atically created in the area
which was played back. If you wish to re-do realtime,
repeat steps 3–8.
3 . Press [PLAY].
If Yo u Do n ’t Wa n t to Re co rd Fa d e r
Se ttin g s (Ma sk Fa d e r)
Playback of Auto Mix begins. Moving the channel
faders, master fader, or PAN knobs while Auto Mix is
being played back cancels the Auto Mix for that fader.
If you stop and then start playback again, Auto Mix
will once again take effect. Alternatively, you can tem-
porarily disable Auto Mix during playback and then
enable it by turning it on again.
You can specify that the settings adjustable from the
top p an el w ill n ot be record ed , as d escribed in
“Recording the Mixer Settings, Method 1 (Snapshot).”
For example, this is effective when you have made
fade-in settings as in “Recording the Mixer Settings,
Method 2 (Gradation)”, and then wish to modify effect
send levels or other settings.
4 . When the playback is finished, press [STOP].
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Disa b lin g Au to Mix O n ly o n Sp e cifie d
Ch a n n e ls
Scene/ Auto Mix?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
1 . Move to the point w here you w ant to d isable
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Auto Mix.
“SYS A.Mix Snap=” appears in the display.
2 . Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
3 . Select the channels for which you want Auto
Mix disabled. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the each
ch an n el SELECT bu tton or [EZ ROUTIN G]
(Master Block).
A.Mix Sn a p (Au to Mix Sn a p sh o t Mo d e )
This selects the settings that will be recorded by the
snapshot.
All:
All settings are recorded.
4 . Hold down [AUTOMIX] and press [CLEAR].
Auto Mix is disabled on the selected channels.
MaskF: Settings which can be adjusted from the top
panel (channel faders etc.) will be ignored.
5 . Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator light goes off.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
6 . Record the Snapshot as described in “Recording
the Mixer Settings, Method 1.”
1 4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Un d o in g Re co rd in g s a n d
Ed its (Un d o )
Disa b lin g Au to Mix o n All Ch a n n e ls
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Scene/ Auto Mix?” appears in the display.
When using the VS-880EX, recordings may not sound
as you intend, settings for editing may be made incor-
rectly, or there may be other situations where you
want to go back and try something again. In such
instances, you can restore the previous conditions at
each of the steps where something was changed. This
is referred to as the Undo function. Moreover, you
can restore conditions as they were before the last
undo. This is called the Redo function.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS A.Mix Erase?” appears in the display.
4 . Press [YES].
5 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to specify the first
m arker in the range that you w ant Au to Mix
erased.
When using the Undo function, you will specify the
number of previous steps that will be undone. For
example, suppose that you use punch-in recording to
perform five consecutive re-recordings of the same
location. If you later decide to return to the condition
of the second recording (step 2), you would set the
Undo function to return to the condition of three steps
earlier (Undo Level 3).
Era se Fro m
Specify the first marker in the range that you want
Auto Mix erased.
6 . Press CURSOR [
The cursor will move toward the right.
].
7 . Use the TIME/ VALUE dial to specify the last
m arker in the range that you w ant Au to Mix
erased.
Recording 5
Recording 4
Era se To
Undo Level 3
Recording 3
Specify the last marker in the range that you want
Auto Mix erased.
Recording 2
Recording 1
8 . Press PARAMETER [
“SYS EraseMode=” appears in the display.
].
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Time
If, after executing the Undo operation, you decide to
return to the condition of step 5, execute the Redo
operation.
Era se Mo d e
Select the auto mix data which will be erased.
Event: Only Auto Mix events will be erased.
Marker:
will be erased.
Both markers and Auto Mix events
Recording 5
Recording 4
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
Redo
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS Erase___<=>___?” appears in the display. The
marker you specified in steps 5–7 will be displayed in
the underlined area.
1 1 . Press [ENTER (YES)]. A confirmation message
appears on the screen. Press [YES]. If you wish to
cancel the erase, press [NO].
Time
1 2 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
H ow ever if you once again record (step 3’) after
returning to the condition of recording number 2, the
recordings 3–5 that were canceled by the Undo opera-
tion will be lost. This means that if after step 3’ you
use the Undo operation to return to the previous step,
you will return to the condition of step 2.
1 . Press [UNDO].
“Level=” appears in the display.
2 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to select the num-
ber of previous steps the conditions of which you
want to have restored.
Recording 5
Recording 4
Undo Level (In the example, 1)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Recording 3'
Undo
dB
0
Recording 2
4
12
24
48
Recording 1
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Time
3 . Press [YES] to execute Undo.
The UNDO indicator lights. If you want to cancel the
Undo, press [CANCEL (NO)].
Re co rd in g a n d Ed itin g O p e ra tio n s
W h ich Ca n Be Un d o n e (Un d o )
Recording or editing operations performed after creat-
ing a song are recorded together with the song data as
its operation history, and the data itself is also pre-
served without being erased. For example, suppose
that you perform 10 recording operations on song 1
and then create song 2. The operation history of song 2
is newly recorded from the time when song 2 was cre-
ated. If you subsequently select song 1 again, the his-
tory of the 10 previous recording operations will still
be there.
Ca n ce lin g th e La st-Pe rfo rm e d Un d o
(Re d o )
The Redo function can be executed when the UNDO
indicator is lit. When the song data is saved, for exam-
ple by your doing Song Store or selecting another
song, the UNDO indicator will go out, indicating that
the Undo function will no longer be available.
1 . While the UN DO ind icator is lit, hold d ow n
The Undo function refers to the operation history of
the currently selected song, and restores the song to
the condition in which it was the specified number of
operations ago. In the case of song 1 in this example,
you will be able to cancel the 10 recording operations
that were performed. A maximum of 999 levels of
operation history may be recorded for each song.
[SHIFT] and press [UNDO].
2 . “Cancel the last UNDO?” appears in the display.
Press [F4 (Exec)].
The UNDO indicator light goes off. If you wish to can-
cel, press [CANCEL (NO)].
O p e ra tio n s Th a t Ca n Be Un d o n e
Ca n ce lin g O n ly th e Ve ry La st-
Pe rfo rm e d O p e ra tio n
Operations that can be und one are recording
operations and each of the Track Edit opera-
tions. Check the list below for operations that
cannot be undone.
If you most frequently use the Undo function to undo
just the previously performed recording/ editing oper-
ation (i.e., undo level 1), you may prefer not to be
bothered with the messages that appear when the
[UNDO] button is pressed. In this case, make the fol-
lowing settings so that just the previous operation will
be undone immediately when the [UNDO] button is
pressed.
• Song Edit operations (Optimize/ Erase/ etc.)
• Saves to User Effect Patches
• System operations (mixer initialization/ Drive
Initialize/ Sync Track Recording/ etc.)
• Auto Mix operations
(Snapshot/ Gradation/ Realtime
Recording/ etc.)
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
• Storing in EZ Routing
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
• Stored Locators/ Markers/ Scenes
“SYS UNDO MSG=” appears in the display.
1 4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. For now select
3 . Monitor and Mute alternate each time you press
SELECT button. Furthermore, you can monitor
two or more channels. However, channels which
were muted before the Solo function was turned
on cannot be monitored even when their SELECT
buttons are pressed. Additionally, when you are
monitoring just one channel, pressing the SELECT
button of that channel allows you to then monitor
all channels. At this time, you will be able to hear
the automix status of each channel while you con-
tinue pressing [AUTOMIX].
“Off.”
UN DO MSG (UN DO m e ssa g e )
This selects whether or not the Undo confirmation
message is displayed.
On: The message is displayed, asking how many
levels you want to undo.
Off: The m essage is not d isplayed , and only the
immediately preceding operation is undone.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
4 . To turn off the Solo function, hold down [SHIFT]
and press the [SOLO (EZ ROUTING)] once again.
Return to Play condition.
Liste n in g O n ly to a Sp e cific
Ch a n n e l (So lo / Mu te )
Mu tin g O n ly to a Sp e cific Ch a n n e l
When making equalizer adjustments or checking the
balance during mixdown, it is often desirable to be
able to monitor the sound of one specific channel.
Although it would be possible to individually mute
each of the channels that you didn’t want to hear with
STATUS buttons, this is inconvenient. In such cases,
you can monitor only a specific channel and mute all
the other channels. This is called the Solo function. To
use the Solo function, use the following procedure. If,
in contrast to the Solo function, you wish to mute only
specific channels, this is called the Mute function.
1 . Hold down [SOLO (EZ ROUTING)].
This turns the Mute function on; the SELECT button
indicators are all blink. In the present status, all chan-
nels are monitored.
2 . While hold ing d ow n [SOLO (EZ ROUTIN G)],
press the SELECT button for the channel you wish
to mute.
The button indicator goes off, and only that channel is
now muted. You can also mute two or more channels.
Liste n in g O n ly to a Sp e cific Ch a n n e l
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SOLO (EZ ROUT-
ING)] in the master section.
The display will briefly indicate “SOLO Mode ON,”
indicating that the Solo function is on. The display in
the CON DITION field w ill alternate betw een the
name of the current condition and “sol,” also indicat-
ing that the Solo function is on. At the same time, the
SELECT indicators for each channels are blink. In the
present status, all channels are monitored.
3 . Monitor and Mute alternate each time you press
[SOLO (EZ ROUTING)] and SELECT button. The
muted state will remain valid even if you take
you r hand off [SOLO (EZ ROUTIN G)] or the
SELECT bu tton . If you w ish to sw itch th e
input/ track/ effect return, press [FADER (EDIT)].
4 . If you wish to monitor all channels, hold down
[SOLO (EZ ROUTING)] and press [CLEAR].
2 . Press the SELECT button for the channel you wish
to monitor.
The SELECT indicator stays blink, and only that chan-
nel is now monitored . At this time you can make
adjustments to fader, balance, equalizer, effects, and
other settings.
1 4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Ch a n n e l Lin k
This turns the Channel Link function on and off.
Sim u lta n e o u sly Ad ju stin g a
Ste re o So u rce (Ch a n n e l Lin k )
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
When recording or playing back a stereo source, nor-
mal mixer operations require you to control the left
and right channels separately, w hich can m ake it
inconvenient to adjust equalizer, effects, and other set-
tings. In such cases, you can have the settings for a
pair of channels, with the exception of the fader and
pan settings, linked so that they adjusted in the same
way. This is called the Channel Link.
Return to Play condition.
Ad ju stin g th e Fa d e rs
When Channel Link is on, the balance of both channels
is preserved, and the total volume level controlled
with fader for the odd-numbered channel. If you want
the channel faders to act independently, use the fol-
lowing procedure.
When Channel Link is on, adjacent odd- and even-
numbered channels are paired as shown below. The
settings of each odd-numbered channel will be the
same as the settings of the corresponding even-num-
bered channel. When the setting of one channel are
m od ified , the settings of the p aired channel w ill
change in the same way.
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channels for
which you wish to adjust that channel’s fader.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
], so that “MIX
Sw =” appears in the display.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Channel 1
MIX Sw (Mix Sw itch )
This selects the bus to which the source or track out-
put will be assigned. For this example select “On.”
Channel a
2
Channel 3
Channel b
4
On: The source or track will not be assigned to a
recording bus, but will be sent directly to the
mix bus. Set this to “On” when, for example,
you sim ply w ant to m ix the inputs w ithout
recording the source. However, the sources that
are assigned to the RECORDING bus are dis-
abled.
Channel 5
Channel c
6
Channel 7
Channel d
8
At this time, you can use the channel faders and pan
knobs to make the following adjustments.
Off: The source or track will not be assigned to the
mix bus. If it is not assigned to a recording bus
either, then that source/ track will not be output
anywhere.
Odd-numbered channel faders:
Overall volume level of the signal that is output to the
mix bus or the recording bus (Offset Level)
Off-numbered channel pan knobs:
Overall left/ right balance of the signal that is output
to the mix bus or the recording bus (Offset Balance)
4 . Press PARAMETER [
], so that “MIX Level”
appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Even-numbered channel faders:
Overall volume level of the signal that is output to the
AUX bus (AUX level)
Mix Level (In the example, 100)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Even-numbered channel pan knobs:
Overall left/ right balance of the signal that is output
to the AUX bus (AUX balance)
dB
0
4
12
24
48
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channels for
which you wish to have Channel Link turned on.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
], so th at
“Channel Link=” appears in the display.
MIX Le ve l
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. For now, select
Adjust the volume level (0–127) of the signal that is
output to the mix bus or the recording bus.
“On.”
1 4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
6 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the other channel.
Ad ju stin g th e Pa n
7 . Repeat steps 2–5 to make the same settings for the
When Channel Link is on, this adjusts the total left-
right balance while preserving the pan settings for
both channels. If you want to adjust the pan for each
channel independently, use the following procedure.
other channel.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Ofs Level =” appears in the display.
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channels
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
whose pan settings you wish to adjust.
O fs Le ve l (O ffse t Le ve l)
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
], so that “MIX
Adjust the overall volume level (0–127) while main-
taining the volume balance of the two channels. This
will operate linked with the channel fader of the odd-
numbered channel.
Sw =” appears in the display.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIX Sw (Mix Sw itch )
This selects the bus to which the source or track out-
put will be assigned. For this example select “On.”
1 0 . If you wish to assign the output of a source or
track to the AUX bus, press PARAMETER [
to make the display read “AUX Sw =.”
]
On: The source or track will be sent to the mix bus.
Set this to “On” when, for example, you simply
want to mix the inputs without recording the
source. However, the sources that are assigned
to the RECORDING bus are disabled.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
AUX Sw (AUX Sw itch )
This sets how the signal is sent to the AUX bus. Here,
select “PstFade.”
Off: The source or track will not be assigned to the
mix bus. If it is not assigned to a recording bus
either, then that source/ track will not be output
anywhere.
Off:
The signal is not sent. (This will not be out-
put from the AUX jacks.)
PreFade: The signal before passing through the chan-
nel fader is sent.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
], so that “MIX Bal”
appears in the display.
PstFade: The signal after passing through the chan-
nel fader is sent.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
“AUX Level=” appears in the display.
].
Mix Balance (In the example, L63)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
dB
0
4
AUX Le ve l (AUX Le ve l)
This adjusts the level (0–127) of the signal sent to the
AUX bus.
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 4 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the other channel.
1 5 . Repeat steps 11–14 to make the same settings for
MIX Ba l (Mix Ba la n ce )
the other channel.
Adjust the pan (L63–0–R63) of the signal that is output
to the mix bus or the recording bus.
1 6 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
6 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the other channel.
7 . Repeat steps 2–5 to make the same settings for the
other channel.
1 5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
8 . Press PARAMETER [
“Ofs Bal =” appears in the display.
].
Lin k in g O n ly th e Fa d e rs (Fa d e r Lin k )
The faders alone of adjacent odd- and even-numbered
channels can be linked so that the volume balance of
the channel pair can be maintained as you adjust the
overall volume level. This is referred to as Fader Link.
When fader link is turned on, equalizer settings and
effect send level settings etc. for the two channels can
be made (independently) for either channel.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
O fs Ba l (O ffse t Ba la n ce )
Adjust the overall left/ right level (L63–0–R63) while
maintaining the panning of both channels. This will
operate linked with the pan knob of the odd-num-
bered channel.
* Fader Link is valid only when Channel Link is turned
OFF. If Channel Link is also turned on, settings such as
equalizer and effect send level will also be linked.
1 0 . If you wish to assign the output of a source or
track to the AUX bus, press PARAMETER [
to make the display read “AUX Sw =.”
]
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channels for
which you wish to have Fader Link turned on.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
], so th at
AUX Sw (AUX Sw itch )
This sets how the signal is sent to the AUX bus. Here,
select “PstFade.”
“Fader Link=” appears in the display.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. For now, select
“On.”
Off:
The signal is not sent. (This will not be out-
put from the AUX jacks.)
Fa d e r Lin k
PreFade: The signal before passing through the chan-
This turns the Fader Link function on and off.
nel fader is sent.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
PstFade: The signalafter passing through the channel
fader is sent.
5 . As described in “Adjusting the Faders (p. 149),”
adjust the volume balance of each channel and the
overall volume level.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
“AUX Bal=” appears in the display.
] twice.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
AUX Ba l (AUX b a la n ce )
This adjusts the pan setting (L63–0–R63) of the signal
sent to the AUX bus.
1 4 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the other channel.
1 5 . Repeat steps 10–13 to make the same settings for
the other channel.
1 6 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Mix in g In a Ste re o So u rce
(Ste re o In )
Ch a n g in g th e Pitch Du rin g
Pla y b a ck (Va ri-Pitch )
You can assign input signals from the INPUT jacks or
DIGITAL IN connector to the MIX bus or RECORD-
ING bus, without having them pass through the input
mixer. You can also monitor these signals without
having them pass through the input mixer or output
mixer. This is referred to as Stereo In. This can be con-
venient when, for example, the same input source fea-
tures sounds with effects and sounds without effects
recorded on separate tracks. Use the following proce-
dure for Stereo In.
When recording an ensemble performance, all the
instruments normally tune to an instrument such as an
acoustic piano whose tuning cannot easily be changed.
However, it is sometimes necessary to record (over-
dub) an acoustic piano onto an existing recording. In
this case, if the pitch of the recording is different than
that of the acoustic piano, something must be done
about it.
In such cases, by changing the playback speed of the
recorder, you can change the pitch of the performance
being played back to match the pitch of the instrument
you want to record. This is referred to as the Vari-
Pitch function. Vari-Pitch can be used not only to
compensate for pitch differences, but can also be used
when you want to purposely produce special effects.
To use the Vari-Pitch function, use the following pro-
cedure.
1 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
FADER indicator lights red.
2 . Press channel 6 [ST IN (CH EDIT)] several times
until “RTN StereoIn=” appears in the display.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ste re o In
1 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] and p ress [VARI PITCH
(AUTOMIX)] .
This selects the external input connector or jack using
Stereo In.
The current sample rate appears in the display.
Off:
Stereo In is not used.
Input 12: Selects IN PUT jacks 1/ 2 for u se w ith
Sample Rate (In the example, 44.1 kHz)
Stereo In.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Input 34: Selects IN PUT jacks 3/ 4 for u se w ith
dB
0
Stereo In.
Input 56: Selects IN PUT jacks 5/ 6 for u se w ith
4
12
24
48
Stereo In.
Digital:
Selects the DIGITAL IN connector (coaxial
or optical) for use with Stereo In.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4 . Press PARAMETER [
“RTN StIn Level=” appears in the display.
].
2 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial to change the pitch
of the playback. Check the playback to see how
the pitch actually sounds.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
StIn Le ve l (Ste re o In Le ve l)
This adjusts the volume level (0–127) for Stereo In.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition. Now, Vari-Pitch turns on
and off each time [SHIFT] + [VARI PITCH] is pressed.
If vari-pitch is on, the VARI PITCH indicator will light
when you continue holding [SHIFT].
6 . Press PARAMETER [
“RTN StIn Bal=” appears in the display.
].
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
StIn Ba l (Ste re o In Ba la n ce )
This adjusts the balance (L63–0–R63) for Stereo In.
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition. The volume level of Stereo
In can be adjusted directly with the channel fader 6
when the effect return mixer is in effect (when the
FADER indicator is lit red).
1 5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
N UMERICSTy p e (N u m e ric k e y ty p e )
Select the input method for when using the LOCA-
TOR buttons as numeric keys.
Re co rd / Pla y b a ck Tra ck s W h e n Usin g
Va ri-Pitch
When vari-pitch is on, the number of tracks which can
be simultaneously recorded/ played back may be lim-
ited, depending on the range of pitch change.
Up:
Input from the lowest place.
Dwn: Input from the highest place.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Dire ctly In p u ttin g N u m e ric
Ch a ra cte rs
When modifying the time locations of a locator or
punch-in point, you can use the LOCATOR buttons as
numeric keys to input numbers directly.
Ex a m p le o f e n te rin g n u m e ra ls fro m lo w e r
to h ig h e r p la ce d ig its
For example, let’s see how “01h23m45s00f” is
input when the NUMERICS Type is set to “Up.”
Not only can you use the normal process of rotating
the TIME/ VALUE dial to enter text, but you can also
use the buttons on the top panel like an ASCII key-
board, for example when editing markers or locators
(using numerals).
1 . Press [NUMERICS].
The NUMERICS indicator lights.
2 . The cursor appears at the digit furthest to the
right (in the lowest place). Press the LOCA-
TOR buttons [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [0], and [0],
in that order.
The numerals appear in the place furthest to the
right and shift to higher places as other numerals
are entered. You can also move the cursor to the
1 . Press [NUMERICS].
The NUMERICS indicator lights.
2 . Press the LOCATOR button.
The buttons can be used to enter numerals as indicat-
ed below.
desired place by pressing the CURSOR [
].
] and
[
3 . When you are finished inputting the number,
press [ENTER (YES)].
The numerical value is set, and the button indica-
tor goes off.
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
Ex a m p le o f e n te rin g n u m e ra ls fro m h ig h e r
to lo w e r p la ce d ig its
Now let’s see how “01h23m45s00f” is input when
the NUMERICS Type is set to “Down.”
* Depend on parameters (effect etc.), you can enter “-” (a
minus sign) by pressing [0] twice.
3 . After you have finished entering the numbers,
press [ENTER (YES)].
This sets the numbers.
1 . Press [NUMERICS].
The button indicator lights, and the current time
in the song is displayed.
Se le ctin g th e Me th o d fo r N u m e ric
In p u t
When using the numeric keys for input, you can select
whether to input the digits starting from the upper
place or from the lower place. Use the method with
which you are most comfortable.
2 . The cursor appears in the digit furthest to the
left (the highest place). Press the LOCATOR
buttons [0], [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [0], and [0], in
that order.
The numerals appear from left to right, just as
they are entered. You can also move the cursor to
the desired place by pressing the CURSOR [
and [ ].
]
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
3 . When you are finished inputting the number,
press [ENTER (YES)].
2 . Press [YES].
The numerical value is set, and the button indica-
tor goes off.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS NUMERICSType=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
5 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
So u n d in g th e Me tro n o m e
PRM ?” appears in the display.
No matter how accurately one tries to play, listening
to the recording play back sometimes reveals inaccura-
cies in rhythm or tempo. The VS-880EX provides a
metronome (click track) that can be sounded at a spec-
ified tempo. By listening to the metronome as you play
your instrument, you will be able to record your per-
formance w ith more accurate timing. At the same
time, since this allows you to specify segments for
song editing by measure and beat, you can edit songs
in a more musical way.
6 . Press [YES].
7 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MetroOUT=” appears in the display.
8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Me tro O UT (Me tro n o m e O u t)
This selects how the metronome is output. For now,
select “INT.”
Selecting “Off” prevents you from making any set-
The m etronom e tem p o can be controlled by the
Tempo Map or Sync Track MIDI Clock. When using
this feature, set up the Tempo Map (p. 121) or Sync
Track (p. 119) beforehand. When you create a new
song, the Tempo Map default settings include a 4/ 4
rhythm and tempo of 120.
tings related to the Metronome.
Off: The metronome sound is not output.
INT: Th e m etron om e sou n d is ou tp u t from th e
MONITOR jacks.
MIDI: The metronome signal is transmitted via the
MIDI OUT connector.
Usin g th e Me tro n o m e Du rin g Re co rd in g
The metronome will begin sounding when record-
ing or playback begins. However you may some-
times wish to hear a count-in on the metronome to
help you catch the tempo before recording begins.
In such cases, you can set aside the first few mea-
sures of the recording to be only for the count-in,
and not record on those measures.
9 . Press PARAMETER [
“MetroLevel” appears in the display.
].
1 0 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Me tro Le ve l (Me tro n o m e Le ve l)
Th is ad ju sts th e volu m e level (0–127) of th e
metronome sound.
The metronome sound is only for the purpose of
helping you keep your playing in time.
1 1 . Press PARAMETER [
“MetroMd” appears in the display.
].
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
1 2 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
Me tro Md (Me tro n o m e Mo d e )
This is for selecting when the metronome sound is
played.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Gen.=” appears in the display.
Rec Only: Th e m etron om e sou n d s on ly d u rin g
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
recording.
Rec&Play: Th e m etron om e sou n d s d u rin g both
Ge n . (Ge n e ra to r)
recording and playback.
This selects the MIDI Clock on which the Metronome
will be based. Select “MIDIclk” if you wish to use the
Tempo Map, and “SyncTr” if you are going to use
Sync Track.
1 3 . This completes the metronome settings. Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.
Off:
The MIDI Clock is not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Tim e Cod e is tran sm itted (th e
metronome does not sound).
MIDIclk: The Tempo Map MIDI Clock is transmitted.
SyncTr: The Sync Track MIDI Clock is transmitted.
1 5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
7 . Press [YES].
Usin g a n Ex te rn a l MIDI So u n d So u rce
to Pla y th e Me tro n o m e
A MIDI sou n d sou rce can be u sed to p lay th e
metronome with a sound of your choosing. To do this,
use the following procedure.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Gen.=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ge n . (Ge n e ra to r)
This selects the MIDI Clock on which the Metronome
will be based. Select “MIDIclk” if you wish to use the
Tempo Map, and “SyncTr” if you are going to use
Sync Track.
1 . Connect the VS-880EX and the MIDI sound gener-
ator as shown below.
Off:
The MIDI Clock is not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Tim e Cod e is tran sm itted (th e
metronome does not sound).
MIDIclk: The Tempo Map MIDI Clock is transmitted.
SyncTr: The Sync Track MIDI Clock is transmitted.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MetroOUT=” appears in the display.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Me tro O UT (Me tro n o m e O u t)
This selects how the metronome is output. For now,
select “MIDI.”
Selecting “Off” prevents you from making any set-
MIDI IN
tings related to the Metronome.
VOLUME
Off: The metronome sound is not output.
MIDI IN
B
PHONES
INT: Th e m etron om e sou n d is ou tp u t from th e
MONITOR jacks.
MIDI: The metronome signal is transmitted via the
MIDI Sound Generator
MIDI OUT connector.
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
“MetroMd” appears in the display.
PRM ?” appears in the display.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
3 . Press [YES].
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Me tro Md (Me tro n o m e Mo d e )
This is for selecting when the metronome sound is
played.
“SYS MID: MIDIThr=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Rec Only: Th e m etron om e sou n d s on ly d u rin g
MIDITh r (MIDI Th ru Sw itch )
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/ THRU
connector. Here, select “Out.”
recording.
Rec&Play: Th e m etron om e sou n d s d u rin g both
recording and playback.
Out: MIDI messages are sent from the VS-880EX.
Select this when sending metronome sound note
messages or mixer parameter settings (Control
Change messages or Exclusive messages).
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“MetroCh” appears in the display.
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Thru: This send s MIDI m essages received via the
MIDI IN connector without change.
Me tro Ch (Me tro n o m e Ch a n n e l)
This sets the MIDI channel (1–16) for transmitting
Metronome sound Note Messages.
6 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
1 5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
The Optimize operation searches all V-tracks on the
target song, and when playing back those V-tracks,
erases the phrases that cannot be heard. For exam-
ple, even if you execute the Optimize with the V-track
1 of Track 1 selected, the phrases that are heard when
V-tracks 2–8 are selected for playback are not deleted.
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
“Acc.Note” appears in the display.
].
1 7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Acc.N o te (Acce n t N o te )
This sets note numbers (C0–G9) for the downbeat.
When the Drum set is playing, this selects specific per-
cussion sounds.
Track 1
V-Track 1
1 8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Nrm.Note” appears in the display.
1 9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
V-Track 2
N rm .N o te (N o rm a l N o te )
This sets note numbers (C0–G9) for the upbeats. When
the Drum set is playing, this selects specific percussion
sounds.
V-Track 3
2 0 . Press PARAMETER [
].
Phrases erased in the Optiize operation
“Acc.Velo” appears in the display.
1 . Select the song you want to optimize as the cur-
2 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
rent song.
Acc.Ve lo (Acce n t Ve lo city )
This sets the velocity (1–127) for the downbeat.
2 . Press [SONG] several times until “Song Optimize
?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
2 2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“Nrm.Velo” appears in the display.
4 . “Son g Op tim ize, Execu te?” (Execu te Son g
Optimize?) appears in the display. Press [YES]. If
you w ish to cancel Song Op tim ize, the p ress
[CANCEL (NO)].
2 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
(N o rm a l Ve lo city )
This sets the velocity (1–127) for the upbeats.
5 . A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the procedure,
press [NO].
2 4 . This com p letes the settings for sou nd ing the
metronome with an external MIDI device. Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
6 . When the optimize is finished, return to Play con-
Return to Play condition.
dition.
* Be aware that, depending on conditions, it may take some
time for the Optimize operation to be completed. This is
not a malfunction. Do not turn the power off until the
Optimize operation is completed.
W h e n th e Disk Ha s Little
Re m a in in g Sp a ce
De le tin g O n ly Un n e e d e d Pe rfo rm a n ce
Da ta (So n g O p tim ize )
When operations such as overdubbing and Punch-In
Recording are repeated, the old data will remain in the
disk drive. In some cases, significant amounts of mem-
ory can be occupied by this unnecessary data, decreas-
ing the available space on the current drive, and short-
ening the length of time available for recording.
Deleting this unnecessary data from the disk drive and
thus freeing up available disk space on the drive is
referred to as Song Optimize. This operation cannot
be undone with the Undo function.
1 5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Ch a n g in g th e N a m e o f
Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta
(So n g N a m e )
De le tin g O n e So n g o f Pe rfo rm a n ce
Da ta (So n g Era se )
When you are making a master tape or backing up
songs to a Zip disk, this operation deletes song data
that has become unnecessary. This operation cannot be
undone with the Undo function.
When you create a song, it will automatically be given
a name like “InitSong001.” However this makes it dif-
ficult to remember what song it is. We recommend
that you assign a unique name to your song so that
data management will be easier.
1 . Select the drive contains the song you want to
erase as the current drive.
1 . Make the song whose name you want to change
2 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G Song
the current song.
Erase ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [SON G] several tim es u ntil “SN G Song
3 . Press [YES].
Name/ Prtct?” appears in the display.
The names of the songs stored on the current drive
will appear. An asterisk “Q” will appear at the begin-
ning of the current song.
3 . Press [YES].
The name of the song (Song Name) appears in the dis-
play.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial. Select the song
that you wish to erase.
4 . Move the cursor so that the character that you
wish to modify will blink. Use CURSOR[
].
]
Song Number
Song Name
[
5 . Modify the character. Rotate the TIME/ VALUE
dial. By holding down [SHIFT] as you rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial you can make the characters
change more rapidly.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
6 . When you have finished writing the song name or
comments, hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE
(ZERO)].
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
“STORE OK ?” appears in the display.
Sample Rate
Recording Mode
7 . Press [YES].
The song is saved.
5 . Press [YES].
6 . A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the procedure,
then press [CANCEL (NO)].
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
7 . If the song you are erasing is not the current song,
“STORE Current?” then appears in the display.
Ad ju stin g th e Le ve ls fo r Ea ch
Tra ck
8 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
You can adjust the volume level of each input and
track channel without using the channel faders. You
can raise the volume when playing back tracks that
were recorded at low levels, avoid distorted sound
that may occur when adjusting the channel equalizers,
and be able to operate with the channel faders near 0
dB. Use the following procedure.
9 . When the song has been erased, return to Play
condition.
* If the current song has been erased, the lowest-numbered
song in the current drive will be selected as the current
song.
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channels
whose volume levels you wish to adjust.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] to let “ATT =”
appears in the display.
1 5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ph a se
This selects the phase (NRM, INV) for each channel.
Usually, “NRM” is selected.
Attenuation (In the example, 0 dB)
NRM: Normal phase (same phase as the input)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
INV:
Inverted phase (opposite phase)
dB
0
4
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
12
24
48
Return to Play condition.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
De te rm in in g O u tp u t
The VS-880EX features four analog output jacks (MAS-
TER jacks L/ R, AUX jacksL/ R) and two digital con-
nectors (DIGITAL OUT1, DIGITAL OUT2), each of
which can have various signals assigned to it. Set the
output for each output jacks or connectors using the
following procedure.
ATT (Atte n u a tio n )
Adjusts the volume level (-12–+12 dB) of each chan-
nel’s digital signal.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
MASTER Ja ck s
W h e n Usin g Ba la n ce d In p u ts
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)].
The VS-880EX features balanced (TRS) INPUT jacks,
each one configure as follows.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] to let “Master
Sel =” appears in the display.
3 . Determine what is to be output from the MASTER
jacks by rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Master Select (In the example, MIX)
However, some audio devices have the opposite HOT
(TIP) and COLD (RING) configuration. Using such
equipment as is may result in poor sound placement,
disintegration of the left-right balance, and a loss of
the separation between left and right sounds when
using stereo inputs. In such instances, you need to
switch the phase of each channel.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] for the channels
Ma ste r Se l (Ma ste r Se le ct)
whose phase you wish to switch.
This selects what sounds are heard through the MAS-
TER jacks.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] to let “Phase”
appears in the display.
MIX: The sounds assigned to the MIX bus.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
AUX: The sounds assigned to the AUX bus.
Phase (In the example, Inverted phase)
FX1: The sounds assigned to the (FX1) EFFECT bus.
FX2: The sounds assigned to the (FX2) EFFECT bus.
REC: All sounds assigned to the RECORDING bus.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
5 . “MasterLevel=” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the volume of the
sound that is output from the MASTER jacks. This
value is linked with master fader on the top panel.
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
DIGITAL O UT Co n n e cto rs
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)].
7 . “Master Bal=” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the left/ right balance
of the sound that is output from the MASTER
jacks.
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] to let
“DigitalOut1=” appears in the display.
3 . Determine what is to be output from the DIGI-
TAL OUT1 con n ectors by rotatin g th e
TIME/ VALUE dial.
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Digital Out 1 (In the example, MST)
AUX Ja ck s
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)].
dB
0
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
]o let “AUX
4
Out =” appears in the display.
12
24
48
3 . Determine what is to be output from the AUX
jacks by rotating the TIME/ VALUE dial.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
AUX Out (In the example, AUX)
DO UT1 (DIGITAL O UT1 )
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
This selects what sounds are heard through the DIGI-
TAL OUT1 (coaxial) connector.
dB
0
4
MST: Same sound as is heard from the MASTER
jacks (MIX bus).
12
24
48
AUX: The sounds assigned to the AUX bus.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
FX1: The sounds assigned to the (FX1) EFFECT bus.
FX2: The sounds assigned to the (FX2) EFFECT bus.
AUX O u t
1-2:
3-4:
5-6:
7-8:
The sounds assigned to the Tracks 1–2.
The sounds assigned to the Tracks 3–4.
The sounds assigned to the Tracks 5–6.
The sounds assigned to the Tracks 7–8.
This selects what sounds are heard through the AUX
jacks.
AUX: The sounds assigned to the AUX bus.
FX1: The sounds assigned to the (FX1) EFFECT bus.
FX2: The sounds assigned to the (FX2) EFFECT bus.
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
* The DIGITAL OUT2 (optical) connector is set in the
same way. In this case, make the display read
“DigitalOut2” in step 2.
5 . “AUX Level=” appears in the display. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the volume of the
sound that is output from the AUX jacks. This
value is linked with AUX SEND knob on the top
panel.
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
7 . “AUX Bal=” ap p ears in the d isp lay. Use the
TIME/ VALUE dial to adjust the left/ right balance
of the sound that is output from the AUX jacks.
1 5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Co n firm in g Th a t a Drive is
N o t Da m a g e d (Drive Ch e ck )
DIRECT O UT
The sounds from each of the Tracks 1–4 or Tracks 5–8
are output from separate analog jacks.
You can check the drive you are using to make sure it
can be read correctly. This is referred to as Drive
Check.
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)].
2 . Press PARAMETER [
] [
] to let “DIR
This provides a way to determine whether a failure
during Song Copy (p. 102) or DAT Backup (p. 129) is
due to a problem in the song itself that was saved on
disk, whether the problem is with the connections, or
if there is a problem of some other kind.
OUT=” appears in the display.
3 . Determine what is to be output from the DIRECT
OUT by rotating the TIME/ VALUE dial.
DIR O UT (Dire ct O u t)
If data cannot be read correctly, the display will indi-
cate the song in which the error occurred.
The metronome sound is not output.
Off: The DIRECT OUT is not use.
1–4: The sounds from Tracks 1–4 are output from
the following jacks. In this case, the settings for
the MASTER and AUX jacks are not in effect.
The sounds from Tracks 1 and 2 are output
from th e PH ON ES jack. Ad d ition ally, th e
sounds output from the DIGITAL OUT connec-
tors are specified in the Master Block (p. 159).
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Drive
Check ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Select the drive that you wish to check. Rotate the
TIME/ VALUE dial.
Ch e ck Drive (Ch e ck d rive )
Select the disk drive that you wish to check.
Track 1: MASTER jack (L)
Track 2: MASTER jack (R)
Track 3: AUX A jack (L)
Track 4: AUX A jack (R)
4 . When you have selected the drive you wish to
check, press [YES].
5 . A confirmation message ask you that you want to
proceed with the Drive Check appears in the dis-
play. Press [YES].
5–8: The sounds from Tracks 5–8 are output from
the following jacks. In this case, the settings for
the MASTER and AUX jacks are not in effect.
The sounds from Tracks 5 and 6 are output
from th e PH ON ES jack. Ad d ition ally, th e
sounds output from the DIGITAL OUT connec-
tors are specified in the Master Block (p. 159).
6 . “STORE Current?” appears in the display. If you
wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if not,
then press [NO]. If you have selected a demo
song, then press [NO].
7 . Drive Check is the executed. Progress of the oper-
ation is shown in the display. Do not turn off the
power until the operation is completed.
Track 5: MASTER jack (L)
Track 6: MASTER jack (R)
Track 7: AUX A jack (L)
Track 8: AUX A jack (R)
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Re su ltList (Drive ch e ck re su lts)
System:
Location where basic data used by the
VS-880EX for recording and playback is
stored
To Ca n ce l th e Drive Ch e ck
You can use the following procedure to cancel the
Drive Check.
SongList:
Location w here the saved songs are
managed
1 . Press [CANCEL (NO)].
“Cancel?” appears in the display.
InitSong001: Each song (in actual use, the song name
2 . Press [YES].
is displayed)
Drive Check is canceled.
InitSong002:
:
8 . When Drive Check is completed, the display
InitSong 200:
screen appears as shown below.
Clu ste rIn fo . (Clu ste r in fo rm a tio n )
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Total:
Number of clusters on the entire disk
dB
0
Defect:
Number of clusters tagged as unusable
memory
4
12
24
48
Used:
Free:
Number of clusters currently being used
Number of clusters currently not being
used
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
X-LinkErr: Number of cross-linked clusters
If th e d isp la y in d ica te s “ N o Err”
LooseArea: Number of clusters whose links are lost
9 -1 . The entire disk could be read correctly. Press
IllegalDIR: N u m ber of d irectories w ith incorrect
[YES].
content
Return to Play condition.
ReadError: Number of read errors detected by this
operation
If th e d isp la y in d ica te s “ ___ Err”
The underlines portion will display the number of
tim es th at a read error occu rred . Rotate th e
TIME/ VALUE dial to check the list.
Clu ste rs
These are the smallest unit of memory that the VS-
880EX uses to manage data on a disk drive. The
smallest physical units on a disk drive are called
either sectors or blocks, and depending on the
device, the size that is handled can be selected.
For example, the VS-880EX is designed to use
disks with 512 bytes/ sector. When the VS-880EX
manages song data, it handles 64 sectors as a sin-
gle unit (cluster). This means that 512 (bytes) x 64
(sectors) = 32768 bytes (32 kilobytes) is one cluster.
The display will indicate “Err” for locations where an
error was found. Locations for which “OK” was dis-
played have no problems.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
Cro ss Lin k
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
This is an error in which a cluster is detected as
being included in two or more songs. In such a
case, a completely different song may be heard in
the middle of a song. Such an error condition is
referred to as a cross link.
1 6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
Re co ve rRe su lt (Re co ve ry re su lt)
InitSong001:
Lo o se Are a s
An error in which clusters not included in any
song are detected as containing valid data. In this
case, the VS-880EX will not store data in those
clusters. A situation which causes this error to
occur is called a loose area.
InitSong003: Modified songs (in actual operation, the
song name)
:
InitSong200:
Clu ste rIn fo . (Clu ste r in fo rm a tio n )
Total:
Number of clusters on the entire disk
Dire cto rie s
Defect: N u m ber of clu sters m arked as u nu sable
The VS-880EX stores data such as audio data or
parameter values on disk in units called files. In
order to manage large numbers of files, the VS-
880EX keeps lists of file names and the locations
on disk in which the data of these files is stored.
These lists are called directories.
memory
Used: Number of clusters currently being used
Free:
Number of clusters currently unused
9 -5 . Press [YES].
The “IllegalDIR” message will appear when this
list is incorrect. For example, this message will
appear if the data of a certain file is supposed to
be recorded in an area of the disk which does not
actually exist, or if the list itself becomes perma-
nently unreadable.
Return to Play condition.
If a disk error is found, it is possible to erase only the
data that was lost as a result of the error (Recover). I.e.,
the disk can be restored to a correct operating condi-
tion while keeping as much possible of the non-error
data.
* This procedure does not correct the disk error. All error
locations will be erased. This means that depending on the
location in which the error occurred, a take that was
recorded may no longer be playable, auto mix data may be
lost, or even the entire song itself may be erased. If the
error has occurred in the system or song list, the probabil-
ity of this danger is especially high.
9 -2 . Press [ENTER (YES)].
“RecoverDriveTry?” appears in the display.
9 -3 . The message “You’ll Lose Data” will appears in
the display. Press [YES].
The Recover operation is executed. If you want to can-
cel the operation, press [CANCEL (NO)].
9 -4 . When the recovery is finished, the results are
shown on the display screen. Songs that have
been partially altered are indicated by “Adj”;
deleted songs are indicated by “Del.” Songs that
have not been changed are not indicated. Please
check the display.
1 6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 3 Ma k in g Glo b a l Se ttin g s a n d Ch e ck in g Co n d itio n s
This section describes the settings that affect the over-
Pla y List
all functioning of the VS-880EX.
The way in which sound is recorded in the various
tracks before and after the current time will be dis-
Sw itch in g th e Disp la y
played.
Co n te n t
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
In Play condition, you can hold down [SHIFT] and
dB
press [DISPLAY (PLAY)] to switch the contents of the
0
bar display. In Edit condition, the contents of the dis-
4
12
play will change depending on the selected parameter
or operation.
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Pre Le ve l
The volume of each channel before passing through
the channel faders will be displayed. The AUX and
MASTER fields indicate the respective volume levels
of the signal after passing through the AUX knob and
the master fader.
Fe d e r/ Pa n
The settings of the master fader and the PAN knob
and fader of each channel will be displayed. If the dis-
played location of the PAN knobs or faders is different
than the actual location (as when the mixer mode has
been switched), the current location of the PAN knob
or fader will blink.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
12
24
48
dB
0
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Po st Le ve l
The volume of each channel after passing through the
channel faders will be displayed. The AUX and MAS-
TER fields indicate the respective volume levels of the
signal after passing through the AUX knob and the
master fader.
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Ch e ck in g th e Size o f a
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Re co rd e d Pe rfo rm a n ce
dB
0
4
You can see the Song Name, Song Number, Sample
Rate, Recording Mode, and the actual used capacity of
the current song by the following operation.
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
1 . Stop the song playback. When the song is per-
formed, press [STOP].
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
2 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
The display will indicate Song Information briefly.
“SYS FaderMatch” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Song Number
Song Name
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
Fa d e r Ma tch
Here, the fader is selected to control the sound if there
is a discrepancy between the current fader and the
actual volume level.
dB
0
4
12
24
48
Jump: The actual value will change at the instant
that the fader is moved.
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
Null: No change is made unless the fader or pan
Sample Rate
Recording Mode
knob is moved to its current actual value.
Song Capacity (In the example, 72 MB)
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* The actual used capacity of the song is displayed as 1 MB
= 1,000,000 bytes. The displayed value is the approximate
standard value.
Ho ld in g Le ve l Me te r Pe a k s
You can hold the display of maximum values (peaks)
while the level meter appears in the graphic display.
Sy ste m Se ttin g s fo r Ea ch
So n g
These are overall settings that can saved in any song.
These settings are lost if the power is turned off with-
out the song being saved, or if the System settings are
reset to their original conditions.
Peak display
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
dB
0
4
12
24
48
Ha vin g th e Vo lu m e Ch a n g e a s So o n
a s th e Fa d e rs a re Mo ve d
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
When you press [FADER (EDIT)] to switch between
input and track channels or to recall Scenes, there will
be times when fader positions may not correspond to
their actual volume settings. In such instances, the
position of each fader is represented by a black dot,
and the actual level that is set is represented by a
white circle. Use the following procedure when you
wish to have the volume change as soon as the faders
are moved.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
PeakHoldSw=” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS System PRM ?” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Pe a k Ho ld Sw (Pe a k Ho ld Sw itch )
With this set to “On,” the level meter in the graphic
display holds the display of peak levels.
W h e n Usin g th e Fo o t Sw itch
With an optional foot switch (such as the Roland DP-2
or BOSS FU-5U) connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack,
you can choose how the foot switch functions.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition. Now, the peak display is
reset (cleared ) each tim e [PLAY (DISPLAY)] is
pressed.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Ch e ck in g th e Re m a in in g Disk Sp a ce
“SYS Foot Sw=” appears in the display.
The amount of free disk space available for recording
the current song is displayed as “REMAINING TIME”
field in the display. You can select the type of display
for this.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Fo o t Sw (Fo o t Sw itch )
This sets the foot switch function.
Play/Stop: Pressing the switch alternately starts and
CONDITION MARKER#
TIME
stops playback of the song.
dB
0
Record:
Works the same as the [REC] button. Use
this to sw itch betw een record ing and
p layback d u rin g m an u al Pu n ch -In
Recording.
4
12
24
48
INPUT TRACK
AUX MASTER
TapMarker: Works the sam e as the [TAP] bu tton.
Mark points are set w hen the ped al is
pressed.
Remaining amount (in the example, 294 minutes 40 seconds)
Next:
Works the same as the [NEXT] button.
Each time the pedal is pressed recalls the
next marker.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
Previous: Works the same as the [PREVIOUS] but-
ton. Each time the pedal is pressed recalls
the previous marker.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS RemainDsp=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
GPI:
This controls start and stopping of play-
back of the song accord ing to the GPI
trigger signal received from the FOOT
SWITCH jack.
Re m a in Dsp (Re m a in in g Disp la y )
This selects how the remaining disk space is shown.
Time:
This indicates the time (minutes/ seconds)
left for recording.
GPI (Appendices p. 123)
CapaMB: Th is sh ow s th e actu al m em ory (in
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
megabytes).
Capa %: This indicates the remaining space as a per-
centage of the total disk space.
Event:
This shows the number of events used in
the recording.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
O ve ra ll Se ttin g s fo r th e VS-
W h e n Ho ld in g Do w n th e [SHIFT] Bu tto n
8 8 0 EX
If [SHIFT] is held down during the operation, the
Shift Lock function will be ignored. For example,
if you h old d ow n th e [SH IFT] an d p ress
[AUTOMIX (VARI PITCH)], Shift Lock will not be
turned on when you take your finger off [SHIFT].
The function of [SHIFT] itself remains in effect, so
the the Vari-Pitch fu nction is on at this tim e.
Ad d itionally, rotating the TIME/ VALUE d ial
while holding down the [SHIFT] button increases
or decreases the value of some parameter setting
by a factor of ten (or 1/ 10).
These are setting related to the overall operation of the
VS-880EX.
Ho ld in g th e fu n ctio n o f [SHIFT]
(Sh ift Lo ck )
You can tem p orarily hold fu nctions by p ressing
[SHIFT]. Operations such as switching V-tracks or sav-
ing songs can be performed with one hand.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
Disp la y in g Me a su re s a n d Be a ts
If both the metronome is being used and MIDI clock
messages are being transmitted, the measure and beat
of the song can be displayed in the graphic display.
When you are running in synchronization with an
external device or recording a song along with a previ-
ously-created tempo map, this allows you to operate
the VS-880EX just as though you were operating a
MIDI sequ encer. Set the m etronom e to sou nd as
described in “Sounding the Metronome” (p. 154).
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Shift Lock=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Sh ift Lo ck (Sh ift Lo ck Sw itch )
Setting to “On” temporarily holds the [SHIFT] button
function.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
Return to Play condition.
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
6 . Afterwards, the [SHIFT] button indicator light
goes on and off each time the button is pressed.
[SHIFT] is in effect when the indicator is lit. The
hold is lifted the next tim e another bu tton is
pressed or if the TIME/ VALUE dial is rotated.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MeasureDsp=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Me a su re Dsp
Use this to select whether or not the measure and beat
appear in the graphic display.
Ex a m p le Pro ce d u re fo r Sw itch in g th e So lo
Fu n ctio n O N
1 . Press [SHIFT] and immediately release the
button.
Always: The measure and beat are constantly dis-
played.
The SH IFT ind icator lights. The d isp lay w ill
briefly indicate “Shift Lock.” The display in the
“CONDITION” field will alternate between the
name of the current condition and “sft,” also indi-
cating that the Shift Lock function is on.
Auto:
The m easu re and beat are not d isp layed
when the metronome is not in use.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2 . Press[SOLO (EZ ROUTING)].
The display will briefly indicate “SOLO Mode
ON,” indicating that the Solo function is on. The
SHIFT indicator goes off.
1 6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
7 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Ad ju stin g th e Bu tto n Se n sitivity
Return to Play condition. The new SCSI ID number
becomes effective from the next time when the VS-
880EX is turned on.
On the VS-880EX, function of STATUS button differs
by it is hit and released quickly or it is held for longer
seconds. You can specify the length of this time that
the STATUS button must be held down in order to
change it’s function.
W h e n Th e re Is N o Ha rd Disk In sta lle d
Function When Pressed:
Changes the track status.
Even when there is no hard disk installed in the VS-
880EX, it still can be used with only a Zip drive con-
nected to the SCSI connector. In such instances, it
takes approximately 30 seconds after the power is
turned on of the VS-880EX to check its internal hard
disk connection status. To avoid this wait, you can
preset the VS-880EX not to attempt to use the internal
hard disk.
Function When Held Down: Confirms the channel ass-
igned to the track.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYSTEM
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SwitchTime=” appears in the display.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS DISK
PRM ?” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 . Press [YES].
Sw itch Tim e (Sw itch in g Tim e )
This designates the time the buttons must be held
down (0.3–2.0 seconds) in order to change functions.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS DSK:IDE Drv=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
IDE Drv (IDE Drive )
When not using the internal hard disk, set this to
“Off.” Normally, this is set to “On.”
Ch a n g in g th e VS-8 8 0 EX’s SCSI ID
N u m b e r
5 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
When connecting SCSI devices with the VS-880EX, the
SCSI ID number of each device must be set so that
none of the devices have the same ID number. The VS-
880EX’s SCSI ID number is set to “7” at the factory.
When connecting the VS-880EX to other SCSI devices
(for example, Zip drives or CD-R drives), be sure to set
the SCSI ID number for these other devices to a num-
ber other than “7.”
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
6 . Press [YES].
The song is saved.
7 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Retu rn to Play con d ition . Th e ch an ged settin g
becomes effective from the next time when the VS-
880EX is turned on.
If no other SCSI ID number is vacant, it is also possible
to change the SCSI ID number of the VS-880EX.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS DISK
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS DSK:SCSI Self=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
SCSI Se lf (SCSI Se lf ID N u m b e r)
This sets the VS-880EX’s own SCSI ID number (0–7).
5 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
6 . Press [YES].
The song is saved.
1 6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
O ve ra ll Se ttin g s fo r
Pla y b a ck a n d Re co rd in g
Ch a n g in g a t th e Le ve l a t W h ich th e
Pe a k In d ica to r Lig h ts
You can designate the level at which the peak indica-
tor lights for sounds input via the INPUT jacks (1–6).
These are settings related to the overall workings of
the Play and Record functions.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
Co n sta n tly Mo n ito rin g th e In p u t
So u rce
2 . Press [YES].
On channels for which Track Status is set to REC,
playing back the song in record ready mode (REC
indicator blinking) will allow you to monitor the per-
formance that is recorded in the track, and during
recording (REC indicator lit) you will be able to moni-
tor the input source. At this time, pressing [STATUS]
will let you switch between monitoring the track and
monitoring the input source.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“Peak Level=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Pe a k Le ve l
This sets the volume level at which the peak indicator
lights.
CLIP: The indicator lights when the sound distorts.
It is also possible to make settings so that the input
source is always monitored.
-3dB: The indicator lights 3 dB before the sound dis-
torts.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
-6dB: The indicator lights 6 dB before the sound dis-
PRM ?” appears in the display.
torts.
2 . Press [YES].
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Record Mon=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Re co rd Mo n (Re co rd Mo n ito r)
This switches between track and source monitoring.
AUTO:
This switches monitoring between track
and source.
SOURCE: This sets the VS-880EX to m onitor the
source at all times.
While
During
During
stopped
playback
recording
AUTO
SOURCE TRACK/ SOURCE SOURCE
SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE
SOURCE
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Sto p p in g Au to m a tica lly
You can cause song playback to stop automatically at
a marker.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Marker Stop=” appears in the display.
1 6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Re se ttin g Mix e r a n d Sy ste m
Se ttin g s to Th e ir O rig in a l
Sta te
Ma rk e r Sto p
When this is set to “On,” playback of the song stops
automatically when a designated marker is reached.
After repeatedly making new settings to the input
mixer, track mixer, and Master Block, as well as after
changing the content of settings in System condition,
you can restore the initial parameters existing when
you started to create a song.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
6 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
When the song reaches the location containing the
marker, playback then stops.
* Even if you restore the settings to their initial state, the
song, scene, tempo map and sync track data will not be
lost. Furthermore, the IDE drive (p. 167), SCSI self ID (p.
167), Scene Mode (p. 74), Shift Lock (p. 166), and
Numerics Type (p. 153) settings will not return to their
default state.
If N o ise Be tw e e n Se g m e n ts is
O b tru sive
In the seams or breaks that occur when recording is
begun or ended or when a phrase is copied, obtrusive
noise may occur. The VS-880EX fades-in and fades-out
these breaks so that this noise will not be heard. If
objectionable noise occurs, you can adjust the length of
the fade-in and fade-out.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Init Mix/ SysPRM ?” appears in the display.
* It is not possible to set the fade-in/fade-out time to 0. Thus
in some cases, such as if you copy a sustained sound such
as strings and use it elsewhere, the break may be even
more noticeable than if there had been no fade.
4 . Press [YES].
A message will ask you to confirm that you really
want to restore the mixer to the initial settings.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System
5 . Press [YES]. To cancel the operation press [NO].
When the mixer settings return to the initial state, you
will be in Play condition.
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Fade Length=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Fa d e Le n g th
This sets the length (2, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 ms) of the
fade-in or fade-out.
5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 4 Ta k e in Ad va n ta g e s o f th e VS-8 8 0 EX (id e a a n d e x a m p le s)
Along with the functions or external devices explained in earlier chapters, this
chapter explains some actual ways and gives some tips in which the VS-880EX
can be used effectively. First press [PLAY (DISPLAY)], and begin each operation
from Play condition.
Sy n ch ro n izin g th e O p e ra tio n s o f Tw o VS-8 8 0 EX Un its
The VS-880EX is compatible with MMC. Here, we explain how the operation of
two VS-880EX units can be synchronized. One VS-880EX acts as the MMC/ MTC
master, and the other acts as the MMC/ MTC slave. Make connections as
described below.
MMC (Appendices p. 124)
INPUT 1, 2
MIDI OUT
MASTER L, R
MIDI IN
MASTER
SLAVE
* In this example, you can use the master’s Stereo In function for the mix balance
between the master and slave VS-880EXs (p. 152). First adjust the individual track
balances on both machines. Of course, you can also send the output of the master
and slave VS-880EXs to a separate mixer. However, the master and slave units can-
not be connected using digital connections.
Se ttin g s fo r th e Ma ste r VS-8 8 0 EX
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI PRM ?” appears in the dis-
play.
2 . Press [YES].
“SYS MID:DeviceID=” appears in the display.
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
De vice ID
This sets the Device ID number (1–32) that is used when exchanging exclusive
messages (mixer parameters) with an external MIDI device. Exclusive messages
can be transmitted and received between devices which have the same Device
ID number setting. Here, set this to “17.”
1 7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
* When “C.C.” or “Excl” is selected, making mixer adjust-
ments on the master VS-880EX makes the same adjust-
ments to the slave VS-880EX mixer. For more detailed
information about Exclusive messages, please refer to
“MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p. 74).
4 . Press PARAMETER [
“SYS MID:MIDIThr=” appears in the display.
].
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIDITh r (MIDI Th ru Sw itch )
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/ THRU
connector. For now, set this to “Out.”
1 2 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
Out: The connector transmits MIDI message such as
metronome Note messages or MTC from the
VS-880EX.
1 3 . Press [YES].
“SYS Syn:Source=” appears in the display.
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con-
nector are retransmitted from the connector
without any changes.
1 4 . Make sure that the Sync Source is set to “INT.”
Sy n c So u rce
This determines how the VS-880EX is synchronized
with other devices. Here, set this to “INT.”
6 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID:SysEx.Tx.=” appears in the display.
INT: The VS-880EX runs according to its own inter-
nal clock. Select this setting when you are not
synchronizing with other devices or when you
want external MIDI devices to be controlled by
synchronization signals from the VS-880EX.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Sy sEx .Tx . (Sy ste m Ex clu sive Tra n sm it Sw itch )
Exclusive messages are transmitted when this is set to
“On.” At this time, set this to “On.”
EXT: The VS-880EX is controlled with synchroniza-
tion signals (MTC) from the connected external
MIDI device. In this case, the VS-880EX does not
operate unless it is receiving MTC signals. Select
this setting w hen you w ant to use the MTC
from an external MIDI device to control the VS-
880EX.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS MID:MMC=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MMC (MMC Mo d e )
This setting d etermines how the VS-880EX imple-
ments MMC. Set this to “MASTER.”
1 5 . Press PARAMETER [
“SYS Syn:Gen.=” appears in the display.
].
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
1 6 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-880EX func-
tions as the master device for external MIDI
equipment.
Ge n . (Ge n e ra to r)
This selects the type of synchronization signal trans-
mitted from the MIDI OUT connector. For now, set
this to “MTC.”
SLAVE: MMC is received. The VS-880EX functions
as a slave device for external MIDI equip-
ment.
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MTC:
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is
“SYS MID:CtrType=” appears in the display.
transmitted.
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track
CtrTy p e (Mix e r Co n tro l Ty p e )
is transmitted.
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an exter-
nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “Off.”
1 7 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Syn:MTC Type=” appears in the display.
1 8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MTC Ty p e (MTC Ty p e )
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
This selects the type of MTC (30, 29N, 29D, 25, or 24).
Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS-
880EX. Here, select “30.”
not transmitted or received.
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
messages.
1 9 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes-
sages.
Return to Play condition.
1 7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
Se ttin g s fo r th e Sla ve VS-8 8 0 EX
not transmitted or received.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
PRM ?” appears in the display.
messages.
2 . Press [YES].
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes-
“SYS MID:DeviceID=” appears in the display.
sages.
* When “C.C.” or “Excl” is selected, making mixer adjust-
ments on the master VS-880EX makes the same adjust-
ments to the slave VS-880EX mixer. For more detailed
information about Exclusive messages, please refer to
“MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p. 74).
3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
De vice ID
This sets the Device ID number (1–32) that is used
when exchanging exclusive messages (mixer parame-
ters) with an external MIDI device. Exclusive mes-
sages can be tran sm itted an d received betw een
devices which have the same Device ID number set-
ting. Here, set this to “17.”
1 0 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
1 1 . Press [YES].
1 2 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Syn:ErrLevel=” appears in the display.
“SYS MID:SysEx.Rx.=” appears in the display.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
ErrLe ve l (Erro r Le ve l)
Sy sEx .Rx . (Sy ste m Ex clu sive Re ce ive Sw itch )
Exclusive messages are received when this is set to
“On.” At this time, set this to “On.” The Exclusive
messages can be received when the VS-880EX is in
Play condition.
This sets the interval (0–10) for checking MTC receiv-
ing status w hen synchronize VS-880EX w ith MTC
from an external MIDI device. If the MTC is not being
sent continuously, the VS-880EX checks the MTC and
if there is an error, cancels synchronization. By setting
a longer interval under such circumstances, synchro-
nization can continue, even if there is a certain degree
of error. Normally, set this to “5.”
6 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS MID:MMC=” appears in the display.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
].
MMC (MMC Mo d e )
“SYS Syn:MTC Type=” appears in the display.
This setting d etermines how the VS-880EX imple-
ments MMC. Set this to “SLAVE.”
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
MTC Ty p e (MTC Ty p e )
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-880EX func-
tions as the master device for external MIDI
equipment.
This selects the type of MTC (30, 29N, 29D, 25, or 24).
Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS-
880EX. Here, select “30.”
SLAVE: MMC is received. The VS-880EX functions
as a slave device for external MIDI equip-
ment.
1 6 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 7 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SYSTEM].
The “SYNC MODE” field of the display will show
“EXT,” indicating that the unit is waiting to receive
MTC.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID:CtrType=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
In this condition, the slave VS-880EX is operated
synchrony when the master VS-880EX is operated.
CtrTy p e (Mix e r Co n tro l Ty p e )
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an exter-
nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “Off.”
1 7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith Ca k e w a lk Pro Au d io (MMC)
The VS-880EX supports MMC. This means that when two VS-880EX units are
synchronized or when a VS-880EX is used in conjunction with an MMC-support-
ing MIDI sequencer etc., operations such as song playback, stop and fast-for-
ward can be performed by operating only the master device.
MMC (Appendices p. 124)
* Some MIDI devices are not compatible with the MMC used by the VS-880EX. If you
are using such a device, the VS-880EX cannot be operated in the manner described in
this Owner’s Manual. For more detailed information about MMC functions for the
VS-880EX, please refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p. 74).
Here, we will see an example of synchronizing the VS-880EX with the Cakewalk
Pro Audio software application. Cakewalk Pro Audio is a computer-based
sequencer program compatible with MMC and MTC (for Windows 95). Make
the connections as shown below, referring to the Cakewalk owner’s manual as
you go along.
MIDI Cable
Computer
MIDI Cable
Cakewalk
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Serial Port
(IOIO)
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Serial MIDI
Driver
MIDI
Driver
MIDI Interface
VOLUME
Computer Cable
MIDI IN
B
PHONES
COMPUTER
MIDI Sound Generator
In this example, Cakewalk is the master device when MMC is used, and the VS-
880EX is the master device when using MTC. Cakewalk can be used to control such
operations of the VS-880EX as playback, stopping, switching track status, and more.
* Use a MIDI interface when connecting the VS-880EX to a computer. You
can also use a MIDI interface in connecting a computer to a sound generator.
1 7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
CtrTy p e (Mix e r Co n tro l Ty p e )
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
Se ttin g s fo r th e VS-8 8 0 EX
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an exter-
nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “C.C..”
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
“SYS MID:MIDIThr=” appears in the display.
not transmitted or received.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
messages.
MIDITh r (MIDI Th ru Sw itch )
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/ THRU
connector. For now, set this to “Out.”
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes-
sages.
Out: The connector transmits MIDI message such as
metronome Note messages or MTC from the
VS-880EX.
1 1 . Press [SYSTEM] several tim es u n til “SYS
Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the display.
1 2 . Press [YES].
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con-
nector are retransmitted from the connector
without any changes.
“SYS Syn:Source=” appears in the display.
1 3 . Make sure that the Sync Source is set to “INT.”
5 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Sy n c So u rce
“SYS MID:SysEx.Rx.=” appears in the display.
This determines how the VS-880EX is synchronized
with other devices. Here, set this to “INT.”
6 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
INT: The VS-880EX runs according to its own inter-
nal clock. Select this setting when you are not
synchronizing with other devices or when you
want external MIDI devices to be controlled by
synchronization signals from the VS-880EX.
Sy sEx .Rx . (Sy ste m Ex clu sive Re ce ive Sw itch )
Exclusive messages are received when this is set to
“On.” At this time, set this to “On.” The Exclusive
messages can be received when the VS-880EX is in
Play condition.
EXT: The VS-880EX is controlled with synchroniza-
tion signals (MTC) from the connected external
MIDI device. In this case, the VS-880EX does
not operate unless it is receiving MTC signals.
Select this setting when you want to use the
MTC from an external MIDI device to control
the VS-880EX.
7 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS MID:MMC=” appears in the display.
8 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MMC (MMC Mo d e )
This setting d etermines how the VS-880EX imple-
ments MMC. Set this to “SLAVE.”
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
“SYS Syn:Gen.=” appears in the display.
].
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-880EX func-
tions as the m aster d evice for external
MIDI equipment.
Ge n . (Ge n e ra to r)
This selects the type of synchronization signal trans-
mitted from the MIDI OUT connector. For now, set
this to “MTC.”
SLAVE: MMC is received. The VS-880EX functions
as a slave device for external MIDI equip-
ment.
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
9 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
MTC:
“SYS MID:CtrType=” appears in the display.
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is
1 0 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
transmitted.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track
is transmitted.
1 7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
1 6 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Syn:MTC Type=” appears in the display.
1 7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MTC Ty p e (MTC Ty p e )
This selects the type of MTC (30, 29N, 29D, 25, or 24).
Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS-
880EX. Here, select “30.”
1 8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Se ttin g s fo r Ca k e w a lk Pro Au d io
Make th e settin gs for Cakew alk Pro Au d io as
described below. For more detailed information about
Cakewalk, please refer to the Cakewalk owner’s man-
ual.
Setting | Clock:
MTC (receives MTC)
Setting | MIDI Out:
Check “Transmit MMC” (sends MMC)
Setting | Time Format:
MTC from the VS-880EX (here, set “30”)
* ”30 Frame Drop” in Cakewalk corresponds to “29D” on
the VS-880EX.
Under this condition, when playback is begun with
Cakewalk, MMC is transmitted to the VS-880EX,
and upon receiving the MMC, the VS-880EX also
begins playback. During playback, MTC is sent
from the VS-880EX to Cakewalk, thus synchroniz-
ing operations.
1 7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Dig ita l Co n n e ctio n s Ca n n o t Be Use d
When Sync Source is set to “EXT,” the VS-880EX operates according to the
Clock signal (MTC) transmitted by the connected MIDI device. At such times, if
you also set the master Clock to “DIGIN1” or “DIGIN2,” the VS-880EX then
also attempts to operate according to the Clock (digital signal) from the exter-
nal digital device. This means the internal clock becomes mismatched. Thus, in
the present example, the slave VS-880EX (B) cannot record the digital signals
transmitted by the master VS-880EX (A).
DIGITAL OUT
MIDI OUT
DIGITAL IN
MIDI IN
MASTER (A)
SLAVE (B)
When the master Clock is set to “DIGIN1” or “DIGIN2,” the VS-880EX operates
according to the Clock (digital signal) transmitted by the connected MIDI
device. You can thus make MTC the master Clock. However, in this case, the
slave VS-880EX (B) attempts to operate according to the MTC transmitted by
the master VS-880EX (A), while the master VS-880EX (A) attempts to operate
according to the digital signals transmitted by the slave VS-880EX (B). In such
instances, since this ends up in there being no reference clock, the VS-880EX
cannot operate correctly.
DIGITAL IN
MIDI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
MIDI IN
MASTER (A)
SLAVE (B)
1 7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Ma k in g Dig ita l Co n n e ctio n s w ith Ca k e w a lk
When you have a sound card (such as Audiomedia III or CardD) that features
digital input and output connectors installed in your computer, you can connect
Cakewalk and your VS-880EX digitally. This is convenient when, for example,
you want to record the audio tracks from the VS-880EX to Cakewalk via a digital
connection, edit the material in Cakewalk, and then send it back via the digital
connection to the VS-880EX for mixdown. Be sure to read the owner’s manuals
for Cakewalk as well as the sound card you are using.
Ab o u t So u n d Ca rd s
Even when using the digital connections as described in the example, noise
originating inside the computer in the vicinity of the sound card may be
introduced into the sound. The level of noise will vary according to the com-
puter’s exterior panels, interior boards, the condition of the cable connec-
tions, etc. In general, high-performance sound cards that tend to resist this
kind of noise better.
With sound cards that feature both analog and digital input and output, it
may be necessary to set the card to use the digital input and output. After
carefully reading the owner’s manual for your sound card, make the neces-
sary settings to enable the sound card to use the digital input and output
connectors.
Ab o u t th e Re co rd in g Mo d e
Even when using the digital connections as described in the example, since
audio tracks are recorded from the VS-880EX to Cakewalk, edited, and then
sent back to the VS-880EX, this can be likened to repeated track bouncing.
Thus, we recommend that you to use a recording mode featuring higher
quality sound, such as “MAS” or “MT1.”
1 7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Re co rd in g to Ca k e w a lk
1 . Make the connections as shown below.
Computer
Cakewalk
MIDI Interface
Sound Card
MIDI
Driver
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
DIGITAL
IN
coaxial or optical
DIGITAL
OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
VS-880EX
2 . Follow the procedure as described in “Settings for the VS-880EX” (p. 195)
and “Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio” (p. 196), set up the system so that the
VS-880EX and Cakewalk are synchronized.
3 . Make the settings to Cakewalk as shown below. For more detailed informa-
tion, please refer to your Cakewalk owner’s manual.
Settings | Audio Options... | Advanced | SMPTE/MTC Sync: “High-Quality”
* If your computer does not feature adequate performance, even with the above set-
tings, you may not be able to get stable digital audio output, meaning the sound will
suffer when digital connections are used. Additionally, Cakewalk Pro Audio 5.0 and
Cakewalk Professional 5.0 do not feature the above-mentioned settings. We recom-
mend upgrading to Version 6.0.
In the present status/condition, when record is begun with Cakewalk, MMC
is transmitted to the VS-880EX, and upon receiving the MMC, the VS-880EX
also begins playback. During playback, MTC is sent from the VS-880EX to
Cakewalk, thus synchronizing operations.
1 7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Re co rd in g to th e VS-8 8 0 EX
1 . Make the connections as shown below.
Computer
Cakewalk
MIDI Interface
Sound Card
MIDI
Driver
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
DIGITAL
OUT
coaxial or optical
DIGITAL
IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
VS-880EX
2 . Follow the procedure as described in “Settings for the VS-880EX” (p. 195)
and “Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio” (p. 196), set up the system so that the
VS-880EX and Cakewalk are synchronized.
3 . Make the settings to Cakewalk as shown below. For more detailed informa-
tion, please refer to your Cakewalk owner’s manual.
Settings | Audio Options... | Advanced | SMPTE/MTC Sync: “High-Quality”
* If your computer does not feature adequate performance, even with the above set-
tings, you may not be able to get stable digital audio output, meaning the sound will
suffer when digital connections are used. Additionally, Cakewalk Pro Audio 5.0 and
Cakewalk Professional 5.0 do not feature the above-mentioned settings. We recom-
mend upgrading to Version 6.0.
4 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System PRM?” appears in the dis-
play.
5 . Press [YES].
6 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until “SYS MasterClk=” appears in
the display.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Ma ste r Clo ck
This is used to select the reference clock for the VS-880EX operations. Here, set
this to “DIGIN1” or “DIGIN2.”
DIGIN1: Based on the digital signal received at the DIGITAL IN connector
(coaxial).
INT:
Based on the VS-880EX’s internal clock.
DIGIN2: Based on the digital signal received at the DIGITAL IN connector
(optical).
8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
9 . Make the settings for the VS-880EX by following the procedure as described
in “Recording Digital Signals” (p. 55).
Under this condition, when playback is begun with Cakewalk, MMC is
transmitted to the VS-880EX, and upon receiving the MMC, the VS-880EX
also begins record. During playback, MTC is sent from the VS-880EX to
Cakewalk, thus synchronizing operations.
Usin g a n Ex te rn a l MIDI De vice to Ad ju st th e Mix e r (Co m p u Mix )
The VS-880EX can send and receive the mixer settings and movements as MIDI
messages. You can use an external MIDI controller to control the VS-880EX’s
faders, and by using a MIDI sequencer to record mixer settings and movements
during playback as MIDI song data, the mixer can be controlled automatically
by the MIDI sequencer when the song is played back later. This is referred to as
Compu Mix. Compu Mix uses Control Change messages and Exclusive mes-
sages.
This roughly describes how things proceed when performing operations using
Control Change messages. For more detailed information, please read the appro-
priate pages.
W h e n Usin g Ex clu sive Me ssa g e s
When working in Compu Mix, you should use normal Control Change mes-
sages. However, if the use of Control Change messages would affect other
MIDI devices in your setup, you may use System Exclusive message instead.
For m ore d etailed inform ation abou t Control Change m essages and
Exclusive messages, please refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p.
74).
1 8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Controller numbers correspond to the input mixer
parameters as follows.
Th e Co rre sp o n d e n ce Be tw e e n MIDI
Ch a n n e ls a n d Co n tro lle r N u m b e rs
Controller Number
Mixer Parameter
MIX Send Level
MIX Send Pan/ Bal
EQ L Freq.
MIDI channels correspond to the mixer channels as
shown below. For channel pairs linked with the Stereo
Link fu nction, Control Change m essages can be
exchanged using the odd-numbered channel’s MIDI
channel. Control Change messages transmitted via the
even-numbered channel’s MIDI channel are ignored.
8
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
88
89
EQ L Gain
EQ M Freq.
MIDI
Channel Mixer
Input
Track
Mixer
Effect Return Master
EQ M Gain
Mixer
Block
EQ M Q
1
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
EQ H Freq.
2
-
EQ H Gain
3
3
-
FX1 SND Level
FX1 SND Pan/ Bal
FX2 SND Level
FX2 SND Pan/ Bal
AUX Send Level
AUX Send Pan/ Bal
MIX Offset Level
MIX Offset Bal
4
4
-
5
5
-
6
6
-
7
7 (DIGITAL L)
-
-
8
8 (DIGITAL R)
11
12
13
16
-
-
-
-
ST IN
FX1
FX2
-
-
-
Controller numbers correspond to the effect return
mixer parameters as follows.
-
MST
Controller numbers correspond to the track mixer
parameters as follows.
Controller Number
Mixer Parameter
MIX Send Level
MIX Send Balance
68
70
Controller Number
Mixer Parameter
TRACK STATUS
MIX Send Level
MIX Send Pan
EQ L Freq.
3
Controller numbers correspond to the Master section
parameters as follows.
7
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
29
30
Controller Number
Mixer Parameter
Master Level
68
70
78
79
80
81
82
83
EQ L Gain
Master Balance
FX1 SND Level
FX1 SND Balance
FX2 SND Level
FX2 SND Balance
AUX Level
EQ M Freq.
EQ M Gain
EQ M Q
EQ H Freq.
EQ H Gain
FX1 SND Level
FX1 SND Pan/ Bal
FX2 SND Level
FX2 SND Pan/ Bal
AUX Send Level
AUX Send Pan/ Bal
MIX Offset Level
MIX Offset Bal
AUX Balance
1 8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
CtrLo ca l (Co n tro l Lo ca l Sw itch )
Pre p a ra tio n s fo r Co m p u Mix
When this is set to “Off,” actual volume levels remain
unchanged even when the faders on the top panel are
moved (fader movements have no effect). Normally,
this is set to “On.” At this time, set the Control Local
switch to “On.”
1 . Make the connections as shown below.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS MID:CtrType=” appears in the display.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
CtrTy p e (Mix e r Co n tro l Ty p e )
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an exter-
nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “C.C..”
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
not transmitted or received.
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
messages.
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes-
sages.
1 0 . Follow th e p roced u re as d escribed in
“Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers” (p. 116),
make the necessary settings in both the VS-880EX
and the MIDI sequencer to synchronize the two
machines. In addition, make sure to set the MIDI
sequencer so that MIDI messages received at the
MIDI In connector are not output from the MIDI
OUT connector.
MIDI Sequencer
2 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
PRM ?” appears in the display.
3 . Press [YES].
4 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID:MIDIThr=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIDITh r (MIDI Th ru Sw itch )
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/ THRU
connector. For now, set this to “Out.”
Out: The connector transmits MIDI message such as
metronome Note messages or MTC from the
VS-880EX.
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con-
nector are retransmitted from the connector
without any changes.
6 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS MID:CtrLocal=” appears in the display.
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Re co rd in g w ith Co m p u Mix
1 . Prepare the VS-880EX’s mixer settings (faders,
pan, etc.) and ready for playback the song.
2 . Put the MIDI sequencer in Record mod e, and
begin playback with the VS-880EX.
3 . When playback begins, immediately hold down
[SHIFT] and press [SCENE].
The mixer’s initial condition is transmitted from the
MIDI OUT connector.
4 . As you listen to the song, make adjustments to the
faders and other controls as needed.
5 . When playback of the song is finished, stop the
MIDI sequencer and the VS-880EX.
This completes the recording with Compu Mix. Save
the MIDI song data to a floppy disk or other storage
media. When you go back to the beginning of the
MIDI song data and the VS-880EX song, and then
begin playback on the VS-880EX, the mixer is con-
trolled according to the Compu Mix while the song is
played back.
To Ha ve th e Fa d e r Mo ve m e n ts
Ig n o re d
When playing back songs using Compu Mix, may be
you w an t th e actu al volu m e levels to rem ain
unchanged even when the faders on the top panel are
moved. In such instances, use the following proce-
dure.
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI
PRM ?” appears in the display.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press [PARAMETER [
] several times until
“MID:CtrLocal=” appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
CtrLo ca l (Co n tro l Lo ca l Sw itch )
When this is set to “Off,” actual volume levels remain
unchanged even when the faders on the top panel are
moved (fader movements have no effect). Normally,
this is set to “On.” At this time, set the Control Local
switch to “Off.”
4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith Vid e o Eq u ip m e n t
When used in combination with the Roland SI-80S, you can control playback
and stop functions on the VS-880EX with video equipment featuring a consumer
video interface that conforms to (RCTC) time code. Make the connections as
shown below, and refer to the SI-80S owner’s manual and the owner’s manual
for your video device.
L-CONNECTORS
IN
MIDI SYNC
OUT(MTC)
LANC
MIDI IN
SI-80S
Video Cassette Recorder
VS-880EX
1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI PRM ?” appears in the dis-
play.
2 . Press [YES].
3 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until “SYS MID:SysEx.Rx.=”
appears in the display.
4 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Sy sEx .Rx . (Sy ste m Ex clu sive Re ce ive Sw itch )
Exclusive messages are received when this is set to “On.” At this time, set this to
“On.” The Exclusive messages can be received when the VS-880EX is in Play
condition.
5 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS MID:MMC=” appears in the display.
6 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MMC (MMC Mo d e )
This setting d eterm ines how the VS-880EX im plem ents MMC. Set this to
“SLAVE.”
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-880EX functions as the master device
for external MIDI equipment.
SLAVE:
MMC is received. The VS-880EX functions as a slave device for
external MIDI equipment.
7 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Sync/ Tempo ?” appears in the dis-
play.
1 8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
8 . Press [YES].
Usin g Ex te rn a l Effe cts
De vice s
9 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
“SYS Syn:ErrLevel=” appears in the display.
When using external effects devices, the AUX SEND
jacks (A, B) function as effects send jacks. Here we see
how effects can be added to a performance recorded in
stereo on Track 1. This is handy when, for example,
you w ant to ad d reverb u sing an external effects
d evice. Use the IN PUT 1 and 2 jacks as the effect
return jacks.
1 0 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
ErrLe ve l (Erro r Le ve l)
This sets the interval (0–10) for checking MTC receiv-
ing status w hen synchronize VS-880EX w ith MTC
from an external MIDI device. If the MTC is not being
sent continuously, the VS-880EX checks the MTC and
if there is an error, cancels synchronization. By setting
a longer interval under such circumstances, synchro-
nization can continue, even if there is a certain degree
of error. Normally, set this to “5.”
1 . Connect your effects device as shown below.
1 1 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“SYS Syn:MTC Type=” appears in the display.
1 2 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MTC Ty p e (MTC Ty p e )
This selects the type of MTC (30, 29N, 29D, 25, or 24).
Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS-
880EX. Here, select “30.”
1 3 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
1 4 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SYSTEM].
The “SYNC MODE” field of the display will show
“EXT,” indicating that the unit will operate in syn-
chronization to MTC received from the SI-80S.
In this condition, operations performed on the
video equipment are performed in synchrony on
the VS-880EX.
INPUT
OUTPUT
2 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
FADER indicator lights green.
3 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] on Channel 1.
4 . Press PARAMETER [
l] [
] to let “MIX
Sw=” appears in the display.
5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MIX Sw (Mix Sw itch )
This sets how the signal is sent to the MIX bus. Here,
select “Off.”
Off:
On:
The signal is not sent to the MIX bus.
The signal is sent to the MIX bus.
1 8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS-880EX (idea and examples)
6 . H old d ow n [SH IFT] and p ress the channel 6
[AUX Send (CH EDIT)].
“AUX Sw=” appears in the display.
MST AUX Ba l (Ma ste r AUX Ba la n ce )
Adjust the left/ right balance (L63–0–R63) of the sound
that is output from the AUX SEND jacks. Set the initial
value to “0.”
7 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
1 6 . Press [FADER (EDIT)] several times to let the
AUX Sw (AUX Sw itch )
FADER indicator lights red.
This sets how the signal is sent to the AUX bus. Here,
select “Off.”
1 7 . Press [CH EDIT (SELECT)] on Channel 6.
1 8 . Press PARAMETER [
] several times until
Off:
The signal is not sent.
“RTN StereoIn=” appears in the display.
PreFade: The signal before passing through the chan-
1 9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
nel fader is sent.
PstFade: The signalafter passing through the channel
RTN Ste re o In (Ma ste r Ste re o In )
Here, select “Input 56.”
fader is sent.
Off:
Stereo In is not used.
8 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“AUX Level=” appears in the display.
Input 12: Selects IN PUT jacks 1/ 2 for u se w ith
Stereo In.
9 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Input 34: Selects IN PUT jacks 3/ 4 for u se w ith
Stereo In.
AUX Le ve l (AUX Le ve l)
This adjusts the level (0–127) of the signal sent to the
AUX bus. Set the initial value to “100.”
Input 56: Selects IN PUT jacks 5/ 6 for u se w ith
Stereo In.
Digital:
Selects the DIGITAL IN connector (coaxial
or optical) for use with Stereo In.
1 0 . Press PARAMETER [
“AUX Pan” appears in the display.
].
2 0 . Press PARAMETER [
“MST StIn Level=” appears in the display.
].
1 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
AUX Pa n
2 1 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
Th is ad ju sts th e stereo p lacem en t of th e sign al
(L63–0–R63) sent to the AUX bus. Set the initial value
to “0.”
RTN StIn Le ve l (Ma ste r Ste re o In Le ve l)
This adjusts the volume level (0–127) for Stereo In. Set
the initial value to “100.”
1 2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EDIT (FADER)]
several times until “AUX Level=” appears in the
display.
2 2 . Press PARAMETER [
].
“RTN StIn Bal=” appears in the display.
1 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 3 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
MST AUX Le ve l (Ma ste r AUX Le ve l)
RTN StIn Ba l (Ma ste r Ste re o In Ba la n ce )
This adjusts the balance (L63–0–R63) for Stereo In. Set
the initial value to “0.”
Adjust the volume (0–127) of the sound that is output
from the AUX SEND jacks. This is linked with the
AUX SEND knob on the top panel.
2 4 . With this, you are now ready for add the external
effect. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
1 4 . Press PARAMETER [
“MST AUX Bal=” appears in the display.
].
Return to Play condition.
1 5 . Rotate the TIME/ VALUE dial.
2 5 . While playing back the song, adjust the sound of
the effect.
The volume level of Stereo In can be adjusted directly
with the channel fader 6 when the effect return mixer
is in effect (when the FADER indicator is lit red).
1 8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
(G)
In d e x (w o rd s)
GPI.............................................................................45, 165
Gradation ........................................................................144
(A)
Automix ..........................................................................142
(H)
Headphones .............................................................20, 132
(C)
CD player..................................................................55, 110
CD player function ........................................................110
CD-R backup ..................................................................113
CD-R disc........................................................................107
CD-R recover..................................................................115
Channel.............................................................................22
Channel fader.............................................................15, 28
Channel Link............................................................43, 149
Coaxial ................................................................19, 55, 128
Compu-mix ....................................................................180
Control change message...............................................127
Current drive....................................................................21
Current song ....................................................................22
(I)
IDE.....................................................................................13
Initialize (Mixer/ System).............................................169
Input channel ...................................................................42
Insert............................................................................52, 66
(L)
Locator ........................................................................36, 37
Locator bank.....................................................................37
Loop recording ................................................................47
(M)
MD .............................................................................63, 128
MIDI ...............................................................................116
MIDI clock ......................................................................119
MMC ...............................................................................170
MIDI time code (MTC) .................................................116
Marker.........................................................................36, 38
Mask fader ......................................................................145
Master tape .......................................................................63
Metronome .....................................................................154
Mix bus..............................................................................25
Mix down..........................................................................63
Mute ................................................................................148
(D)
DAT ...........................................................................63, 128
DAT backup ...................................................................129
DAT name ......................................................................133
DAT recover ...................................................................131
DAT verify......................................................................134
DCC .................................................................................128
Destructive edit................................................................88
Digital disk recorder .......................................................28
Digital in connector ...................................................19, 55
Digital out connector ....................................................159
Direct out ........................................................................160
Disk drive .................................................................21, 100
Drive check.....................................................................160
Drive initialize................................................................100
Drive select .....................................................................104
Drop frame .....................................................................117
(N )
Non-destructive edit .......................................................88
Non-drop frame.............................................................117
Numeric keys .................................................................153
(O )
(E)
Optical.................................................................19, 55, 128
Over dubbing ...................................................................49
EZ routing.........................................................................74
Effect............................................................................31, 66
Effect bus ....................................................................25, 68
Equalizer ...........................................................................57
Error level ...............................................................118, 172
Event..................................................................................23
Exclusive message .........................................................171
External effects processor.............................................185
(P)
Partition ............................................................................21
Patch ..................................................................................70
Peaking type (Equalizer) ................................................58
Playlist.............................................................................163
Post level.........................................................................163
Pre level...........................................................................163
Preview ...........................................................................140
Program change message.............................................127
Punch in ............................................................................44
Punch out..........................................................................44
(F)
Fader match ............................................................144, 164
Finalize............................................................................112
Foot switch ...............................................................44, 165
Frame...............................................................................117
1 8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Track move .......................................................................91
Track number .................................................................111
Track time compression/ expansion .............................96
(R)
Random access.................................................................28
Realtime ..........................................................................144
Recording bus ..................................................................25
Recording mode...............................................................40
(U)
Undo................................................................................146
User routing .....................................................................87
(S)
S/ P DIF .......................................................................19, 55
SCMS...................................................................................6
SCSI ...................................................................................99
SMPTE time code ............................................................36
Sample rate ...............................................................40, 108
Scene..........................................................................73, 127
Scrub................................................................................141
Send/ Return ..............................................................31, 68
Sequential access .............................................................28
Shelving type (Equalizer)...............................................58
Shutdown .........................................................................33
Slave ........................................................................118, 172
Snapshot..........................................................................143
Solo function ..................................................................148
Song ...................................................................................22
Song copy (Archives extract)...............................106, 136
Song copy (Archives store) ..........................................105
Song copy (Playable).....................................................103
Song erase.......................................................................157
Song export.....................................................................138
Song import....................................................................137
Song name ......................................................................157
Song new ..........................................................................40
Song optimize ................................................................156
Song protect......................................................................64
Source................................................................................22
Status .........................................................................35, 126
Step edit ............................................................................74
Stereo in ..........................................................................152
Sub frame..........................................................................36
Surface scan ....................................................................101
Sync source.............................................................174, 176
Sync track................................................................119, 154
(V)
V-track.........................................................................30, 49
Vari pitch ........................................................................152
(Z)
Zero return .......................................................................17
Zip disk .............................................................................99
Zip drive ...........................................................................99
(T)
TOC .................................................................................112
Tap marker function .................................................36, 38
Template ...........................................................................74
Tempo map ............................................................121, 154
Track..................................................................................22
Track bouncing ........................................................60, 108
Track copy ........................................................................89
Track cut ...........................................................................94
Track erase........................................................................95
Track exchange ................................................................92
Track insert.......................................................................93
1 8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
MEMO ...
1 8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In fo rm a tio n
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
PAN AMA
Productos Superiores, S.A.
Apartado 655 - Panama 1
REP. DE PANAMA
PO LAN D
LEBAN O N
SIN GAPO RE
AFRICA
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
A. Chahine & Fils
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
P.O. Box 16-5857 Gergi Zeidan St.
Chahine Building, Achrafieh
Beirut, LEBANON
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
P.O. Box 2904,
El Horrieh Heliopolos, Cairo,
EGYPT
TEL: (02) 4185531
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 748-1669
TEL: (507) 270-2200
TEL: (01) 335799
PO RTUGAL
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 243 9555
URUGUAY
Todo Musica
Cuareim 1488, Montevideo,
URUGUAY
TEL: 5982-924-2335
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
RUA SANTA CATARINA
131 - 4000 Porto -PORTUGAL
TEL: (02) 208 44 56
O MAN
OHI Electronics & Trading
Co. LLC
P.O. Box 889 Muscat
Sultanate of OMAN
TEL: 959085
REUN IO N
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules MermanZL
Chaudron - BP79 97491
Ste Clotilde REUNION
TEL: 28 29 16
TAIW AN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
VEN EZUELA
RO MAN IA
FBS LINES
Plata Libertatii 1.
RO-4200 Cheorgheni
TEL: (066) 164-609
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
Q ATAR
Badie Studio & Stores
P.O. Box 62,
DOHA QATAR
TEL: 423554
VENEZUELA
TEL: (02) 285 9218
SO UTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle Street (Cnr Melle and
Juta Street)
Braamfontein 2001
Republic of SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
RUSSIA
THAILAN D
Slami Music Company
Sadojava-Triumfalnaja st., 16
103006 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: 095 209 2193
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
P.O. Box 2154 ALKHOBAR 31952,
SAUDI ARABIA
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
EURO PE
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona,
SPAIN
TEL: (03) 898 2081
VIETN AM
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Ho chi minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (8) 844-4068
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre Claremont
7700
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Khaled Ibn Al Walid St.
P.O. Box 13520
Damascus - SYRIA
TEL: (011) 2235 384
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
Republic of SOUTH AFRICA
BELGIUM/ HOLLAND/
LUXEMBO URG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3 B-2260 Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
TEL: (93) 308 1000
P.O. Box 23032
Claremont, Cape Town
SOUTH AFRICA, 7735
TEL: (021) 64 4030
SW EDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (08) 702 0020
AUSTRALIA/
N EW ZEALAN D
TURKEY
Barkat Muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat limited ireketi
Siraselvier Cad. Guney Ishani No.
86/ 6 Taksim, Istanbul TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
ASIA
DEN MARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Langebrogade 6 Post Box 1937
DK-1023 Copenhagen K.
DENMARK
AUSTRALIA
SW ITZERLAN D
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Musitronic AG
Gerberstrasse 5, CH-4410 Liestal,
SWITZERLAND
CHIN A
Beijing Xinghai Musical
Instruments Co., Ltd.
6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang
District, Beijing, CHINA
TEL: (010) 6774 7491
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty. Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor DUBAI
U.A.E.
P.O. Box 8050 DUBAI, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 360715
TEL: 32 95 3111
TEL: (061) 921 1615
FRAN CE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK
Parc de l'Esplanade F 77 462 St.
Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
HO N G KO N G
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
UKRAIN E
N EW ZEALAN D
TIC-TAC
Roland Corporation (NZ) Ltd.
97 Mt. Eden Road, Mt. Eden,
Auckland 3, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
Mira Str. 19/ 108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
FIN LAN D
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Lauttasaarentie 54 B
Fin-00201 Helsinki, FINLAND
TEL: (9) 682 4020
N O RTH AMERICA
TEL: 2415 0911
UN ITED KIN GDO M
CEN TRAL/ LATIN
AMERICA
IN DIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats, Compound
off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai 400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 498 3079
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
CAN ADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (0604) 270 6626
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 700139
ARGEN TIN A
GERMAN Y
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente
Handelsgesellschaft mbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Florida 656 2nd Floor
Office Number 206A
Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA, CP1005
TEL: (54-11) 4- 393-6057
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
Unit 2, 109 Woodbine Downs
Blvd, Etobicoke, ON
M9W 6Y1 CANADA
TEL: (0416) 213 9707
IN DO N ESIA
MIDDLE EAST
PT Galestra Inti
Kompleks Perkantoran
Duta Merlin Blok E No.6—7
Jl. Gajah Mada No.3—5,
Jakarta 10130,
TEL: (040) 52 60090
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
Bab Al Bahrain Road,
P.O. Box 20077
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
R. Coronel Octaviano da Silveira
203 05522-010
Sao Paulo BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 843 9377
GREECE
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6335416
V. Dimitriadis & Co. Ltd.
20, Alexandras St. & Bouboulinas
54 St. 106 82 Athens, GREECE
TEL: (01) 8227 775
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
7200 Dominion Circle
Los Angeles, CA. 90040-3696,
U. S. A.
KO REA
Cosmos Corporation
Service Station
261 2nd Floor Nak-Won Arcade
Jong-Ro ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 742 8844
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17 Diagorou St., P.O. Box 2046,
Nicosia CYPRUS
CHILE
HUN GARY
TEL: (0323) 685 5141
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Avenida Rancagua #0330
Providencia Santiago, CHILE
TEL: 56-2-373-9100
Intermusica Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
TEL: (02) 453 426
MALAYSIA
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
8 Retzif Fa'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yaho ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
IRELAN D
Roland Ireland
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
Bentley Music SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2443333
EL SALVADO R
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Notre y Alameda
Juan Pablo 2 No. 4010
San Salvador, EL SALVADOR
TEL: (503) 262-0788
PHILIPPIN ES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
JO RDAN
ITALY
MEXICO
AMMAN Trading Agency
Prince Mohammed St. P.O. Box
825 Amman 11118 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 4641200
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie, 8
20020 Arese Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323 Col. Olivar de
los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TEL: (525) 668 04 80
KUW AIT
Easa Husain Al-Yousifi
P.O. Box 126 Safat 13002
KUWAIT
N O RW AY
La Casa Wagner de
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Guadalajara s.a. de c.v.
Av. Corona No. 202 S.J.
Guadalajara, Jalisco Mexico
C.P.44100 MEXICO
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 5719499
As of February 17, 1999
TEL: (03) 613 1414
TEL: 273 0074
1 9 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
1 9 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|